B.Tech Mech Syllabus PDF

GMRIT
Academic Regulations, Curriculum and Syllabi
2016
B. Tech.
Mechanical Engineering
(4 Year Program)
Department of Mechanical Engineering

GMR Institute of Technology
Rajam, Andhra Pradesh
(An Autonomous Institute Affiliated to JNTU Kakinada, AP)
NBA Accredited and NAAC Accredited
Academic Rules and Regulations
2016
Undergraduate Programmes
GMR Institute of Technology

Rajam 532 127, Andhra Pradesh
(An Autonomous Institute, Affiliated to JNTU, Kakinada, AP)
Accredited by NAAC & NBA
GMR Institute of Technology (GMRIT) | Regulation 2016
Contents
1. Eligibility for Admission……………………………....................................................... iv

2. Duration of B. Tech. Programme……………………………………………………….. iv
3. Branches of Study…………………………………………………………………………….. iv
4. Programme Structure………………………………………………………………………. v
4.1. Credit Distribution for the Courses Offered………………………………… viii
4.2. Structure of the Curriculum……………………………………………………….. viii
4.3. Credits Break-up for Various Category of Courses………………………. x
4.4. Division of Marks for Continuous and Semester End Assessment.. xi
5. Evaluation Methodology…………………………………………………………………... xii
5.1. Continuous Assessment Pattern for all Courses…………………………... xii
6. Attendance Requirements………………………………………………………………... xvi
7. Promotion Policies…………………………………………………………………………… xvi
8. Graduation Requirements………………………………………………………………… xvii
9. Flexibility to Add or Drop Courses……………………………………………………. xix
10. Withdrawal from Examination…………………………………………………………. xix
11. Curriculum……………………………………………………………………………………… xx
ii
The Vision of GMRIT
 To be among the most preferred institutions for engineering and technological

education in the country
 An institution that will bring out the best from its students, faculty and staff – to learn,
to achieve, to compete and to grow – among the very best
 An institution where ethics, excellence and excitement will be the work religion, while
research, innovation and impact, the work culture
The Mission of GMRIT
 To turnout disciplined and competent engineers with sound work and life ethics
 To implement outcome based education in an IT-enabled environment
 To encourage all-round rigor and instill a spirit of enquiry and critical thinking among
students, faculty and staff
 To develop teaching, research and consulting environment in collaboration with
industry and other institutions
iii
Academic Regulations for B. Tech. Programme*

(For all the batches of candidates admitted in the Academic Year 2016–2017 and subsequently)
1. Eligibility for Admission

The total seats available as per the approved intake are grouped into two categories viz.
category A and Category B with a ratio of 70:30 as per the state government guidelines vide G.O
No.52
a. The admissions for category A and B seats shall be as per the guidelines of Andhra
Pradesh State Council for Higher Education (APSCHE) in consonance with
government reservation policy.
 Under Category A: 70% of the seats are filled through EAMCET counseling.
 Under Category B: 30% seats are filled based on 10+2 merits in compliance
with guidelines of APSCHE
b. Admission eligibility-Under Lateral Entry Scheme
Students with diploma qualification have an option of direct admission into 2nd year
B. Tech. (Lateral entry scheme). Under this scheme 20% seats of sanctioned intake
will be available in each course as supernumerary seats. Admissions to this three
year B Tech later entry Programme will be through ECET. The maximum period to
complete B. Tech. under lateral entry scheme is six consecutive academic years from
the date of joining.
2. Duration of the Programme
The course duration for the award of the Degree in Bachelor of Technology will be four
academic years, with two semesters in each year. However if a student is unable to complete the
course within 4 years, he/ she can do so by giving more attempts but within 8 consecutive
academic years from the date of admission.
Academic Calendar
For all the eight semesters a common academic calendar shall be followed in each semester by
having sixteen weeks of instruction, one week for the conduct of practical exams and with three
weeks for theory examinations and evaluation. Dates for registration, sessional and end
semester examinations shall be notified in the academic calendar of every semester. The
schedule for the conduct of all the curricular and co-curricular activities shall be notified in the
planner.
3. Branches of Study
B. Tech. Programmes
I. Chemical Engineering (CH)
II. Civil Engineering (CE)
*
Approved in the Academic Council Meeting held on March 24, 2018 (Satruday)
iv
III. Computer Science and Engineering (CS)

IV. Electrical and Electronics Engineering (EE)
V. Electronics and Communication Engineering (EC)
VI. Information Technology (IT)
VII. Mechanical Engineering (ME)
VIII. Power Engineering (PE)
4. Programme Structure
The curriculum will consist of courses of study (Theory, Practical, Contemporary Courses,
Mini Project, Term Papers, Project, Audit Courses, Self-study Courses, MOOCs, Summer
Internship and Full Semester Internship and Courses related Employability Skills) and
syllabi as prescribed by the respective Boards of Studies from time to time. The curriculum is
bifurcated into FSI and Non-FSI modes from 7th semester onwards.
Every student will be required to opt for six elective courses spanned across the semester from
4th to 8th semester from the list of electives as prescribed in the curriculum. Under Choice Based
Credit System (CBCS), the students may take one elective from the list of open electives offered
by other branches of engineering technology in consultation with their respective department.
a. Integrated Courses: Integrated courses are exclusively designed to provide a

unique learning experience to the students with the concept of layered learning
where in the students have the chances to practice while learning. These courses
designed by blending both theory and laboratory components in their core
curriculum and will be evaluated for 130 marks.
b. Contemporary Courses: These courses are designed with the help of experts from
industries and driven by experts from industries along with the internal faculty
members on the recent developments in core areas of engineering and technology.
These courses shall be registered as an elective course during their course of study
c. Mini Project: The curriculum offers Mini Projects in two different forms viz: (i) Mini
Project as a mandatory component in all lab courses (ii) 2 credit Mini Project during
5th or 6th semester. With respect to second one (ii) students will take mini project
batch wise and the batches will be divided as similar to lab courses. The report will
be evaluated by a committee as nominated by CoE constituted with internal &
external panels
d. Term Paper: The Term Paper is a self-study report and shall be carried out either
during 5th or 6th semester in choice with Mini Project. Every student will take up
this term paper individually and submit a report. The scope of the term paper could
be an exhaustive literature review choosing any engineering concept with reference
to standard research papers or an extension of the concept of earlier course work in
consultation with the term paper supervisor. The report will be evaluated by a
committee as nominated by HoD with the approval of CoE
v
e. Project work: The final project work shall be carried out during the 8th semester in
the non- FSI Model. Projects will be taken up batch wise. Internal evaluation will be
done by the Project Review Committee (PRC), comprising of HOD and two senior
faculty members along with the project supervisor. Semester end evaluation will be
done by Project Evaluation Committee (PEC) comprising of three members
including HOD, project guide and an external examiner nominated by the CoE
f. Audit Courses: Audit courses are among the compulsory courses and do not carry
any credits. All the students shall register for one Audit courses in the beginning of
3rdsemester. List of the courses will be notified at the beginning of the third
semester for all students and the student has to choose one audit course under self-
study mode at the beginning of third semester. All the students (regular and lateral
entry students) shall complete the audit course similar to other regular courses and
the results will be indicated with “Satisfactory” or “Not Satisfactory” performance.
g. Self-Study Courses: Self-study courses are the courses which are more similar to
theory courses where in the students learn the courses on independent mode. The
evaluation and assessment pattern for such courses shall be carried out as similar to
regular theory course. These courses shall be opted after getting proper approval
from the respective head of the department as well from the other head of the
department which is offering the course. The credits earned through these self-
study courses over and above the mandatory courses, and it will not be accounted in
CGPA calculation.
h. MOOCs: Meeting with the global requirements, to inculcate the habit of self-learning
and in compliance with UGC guidelines, MOOC (Massive Open Online Course) have
been introduced as electives
 The proposed MOOCs would be additional choices in all the elective
groups subject to the availability during the respective semesters and
respective departments will declare the list of the courses at the
beginning of the semester, which are having a minimum of 45 hours in a
given semester
 Course content for the selected MOOCs shall be drawn from respective
MOOCs links or shall be supplied by the department. Course will be
mentored by faculty members and Assessment & evaluation of the
courses shall be done by the department
 Three credits will be awarded upon successful completion of each
MOOCs
i. Summer Internship: As a part of curriculum in all branches of Engineering, it is
mandatory for all students to undergo summer internship Programme at industries
(core or allied) / R & D organization to get practical insight of their subject domain
during summer break after the 4th semester. This summer internship Programme
shall be availed to a maximum duration of 4 weeks and the assessment shall be
vi
carried out with both internal and external experts leading to “Satisfactory” and
“Non-Satisfactory Performance” and it will not be accounted for the calculation of
CGPA
j. Employability Skills: It is mandatory for all students to take a course on
Employability Skills from 3rd Semester to 6th Semester. The Employability Skills are
covered under two broad streams viz. Aptitude skills and Soft Skills. The credits
earned through these courses will be indicated in the grade sheet and will not be
taken into account for CGPA calculation.
k. Industry Driven One Credit Courses (IDC): Meeting with the industry
requirements, to reduce the gap between industry and academia this one credit (15
hrs.) course has been introduced over and above regular courses from 3rd Semester
to 6th Semester for the interested students. The credits earned through these
courses will be indicated in the grade sheet and will not be taken into account for
CGPA calculation.
l. Full Semester Internship: Students can opt for full semester Internship
Programme at industries based on their self-interest either during 7th or 8th
semester to get practical insight relevant to their core branch of engineering or in
allied branch of study under the guidance of internal and external expert members
in the institute and at Industries respectively. All Students who wish to choose FSI
pattern shall exercise this option well before the commencement of 7th semester.
Students who wish to take FSI during 8th semester will have to take one additional
course in 7th semester when compared with Non FSI stream. In case of some
extraordinary cases, students may be permitted to choose the FSI pattern even
before the commencement of 8th semester. In all such cases student shall take one
additional course offered during 8th semester under self-study mode and acquire
the required credits.
i. Minimum CGPA cut-off up to 5th semester as prescribed by CDC
ii. Competency mapping
iii. Students who opt for FSI either in 7th or 8th will be provided with Internship
subject the availability/selection by the industries
Further the credits earned through FSI Programme will be indicated in the grade sheet
and will be accounted for the calculation of CGPA.
FSI final evaluation will be done by the FSI Review Committee (FSIRC), comprising of
HOD, one senior faculty member and External (Industry) expert nominated by HOD.
vii
4.1. Credit Distribution for Courses Offered
No Course Credits
1 Theory Course 3
2 Integrated Course 4
3 Laboratory/Drawing Course 2
4 MOOCs 3
5 Elective courses 3
6 Audit Course 0
7 Term Paper 2
8 Mini Project 2
9 Summer Internship 0
10 Project work 10
11 Full Semester internship 16
Co-curricular and Extra-Curricular
12 2
Activities(CCEC)
13 Employability Skills (ES) 2
14 Industry Driven One Credit Courses (IDC) 1
4.2. Structure of curriculum

Following are the TWO models of course patterns out of which any student shall choose
one model based on the notified criteria for selection.
a. Full Semester Internship (FSI) Model

b. Non Full Semester Internship Model
In the Full semester internship Model, the students selected/opted for internship will be
distributed in both the 7th and 8th semester based on the internships available. In the Non
Full Semester Internship Model, all the selected students shall carry out the Project work
as per the norms.
A. Course Pattern for Four year Regular Programme (FSI)
Total
Sem. No. of Theory Courses No. of Lab Courses
Credits
I 21
5 3
II 21
III 3 + Employability Skills+ CCEC 25
6(5 Theory + 1 Integrated) 3+ CCEC Activities+
IV 25 + 1 + 1
Employability Skills
Summer Internship (Audit course) 0
6 (4 Compulsory Theory + 1 1+ Term paper/Mini Project +
V 23
Integrated + 1 Elective) Employability Skills + CCEC
6 + Audit course 1 + Term paper/Mini project +
VI (3 Compulsory Theory + 1 CCEC Activities + Employability 23 + 1+1
Integrated + 2 Elective) Skills
VII Full semester internship 16
viii
VIII 4 (2 Compulsory + 2 Elective) 2 16

16+Term paper +Mini project+
Internship +CCEC +
Total 34+4+1 Audit courses 174
Employability Skills+ Audit
Course
B. Course Pattern for Four Year Regular Programme (Non - FSI)

Total
Credits
I 21
5 3
II 21
III 3+ Employability Skills + CCEC 25
6 (5 Theory + 1 Integrated)
IV 3+ Employability Skills +CCEC 25 + 1+1
V 23
Integrated + 1 Elective) Employability Skills+ CCEC
6+ Audit course 1 + Term paper/Mini project+
VII 3 (1 Compulsory + 2 Elective) 2 13
VIII 3 (2 Compulsory + 1 Elective) Project work 19

16+Term paper + Mini project +
36+4+1 Audit courses Project work + CCEC + 174
Total
C. Course Pattern for Three Year Lateral Entry Programme (FSI)
Total
Credits
6 (5 Theory + 1 Integrated) 3+ CCEC Activities+ Employability
IV 25 + 1+1
Skills
V 23
6+ Audit course 1 + Term paper/Mini project
VII Full semester internship 16
VIII 4 (2 Compulsory + 2 Elective) 2 16
Total 24+4+1 Audit courses 10 + Term paper +Mini project+ 132
ix
Internship report +CCEC +

D. Course Pattern for Three year Lateral Entry Programme (Non FSI)
Total
Credits
6 (5 Theory + 1 Integrated)
IV 3+ CCEC Activities+ Employability
24 + 1+1
Skills
V 23
6 + Audit course 1 + Term paper/Mini project +
VII 3 (1 Compulsory + 2 Elective) 2 13
VIII 3 (2 Compulsory + 1 Elective) Project work 19

10 + Term paper +Mini project+
Total 26+4+1 courses Internship report +CCEC + 132
4.3 Credit Break-up for Various Category of Courses

a. For Four year regular Programme (FSI)
Total Theory Courses : 34 @ 3 credits each = 102
(29 Core Courses + 5 Elective Courses)
Total Integrated Courses : 4 @ 4 credits each = 16
Total Laboratory Courses : 16 @ 2 credits each = 32
Term Paper with self-study report : 1 @ 2 credits = 2
Mini Project with self-study report : 1@ 2 credits = 2
CCEC Activities : 2 @ 1 credits = 2
Employability skills : 2@ 1 credits = 2
FSI internship : 1 @ 16 credits = 16
b. For Four year regular Programme (Non FSI)

x

Project work : 1 @ 10 credits = 10
c. For three year lateral entry Programme (FSI)

Internship report : 1 @ 16 credits = 16
d. For three year lateral entry Programme (Non FSI)

Project work : 1 @ 10 credits = 10
4.4 Division of Marks for Continuous and Semester End Assessment
Marks Marks for

Course Continuous Semester end
Assessment Assessment
Theory 40 60
Integrated Course 40 (60T+30L)
Drawing courses 25 50
Laboratory 25 50
Term Paper 50 --
Audit Courses 50 --
Mini Project 25 50
Industry Driven Courses (IDC) 25 --
Full semester Internship 200 200
Project work 100 100
xi
5. Evaluation Methodology
a. The assessment will be based on the performance in the semester-end examinations and /
or continuous assessment, carrying marks as specified in Clause 10
b. At the end of each semester, final examinations will normally be conducted during
October/November and during April / May of each year. Supplementary examinations may
also be conducted at such times as may be decided by the Institute
c. Continuous Assessment Marks will be awarded on the basis of Continuous Evaluation made
during the semester as per the scheme given in Clause 10
d. The letter grade and the grade points are awarded based on the hybrid grading system
having earned grades and awarded grades. Grading is done based on the percentage of
marks secured by a candidate in individual course as detailed below:
Range of Percentage Letter Qualitative Grade

of Marks Grade Meaning Point
90-100 A+ Outstanding 10
Earned grade
85-89 A Excellent 9
Due to relative B+ Very Good 8
grading system the B Good 7
ranges of marks may C+ Average 6 Awarded grade
vary for each course C Satisfactory 5
based on the normal D Pass 4
distribution of marks
< 40 for theory and F Fail 0
Earned grade
< 50 for Lab
e. After completion of the Programme, the Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) from the I
Semester to VIII Semester (from III to VIII semester for lateral entry) is calculated using the
formula:
∑
∑
Where n is the number of courses registered for, ‘c i’ is the credits allotted to the given
course and ‘gi’ is the grade point secured in the corresponding course.
5.1 Continuous Assessment Pattern for all Courses

a. Theory Course
 Out of 40 marks allotted for continuous assessment 30 marks will be awarded based
on two tests (Each Test will be conducted for 40 marks and scale down to 30 marks)
conducted and 10 marks shall be awarded based on assignment test given below:
Internal Test 1 & Test 2 : 30 Marks (80 % of marks secured in 1st best internal tests
and 20% marks secured in 2nd best internal test)
 The duration of each internal test will be 90 minutes addressing predominantly
on lower order thinking skills and shall cover two units of syllabus in each test
 All the students will be notified with the marks secured within one week after the
completion of the sessional exams
xii
 Students are permitted for reconciliation with in a period of two working days
after the notification of marks
 The evaluation methodology of Design and Drawing Courses coming under
theory will be given in their respective course handouts which will be approved
by department HOD.
Assignment Test : 10 Marks (Test will be conducted for 30 marks and scale
scale down to 10 marks)
 The duration of each test will be 120 minutes predominantly focusing on Higher
Order Thinking Skills covering all the possible range of all such HOTs. In case, if
the course has little scope of HOTs, assessment shall be carried out with LOTs
b. Integrated Course
40 marks allotted for continuous assessment as given below:
Theory Course
20 marks will be awarded based on two tests conducted similar to theory( Each Test
will be conducted for 40 marks and scale down to 20 marks) as given below:
Internal Test 1 & Test 2 : 20 Marks (80 % of marks secured in 1st best internal tests
and 20% marks secured in 2nd best internal test)
Laboratory
20 marks are awarded for continuous assessment and following is the pattern for the
award of 20 marks
Preparation, Observation & Result : 10 Marks
Record : 05 Marks
Internal Test : 05 Marks
External Exam (Lab) : 30 Marks
External Exam (Theory) : 60 Marks
c. Laboratory Course:
25 marks are awarded for continuous assessment and following is the pattern for
the award of 25 marks
Without Mini Project:
Record : 05 Marks
Viva – Voce : 05 Marks
With Mini Project (through Augmented Experiments):
Record : 05 Marks
Viva – Voce : 05 Marks
Augmented Experiment : 05 Marks
xiii
Engineering drawing course is evaluated in line with lab courses and the
pattern of awarding 25 marks for continuous evaluation is as following
Day-to-day work : 15 marks
Internal test : 10 marks
There shall be two internal tests for 10 marks each during the semester and the
average shall be considered.
d. Term Paper
Continuous Assessment : 50 Marks
Distribution
Literature Survey : 10 Marks
Review 1 : 15 Marks
Review 2 : 15 Marks
Final Presentation : 10 Marks
e. Audit Courses
Online Objective Test : 50 Marks
f. Mini Project
Distribution
Review 1 : 05 Marks
Review 2 : 05 Marks
g. Project
Distribution
Innovativeness of the Project : 05 Marks
Experimentation / Simulation : 20 Marks
Result Analysis : 05 Marks
Review 1 : 20 Marks
Review II : 20 Marks
Project Report : 10 Marks
h. Full Semester Internship

Distribution
Internship Progress Report : 20 Marks
xiv
On Site Assessment : 30 Marks

Assessment by Industry : 100 Marks
(Intern Assessment Tool)
Final Assessement on Campus : 50 Marks
Total : 200 Marks
Distribution
Project Report : 120 Marks
i. Co-Curricular and Extra Curricular (CCEC) Activities
Students shall acquire 1 credit each in 2nd and 3rd years with the following
scheme:
Scheme of evaluation for the CCEC activities:
 No. of slots in each Semester @ 2 slots every week : 24
 No. of Stream (2-CC + 1-EC) :3
 No. of slots allotted for each stream :8
Requirement for the award of 1- Credit
 Students shall choose at least two streams of events in each semester
 Students shall secure 75% attendance in each stream of events to obtain
a certificate
 Students shall obtain 2 certificates of Participation in each semester.
The credits earned through these courses will be indicated in the grade sheet and
will not be taken into account for CGPA calculation.
j. Employability Skills (ES)
Students have to take up these courses from 3rd – 6th semesters. In both streams i.e
Aptitude Skills & Soft Skills (AS and SS) Students will be assessed in each semester.
Based on the marks secured in continuous assessment, students will be assessed for
AS. Based on the attendance for the various activities scheduled, students will be
assessed for SS. 16 periods are allotted for each stream per semester.
 Assessment for Aptitude skills

Continuous assessment : 30 Marks
Comprehensive Test : 20 Marks
For continuous assessment one examination will be conducted after every 5 weeks for
a maximum of 10 marks each (3x10=30). At the end of the semester a comprehensive
test will conducted for 20 marks. The student shall secure at least 40% marks in each
semester to get qualified.
xv
Assessment of Soft Skills

Continuous Assessment for Soft skill is done based on the participation of the students
in the various activities schedule during each semester. In every semester 6 activities
under SS will be organized and students are expected to attend at least 4 activities to
get qualified.
Student will secure 1 credit at the end of 4th semester and at the end of 6th semester
subject to the condition that he/she secures 40% marks in AS and 75 attendance in SS
in each semester.
h. Industry Driven One Credit Courses

Online Objective Test : 25 Marks
Grading:
Marks 25 ≤ and 20 ≥ : Excellent
Marks 20 < and 15 ≥ : Very Good
Marks 15 < and 10 ≥ : Good
Marks < 10 : Satisfactory
6. Attendance Requirements
a) It is desirable for a candidate to put on 100% attendance in all the subjects.

However, a candidate shall be permitted to appear for the semester end
examination by maintaining at least 75% of attendance on an average in all the
courses in that semester put together
b) The shortage of attendance on medical grounds can be condoned to an extent of
10% provided a medical certificate is submitted to the Head of the Department
when the candidate reports back to the classes immediately after the leave.
Certificates submitted afterwards shall not be entertained. Condonation fee as fixed
by the college for those who put on attendance between ≥ 65% and <75% shall be
charged before the end examinations. Attendance may also be condoned as per the
State Government rules for those who participate in sports, co-curricular and extra-
curricular activities provided their attendance is in the minimum prescribed limits
for the purpose and recommended by the concerned authority
c) In case of the students having overall attendance less than 65% after condonation
shall be declared detained and has to repeat semester again
d) In case of the student having less than 65% of attendance in any of the course
during a particular semester, he/she is not permitted to appear for that particular
course in the semester end examinations. In such cases, the students need to
undergo extra classes during the vacation or at convenient time to earn the shortage
of attendance. After completing the attendance requirements he/she may be
permitted to appear for the examination and it will be treated as a second attempt
e) His / her academic progress and conduct have been satisfactory
7. Promotion Policies
xvi
 In four year B. Tech. Programme, a student shall be promoted from 2nd year to 3rd
year only if s/he fulfills the academic requirements and earning of minimum 50% of
credits up to 2nd year
 In four year B. Tech. Programme, a student shall be promoted from 3rd year to 4th
year only if s/he fulfills the academic requirements and earning of minimum 50%
credits up to 3rd year
 In three year lateral entry B. Tech. Programme, a student shall be promoted from 3rd
year to 4th year only if s/he fulfills the academic requirements and earning of
minimum 50% credits up to 3rd year
8. Graduation Requirements
a) The following academic requirements shall be met for the award of the B. Tech. Degree
 Student shall secure 174 credits for regular B. Tech. Programme and 132 credits for
the students who entered in second year through lateral entry scheme. However, the
CGPA obtained for the best 167 credits (Excluding any one 3 credit course, CCEC and
ES) and 125 credits(Excluding any one 3 credit course, CCEC and ES)respectively
shall be considered for the award of Grade/Class/Division
 A student of a regular Programme who fails to earn 174 credits within eight
consecutive academic years from the year of his/her admission with a minimum CGPA
of 4.0 shall forfeit his/her degree and his/her admission stands cancelled
 A student of a lateral entry Programme who fails to earn 132 credits within six
consecutive academic years from the year of his/her admission with a minimum CGPA
of 4.0 shall forfeit his/her degree and his/her admission stands cancelled
b) Award of degree
Classification of degree will be as follows:
i. CGPA ≥ 7.5 : Degree with Distinction

ii. CGPA ≥6.5 and < 7.5 : Degree with First Class
iii. CGPA ≥5.0 and < 6.5 : Degree with Second Class
iv. CGPA ≥4.0 and < 5.0 : Degree with Pass Class
 First Class with Distinction: A candidate who qualifies for the award of the Degree
(vide clause 8 (a) having passed all the courses of study of all the eight semesters
(six semesters for lateral entry candidates) at the first opportunity, within eight
consecutive semesters (six consecutive semesters for lateral entry candidates) after
the commencement of his /her study and securing a CGPA of 7.5 and above shall be
declared to have passed in First Class with Distinction. For this purpose the
withdrawal from examination (vide clause 9) will not be construed as an
opportunity for appearance in the examination
 First Class: A candidate who qualifies for the award of the Degree (vide clause 8 (a)
having passed all the courses of study of all the eight semesters (six semesters for
lateral entry candidates) within maximum period of ten consecutive semesters
xvii
(eight consecutive semesters for lateral entry candidates) after the commencement
of his /her study and securing a CGPA of 6.5 and above shall be declared to have
passed in First Class
 Second Class : A candidate who qualifies for the award of the Degree (vide clause 8
(a) having passed all the courses of study of all the eight semesters (six semesters
for lateral entry candidates) within maximum period of ten consecutive semesters
(eight consecutive semesters for lateral entry candidates) after the commencement
of his /her study and securing a CGPA of 5.0 and above shall be declared to have
passed in Second Class
 Degree with Pass Mark : All other candidates who qualify for the award of the
degree shall be declared to have passed in Degree with Pass Mark
c) Grafting
In order to extend the benefit to the students with one/ two backlogs after either 6 th
semester or 8th semester, GRAFTING option is provided to the students enabling their
placements and fulfilling graduation requirements. Following are the guidelines for the
Grafting:
 Grafting will be done among the courses within the semester. Shall draw a
maximum of 7 marks from the any one of the cleared courses in the semester and
will be grafted to the failed course in the same semester.
 Students shall be given a choice of grafting only once in the 4 years Programme,
either after 6th semester (Option#1) or after 8th semester (Option#2)
 Option#1: Applicable to students who have maximum of TWO theory courses in 5th
and/or 6th semesters
 Option#2: Applicable to students who have maximum of TWO theory courses in 7th
and/or 8th semesters.
 Eligibility for grafting:
i. Prior to the conduct of the supplementary examination after the
declaration of the 6th or 8th semester results.
ii. She/he must appear in all regular or supplementary examinations as
per the provisions laid down in regulations for the courses s/he
appeals for grafting.
iii. The marks obtained by her/him in latest attempt shall be taken into
account for grafting of marks in the failed course(s).
d) Betterment chance
Student who clears all the subjects up to 6th semester and wish to improve their CGPA
can register and appear for one betterment chance for maximum of any five theory
courses up to 6th semester. Betterment chance can be availed along with 7th and 8th
semester examinations
e) Quick Supplementary Examination

Student who clears all the courses up to 7th semester shall have a chance to appear for
Quick Supplementary Examination to clear the failed courses of 8th semester
xviii
f) All the candidates who register for the semester end examination will be issued
memorandum of marks by the Institute. Apart from the semester wise marks memos,
the institute will issue the provisional certificate subject to the fulfillment of all the
academic requirements
9. Flexibility to Add or Drop Courses
a. It is mandatory that all the students need to earn the minimum number of credits (as
per clause 8) for the award of B. Tech. degree in their respective disciplines. However a
student can earn more number of credits if they wish, by registering one additional
course, from the list of courses available in the curriculum of all disciplines, over and
above to the existing courses from 4th semester to 6th semester
b. The students who are opting for full semester internship (FSI) in the 7th or 8th Semester,
they are permitted to take the courses as listed in 7th and 8th semester of the curriculum
are from the list of electives furnished in the curriculum
c. The students, who are in non FSI mode, shall register for the project work in the 8 th
semester only
d. The student shall be permitted to drop any SSC at any point of time
e. All the courses registered and cleared by a student in this mode will be mentioned in the
Cumulative Grade Memo (CGM) as additional acquired. However the CGPA is calculated
for the best 167/125 credits only (as mentioned in the clause 8)
10. Withdrawal from the Examination
a. A candidate may, for valid reasons, be granted permission by the Principal to withdraw
from appearing for the examination in any course or courses of only one semester
examination during the entire duration of the degree Programme. Also, only ONE
application for withdrawal is permitted for that semester examination in which
withdrawal is sought
b. Withdrawal application shall be valid only if the candidate is otherwise eligible to write
the examination and if it is made prior to the commencement of the examination in that
course or courses and also recommended by the Head of the Department
c. Such Withdrawal from the examination shall be treated as absent for the 1st attempt to
the respective examination and will lose the eligibility for First Class with Distinction
d. The student shall be allowed to drop FSI course either 7th or 8th semester within 4
weeks from the commencement of the FSI Programme due any uncertainty from either
side. In such case s/he will automatically entered into Non-FSI pattern of curriculum,
and s/he needs to register for respective courses in that semester and appear for
semester end examinations. In case if s/he has earned equivalent number of credits or
near to the equivalent number of credits with respect to clause 9, s/he shall forbid the
courses either partially or fully
e. If any student withdraws from FSI course after the stipulated period mentioned in the
clause 10.d, s/he will be considered as detained from the semester. S/he needs to
register for the semester in the next academic year
xix
General
a. s/he represents “she” and “he” both

b. Where the words ‘he’, ‘him’, ‘his’, occur, they imply ‘she’, ‘her’, ‘hers’ also
c. The academic regulations should be read as a whole for the purpose of any interpretation
d. In the case of any doubt or ambiguity in the interpretation of the above rules, the decision of
the Chairman, Academic Council will be final
The college may change or amend the academic regulations or syllabi from time to time and the
changes or amendments made shall be applicable to all the students with effect from the dates
notified by the institute.
11. Curriculum: The curriculum of all the UG Programmes is given below
xx
Department of Mechanical Engineering, GMRIT | Curriculum | Regulation 2016
Department Vision
To be a nationally preferred department of learning for students and teachers alike, with dual
commitment to research and serving students in an atmosphere of innovation and critical
thinking.
Department Mission
1. To provide high-quality education in Mechanical Engineering to prepare the graduates
for a rewarding career in Mechanical Engineering and related industries, in tune with
evolving needs of the industry.
2. To prepare the students to become thinking professional and good citizens who would
apply their knowledge critically and innovatively to solve professional and social
problems.
Program Educational Objectives

PEO 1: Graduates will be engaged in continuous learning and professional development
through in depth teaching and learning processes in mechanical engineering and also
in other allied fields.
PEO 2: Graduates will apply their engineering skills, exhibiting critical thinking and problem
solving skills in professional engineering practices and tackle socio-economical,
technical and business challenges.
PEO 3: Graduates will adopt ethical attitude and exhibit effective skills in communication,
management, teamwork and leadership qualities
1
Program Outcomes
Engineering graduate will be able to
PO 1: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals, and an

engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering problems.
(Engineering knowledge)
PO 2: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze complex engineering
problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of mathematics,
natural sciences, and engineering sciences. (Problem analysis)
PO 3: Design solutions for complex engineering problems and design system components or
processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate consideration for the public
health and safety, and the cultural, societal, and environmental considerations.
(Design/development of solutions)
PO 4: Use research-based knowledge and research methods including design of
experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and synthesis of the information to
provide valid conclusions. (Conduct investigations of complex problems)
PO 5: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and modern engineering
and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex engineering activities with
an understanding of the limitations. (Modern tool usage)
PO 6: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to assess societal, health,
safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to the
professional engineering practice. (The engineer and society)
PO 7: Understand the impact of the professional engineering solutions in societal and
environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and need for sustainable
development. (Environment and sustainability)
PO 8: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and
norms of the engineering practice. (Ethics)
PO 9: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in diverse teams, and
in multidisciplinary settings. (Individual and team work)
PO 10: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the engineering
community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and write
effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give
and receive clear instructions. (Communication)
PO 11: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the engineering and management
principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to
manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments. (Project management and
finance)
PO 12: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent
and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological change. (Life-long
learning)
PSO1: Demonstrate the knowledge and application of Geometric modeling, Analysis and
Simulation of mechanical engineering systems. (Program Specific)
PSO2: Demonstrate the knowledge and application of advanced techniques in manufacturing.
(Program Specific)
2
Department of Mechanical Engineering
[Minimum Credits to be earned: 174 (for regular students)/132 (for Lateral entry students)]
First Semester
Periods
No Course Code Course POs
L T P C
1 16HSX01 English Communication Skills I 10 3 1 - 3
2 16MAX01 Engineering Mathematics I 1,2 3 1 - 3
3 16PYX01 Engineering Physics 1,2 3 1 - 3
4 16MEX01 Engineering Mechanics 1,2,3 3 1 - 3
5 16CSX01 Problem Solving using C 1,2,3 3 1 - 3
6 16PYX02 Engineering Physics Lab 4 - - 3 2
7 16CSX02 Problem solving using C Lab 4 - - 3 2
8 16MEX02 Engineering Drawing 4,9,10, PSO1 - - 3 2
Total 15 5 9 21
Second Semester
1 16HSX03 English Communication Skills II 10 3 1 - 3
2 16MAX02 Engineering Mathematics II 1,2 3 1 - 3
3 16CYX01 Engineering Chemistry 1,2 3 1 - 3
4 16EEX01 Basic Electrical Engineering 1,3 3 1 - 3
5 16CHX01 Environmental Studies 1,3,6,7 3 1 - 3
6 16HSX02 English Communication Skills Lab 10 - - 3 2
7 16CYX02 Engineering Chemistry Lab 4 - - 3 2
8 16MEX03 Engineering Workshop 1,2,10,12 - - 3 2
Total 15 5 9 21
Third Semester
Periods
L T P C
1 16ME301 Engineering Thermodynamics 1,2,3 3 1 - 3
2 16ME302 Fluid Mechanics & Hydraulic Machines 1,2,3 3 1 - 3
3 16ME303 Machine drawing 1,3,5,10, PSO1 2 - 4 4
4 16ME304 Material Science and Metallurgy 1,2,3 3 1 - 3
5 16IT306 Object Oriented Programming through Java 1,2,3,5 3 1 - 3
6 16ME305 Rigid Body Dynamics 1,2,3 3 1 - 3
7 16ME306 Fluid Mechanics & Hydraulic Machines Lab 1,2,10 - - 3 2
8 16IT309 Java Lab 2,3,4,5 - - 3 2
9 16ME307 Metallurgy Lab 1,2,10 - - 3 2
10 16HSX05 CC&EC Activities I 10 - - 3 -
11 16ESX1A Employability Skills I - 2 - -
Total 17 7 16 25
Fourth Semester
1 16ME401 Applied Thermal Engineering 1,2,3,7 3 1 - 3
2 16HS405 Engineering Economics and Financial Accounting 1,2,3,9,11 3 1 - 3
3 16MA303 Engineering Mathematics III 1,2,4,5,9 3 - 2 4
4 16ME402 Kinematics of Machinery 1,2,3 3 1 - 3
5 16ME403 Mechanics of Solids 1,2,3 3 1 - 3
6 16ME404 Manufacturing Processes 1,2,3,4 3 1 - 3
7 16ME405 Mechanics of Solids Lab 1,2,3,10 - - 3 2
8 16ME406 Manufacturing Processes Lab 1,2,3,10,12 - - 3 2
9 16ME407 Thermal Engineering Lab 1,2,10,12,PSO2 - - 3 2
10 16HSX05 CC&EC Activities I 10 - - 3 1
11 16ESX1B Employability Skills II - 2 - 1
Total 18 7 14 27
3
Fifth Semester
Periods
L T P C
1 16ME501 Elements of Machine Design 1,2,3 3 1 - 3
2 16ME502 Dynamics of Machinery 1,2,3 3 1 - 3
3 16ME503 Metal Cutting and Machine Tools 1,2,3 3 1 - 3
4 16ME504 Mechanical Measurements and Metrology 1,3,4,10 3 - 2 4
5 16ME505 Steam and Gas turbines 1,2,3,7 3 1 - 3
6 Elective I/CC 3 1 - 3
7 16ME507 Machine Tools & Dynamics Lab 1,2,3,10,PSO2 - - 3 2
16ME508/ - - 3 2
8 Mini Project /Term Paper All POs
16ME509
9 16HSX06 CC & EC Activity II 10 - - 3 -
10 16ESX2A Employability Skills - III - 2 - -
11 16SIX01 Summer Internship All POs - - - -
Total 18 7 11 23
Sixth Semester
1 16ME601 Design of Machine Members 1,2,3 3 1 - 3
Geometric Modeling and Computer Aided
2 16ME602 1,2,5,9,10, PSO1 3 - 2 4
Manufacturing
3 16ME603 Heat Transfer 1,2,3,7 3 1 - 3
4 16ME604 Mechatronics 1,2,3,4,9 3 1 - 3
5 Elective II/CC 3 1 - 3
6 Elective III (Open Elective) 3 1 - 3
7 16ME607 Heat Transfer Lab 1,2,3,7,10, PSO2 - - 3 2
16ME509/
8 Term Paper /Mini Project All POs - - 3 2
16ME508
9 Audit Course - - - -
10 16HSX06 CC & EC Activity II 10 - - 3 1
11 16ESX2B Employability Skills IV - 2 - 1
Total 18 7 11 25
Seventh Semester
Periods
L T P C
1 16ME701 Finite Element Method 1,2,3, PSO1 3 1 - 3
3 Elective IV/CC 3 1 - 3
Elective V/CC 3 1 - 3
4 1,2,3,5,9,10,12,
16ME704 Additive Manufacturing & Mechatronics Lab - - 3 2
PSO1, PSO2
5 1,2,3,5,10,12,
16ME705 Computer Aided Analysis and Simulation lab - - 3 2
PSO1
1
6 16ME706 Full Semester Internship 10,11 - - - 16
Total 9 3 6 13/16
Eighth Semester
1 16ME801 Industrial Engineering & Management 1,10,11,12 3 1 - 3
2 16ME802 Operations Research 1,2,3,5 3 1 - 3
3 Elective VI/CC 3 1 - 3
9,10,11,12, PSO1, - - - 10
4 16ME804 Project
PSO2
5 16ME706 Full Semester Internship2 10,11 16
Total 9 3 - 19/16
1
Student who opt for FSI-16ME706 during 7th semester, have to register one more additional elective and 16
ME704 & 16ME705 as additional lab courses during 8 th semester
2
Student who opt for FSI-16ME706 during 8th semester, have to register an additional course in consultation
with HOD during 7thsemester
4
List of Elective Courses

Elective I
Periods
L T P C
1 16ME001 Advanced IC Engines 1,2,3 3 1 - 3
2 16ME002 Advanced Materials 1,3 3 1 - 3
3 16ME003 Industrial Robotics 1,2,3,PSO1 3 1 - 3
4 Non-Traditional Machining and Forming
16ME004 1,2,PSO2 3 1 - 3
Processes
5 MOOCs - - - 3
Elective II
1 16ME005 Additive Manufacturing 1,2,3, PSO2 3 1 - 3
2 16ME006 Automobile Engineering 1,2,3,6,7 3 1 - 3
3 16ME007 Control Systems 1,2,3,4,9 3 1 - 3
4 16ME008 Fatigue, Fracture and Creep 1,2,3 3 1 - 3
5 MOOCs - - - 3
Elective III (Open Electives – Mathematics, Chemistry, Entrepreneurship Skills, Industrial Safety and Engineering &
Technology)
1 16CE007 Disaster Management 2 3 1 - 3
2 16EE004 Renewable Energy Sources 2,7 3 1 - 3
3 16ME009 Principles of Entrepreneurship 1,5,8,11 3 1 - 3
4 16EC004 Fundamentals of Global Positioning System 1,2,6 3 1 - 3
5 16CS006 Computational Intelligence 3,5,6 3 1 - 3
6 16CS007 IoT for Engineering Applications 1,5 3 1 - 3
7 16CH007 Industrial Safety and Hazard Management 1,2,3,6,8 3 1 - 3
8 16IT005 Fundamentals of Cloud Computing 2,5,6 3 1 - 3
9 16PE006 Smart Grid Technology 3,5 3 1 - 3
10 16MA001 Computational Mathematics 1,2 3 1 - 3
11 16CY001 Nano Science & Technology 1,12 3 1 - 3
Elective IV
1 16ME010 Design for Manufacturing 1,2,7,12,PSO2 3 1 - 3
2 16ME011 Industrial Tribology 1,2,3,12 3 1 - 3
3 16ME012 Refrigeration and Air Conditioning 1,2,3,7 3 1 - 3
4 16ME013 Supply Chain Management 1,2,5,10,11,12 3 1 - 3
5 MOOCs - - - 3
Elective V
1 16ME014 Alternative Sources of Energy 1,2,3,7 3 1 - 3
2 16ME015 Energy and Environmental Engineering 1,6,7,8 3 1 - 3
3 16ME016 Jet Propulsion and Rocket Engineering 1,2,3,7 3 1 - 3
4 16ME017 Total Quality Management 1,10,11,12 3 1 - 3
5 MOOCs - - - 3
Elective VI
1 16ME018 Computational Fluid Dynamics 1,2,3,4,5 3 1 - 3
2 16ME019 Professional Ethics in Engineering 6,7,8,12 3 1 - 3
2 16ME020 Power Plant Engineering 1,2,3,6,7 3 1 - 3
3 16ME021 Production Planning and Control 1,2,3,5,11,12 3 1 - 3
4 16ME022 Project Management 1,5,9,10,11,12 3 1 - 3
5 MOOCs - - - 3
Contemporary Courses3 (CC)
1 16ME023 Mechanical Handling 1,2,3,6,7 3 1 - 3
2 16ME024 Mechanical Maintenance and safety 1,2,3,6,7 3 1 - 3
3 16ME025 Power Plant Operations and Maintenance 1,2,3,6,7 3 1 - 3
5
4 16ME026 Safety Management 1,2,3,6,7 3 1 - 3

4
One Credit Course (15 Hours)
1 16MEI01 Introduction to Turbo Machines and Jet Engines 1,2,3,6,7 1 0 0 1
Mass production of Pig Iron in an Integrated Steel
2 16MEI02 1,2,3,6,7 1 0 0 1
plant
3 16MEI03 Industrial Safety 1,2,3,6,7 1 0 0 1
Audit Courses
Contemporary India: Economy, Polity & society
1 16AT001
(ME)
2 16AT002 Indian Heritage and Culture (EEE)
3 16AT003 Intellectual Property Rights and Patents (ECE)
4 16AT004 Introduction to Journalism (CSE)
5 16AT005 Professional Ethics and Morals (CE) -
6 16AT006 Science, Technology and Development (Chem)
7 16AT007 Industrial Sociology (PE)
8 16AT008 Organizational Behavior (IT)
9 16AT009 Communication Etiquette in workplaces (BSH)
___________________________________
3,4Contemporary and One Credit Courses may vary from one Academic Year to another Academic Year
and depends on the recent trends in the industries
6
CURRICULUM FEATURES
UNDER ACADEMIC REGULATION 2016
1. Choice based credit system

2. Types of learning strategies
Curriculum is designed and developed in such a way that it provides a high degree
of flexibility to promote a learner centric environment through different types of
learning strategies viz. Independent learning, collaborative learning and
interactive learning.
❖ Independent learning
o Self study elective courses
o Self study topics in each unit in all the courses
❖ Collaborative Learning
o Laboratory classes
o Mini projects in all laboratory courses
o Main project to demonstrate all the possible learning outcomes
❖ Interactive Learning
o Tutorial classes in all the courses wherever possible
3. Industry engagement
❖ Industry driven 3-credit elective courses
❖ Industry driven 1-credit courses from 3rd semester onwards
❖ Summer internship (One month duration) at the end of 2nd year during the
program of study
❖ Full semester internship (FSI) (Six month) during fourth year during the
program of study
4. Layered learning
5. Research oriented electives in the form of term paper
6. Credited courses for employability skills, extra- and co- curricular activities
7. Assessment pattern for all courses in accordance with revised Bloom’s
taxonomy
8. Distribution of courses
7
Department of Mechanical Engineering, GMRIT | Syllabi | Regulation 2016
16HSX01 English Communication Skills I

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Infer explicit and implicit meaning of a text
2. Construct clear, grammatically correct sentences using a variety of sentence structures
3. Analyze and Produce various types & formats of emails, letters in formal & informal ways to meet
particular purposes
4. Select and apply appropriate words and phrases in different contexts
5. Formulate and present ideas effectively in spoken form
6. Discuss social issues with concern and imagine possible solutions
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO10
CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 3
CO6 3
3–Strongly linked | 2–Moderately linked | 1–Weakly linked
Unit I
In London by M. K. Gandhi
Using appropriate word/phrases, synonyms and antonyms, nouns, pronouns, paragraph writing, changing
autobiography into biography
Montgomery Bus Boycott
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Pecuniary Independence by P. T. Barnum
Using appropriate word/phrases, synonyms and antonyms, Adjectives, Adverbs, Note-making, Rewriting
sentences and Short talk
TED-Sashi Tharoor
12+3 Hours
Unit III
The Drunkard by W. H. Smith
Similes, Rhythmic expressions, One-word substitution, Describing people, Synonym and Antonyms, Tenses
(past and present), Gerund and Verbal Adjective, Summarizing, essay writing, writing paragraph
Essay writing tips
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Three Days to see by Hellen Keller
Deriving words, adjective formation, Tenses (future), prefixes, ModalAuxiliary verbs, Dialogue writing,
Expressing opinions/ideas, collecting information
Famous Indians with disability
11+4 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. M. S. Rama Murty and M. Hariprasad, Prose for Communication Skills, Ravindra Publishing House,
Hyderabad, 2012
8
Reference (s)
1. J. Seely, Oxford Guide to Effective Writing and Speaking, OUP, 2013
2. Quirk, Greenbaum, Leech and Svartvk, A Comprehensive Grammar of the English language, Pearson,
India, 2010
3. R. Murphy, English Grammar in Use, 4th Ed, CUP, Cambridge, 2012
4. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Montgomery_Bus_Boycott
5. https://www.ted.com/talks/shashi_tharoor?language=en
6. http://www.internationalstudent.com/essay_writing/essay_tips
7. http://www.thebetterindia.com/16449/famous-indians-with-disability
Internal Assessment Pattern

Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Assignment Test 5 (%)
Remember 25 25 -
Understand 25 25 -
Apply 50 50 40
Analyze - - 30
Evaluate - - -
Create - - 30
Total (%) 100 100 100
Sample question (s)

Remember
1. Find a synonym for each of the following words.
i. Emulate ii. Mend
2. Find an antonym for each of the following words
i. Intensive ii. Extravagance
Understand
1. Sketch the personality of Edward Middleton as he emerges from the conversation in the play.
2. Summarize Gandhi‘s attempts to model himself on the English gentleman and which circumstances
force him to realize that he has been pursuing a false idea?
Apply
1. Construct a dialogue between students about organizing music club activities in their college.
2. Construct a dialogue between two friends about how they plan their own careers.
Analyze and Create

1. Prepare an essay in about 300 words on ‗some concrete measures to combat pollution.
2. Create an imaginary conversation between a blind boy and his friend on their visit to a drama.
5
Assignment test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills pertaining to this course
9
16MAX01 Engineering Mathematics I

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Classify and solve analytically a wide range of first and higher order ordinary differential equations
with constant coefficients
2. Apply the knowledge of Mean value theorems, Maxima and Minima of functions of several variables
3. Analyze the characteristics and trace the curve of an equation
4. Adapt methods for measuring lengths, volumes, surface area of an object and transformation of
coordinates in practical situations
5. Utilize basic knowledge of conservative field, potential function and work done in engineering
problems
6. Identify the relationships between line, surface and volume integrals
COs – POs Mapping

COs PO1 PO2
1 3 2
2 3 2
3 3 2
4 3 2
5 3 2
6 3 2
Unit I
Differential Equations
Differential equations of first order and first degree–exact, linear and Bernoulli Applications to Newton‘s Law
of cooling, Law of natural growth and decay, orthogonal trajectories, Non-homogeneous linear differential
equations of second and higher order with constant coefficients with RHS term of the type e ax, Sin ax, cos ax,
polynomials in x, eaxV(x), xV(x)
Heat flow problems–Variation of parameters 11+4 Hours
Unit II
Mean Value Theroms and Functions of Several Variables
Generalized Mean Value theorem (All theorems without proof), Functions of several variables-Partial
differentiation, Functional dependence, Jacobian, Maxima and Minima of functions of two variables with
constraints and without constraints. Curve tracing-Cartesian-Polar and Parametric curves
Rolle’s, Lagrange’s and Cauchy’s mean value theorems–Generalized Mean Value theorem proofs
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Applications of Integration
Applications of Integration to Lengths, Volumes and Surface areas of revolution in Cartesian and Polar
Coordinates. Multiple integrals-double and triple integrals, change of variables (Cartesian and Polar
coordinates), Change of order of Integration
Applications of Integration–Centroid–Mass 12+3 Hours
Unit IV
Vector Calculus
Vector Differentiation-Gradient, Divergence, Curl and their related properties of sums-products,
Laplacianoperator, Vector Integration - Line integral, work done, Potential function, area, surface and volume
integrals, Vector integral theorems: Greens, Stokes and Gauss Divergence Theorems (All theorems without
proof) and related problems
Vector identities–Proof of Green’s theorem 11+4 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
10
Textbook (s)
1. B. S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 42 nd Ed., Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2012
2. E. Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9 th Ed., Wiley, 2012
3. R. K. Jain, S. R. K.Iyengar, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 4 th Ed., NarosaPublishingHouse,
NewDelhi, 2014
Reference (s)
1. B. V. Ramana, Engineering Mathematics, 4th Ed., Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2009
2. D. S. Chandrashekharaiah, Engineering Mathematics, Volume 1, Prism Publishers, 2010
3. T. K. V. Iyengar, B. Krishna Ghandhi, S. Ranganathan and M.V. S.S.N. Prasad, Engineering
Mathematics, Volume-I, 12th Ed., S. Chand Publishers, 2014
4. U. M. Swamy, P. VijayaLaxmi, K. L. Sai Prasad and M. Phani Krishna Kishore, A Text Book of
Engineering Mathematics–I, Excel Books, New Delhi, 2010

Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Assignment Test6 (%)
Remember 30 30 -
Understand 40 40 -
Apply 30 30 60
Analyze - - -
Evaluate -- - 30
Create -- - 10
Total (%) 100 100 100
Sample question (s)

Remember
1. Find the Integrating factor of x 2
y  2 xy
2
 dx   x 3 2

 3x y dy  0

2. Define solenoidal and irrotational for a Vector point function f .

3. Find the volume of solid generated by the revolution of the cardioid r = a(1+cos ) about the initial line
=0
Understand
Solve ( D  4 D  4 ) y  0
2
1.
2
d y dy
6  25 y  e  S in x
2x
2. Solve 2
dx dx
3. Find the volume of the greatest rectangular parallelopiped that can be inscribed in the ellipsoid
2 2 2
x y z
2
 2
 2
1
a b c
Apply
1. A body originally at 80 0Ccools down to 60 oC in 20 minutes, the temperature of the air being
40oC.What will be the temperature of the body after 40 minutes from original?
2. Evaluate the integral by the change of order of integration ∫ ∫
3. Show that the vector ̅ + ̅ ̅ is irrotational and find its Scalar
potential
Create
1. Apipe 20 cm in diameter contains steam at 200 0C. It is covered by a layer of insulation 6cm thick and
thermal conductivity 0.0003. If the temperarature of the outer surface is 30 oC. Find the heat lose per
hour from 2 meter length of the pipe
6
11
12
16PYX01 Engineering Physics

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Illustrate the concepts of Interference, Diffraction, Polarization and their applications
2. Summarize the concepts of electric fields, magnetic fields and superconductivity and make out the
scope of applications in various engineering fields
3. Outline the quantum mechanics to infer conductivity nature of metals
4. Explain the properties and application of dielectric, magnetic and Nano-materials
5. Demonstrate the emission of laser light, optical fibers and their applications in various Engineering
fields
6. Analyze the engineering Applications based on Fundamental concepts
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2
1 3 2
2 3 2
3 3 2
4 3 2
5 3 2
6 3 2
Unit I
Optics
Interference:Superposition of waves-Coherence-Young's double slit experiment-Interference in thin films by
reflection (Qualitative treatment)–Newton's rings.Diffraction: Fresnel and Fraunhoffer diffractions-Fraunhoffer
diffraction at a single slit-Diffraction grating-Grating spectrum, Polarization–Types of Polarization-Double
refraction-Nicol prism-Quarter and Half wave plate. Lasers: Characteristics of laser–Stimulated absorption–
Spontaneous emission-Stimulated emission–Population inversion–Pumping mechanism–Active medium–Laser
systems: Ruby laser-He-Ne laser–Semiconductor laser–Applications of Lasers
Wedge shaped film–Polarization–Holography
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Electrostatics and Electromagnetism
Gauss law in electricity and it‘s applications: Coulomb‘s law from Gauss law-spherically distributed charge-
Infinite line of charge-Infinite sheet of charges–Ampere's Law-Magnetic field due to current (Biot-Savart‘s
Law)-B due to a current carrying wire and a circular loop,-Faraday‘s law of induction-Lenz‘s law-Induced
fields-Maxwell‘s equations (Qualitative treatment)-Hall Effect-Electromagnetic Wave and poynting vector
(Qualitative treatment), Superconductivity–Superconductivity phenomenon-General properties-Meissner effect-
Penetration depth-Type I and type II superconductors-Flux quantization-DC and AC Josephson effect-
Applications of superconductors
Infinite line of charge–Infinite sheet of charges Quantum Interference (SQUID)
11+3 Hours
Unit III
Quantum Theory of Solids–Semiconductors–Optical Fiber
Quantum theory of solids: Dual nature of matter, properties of matter waves-Schrödinger‘s wave equation–
Physical significance of wave function–Particle in a box (one dimensional)-Free electron theory of metals,
electrical conductivity-quantum free electron theory–Fermi Dirac Distribution-Kronig-Penney model
(qualitative)-Classification of materials into conductors-semi-conductors & insulators. Semiconductors: Carrier
Concentration (Intrinsic and Extrinsic, qualitative treatment only), Carrier drift, Carrier diffusion, Optical Fiber:
–principle and propagation of light in optical fibers–Numerical aperture and acceptance angle–types of optical
13
fibers–single and multimode, step index and graded index fibers–applications–fiber optic communication
system
Uncertainty principle–Intrinsic and Extrinsic Semiconductor–Fiberoptic sensors
12+4 Hours
Unit IV
Magnetic, Dielectric & Nanomaterials
Magnetic Materials: Origin of magnetic moment (Bohr Magneton)-Classification of Magnetic materials-Dia,
para, ferro, Anti-ferro and Ferri magnetism-Domain and Weiss field theory (qualitative treatment only)-
Hysteresis Curve-Soft and Hard magnetic materials-Applications of magnetic materials
Dielectric Materials: Dielectric Polarization-Electronic, ionic and orientation polarizations (Qualitative treatment)
-Dielectrics in alternating fields-frequency dependence of the Polarizability ((Qualitative treatment), Important
dielectric materials
Nanomaterials: Introduction to nano materials-Physical, mechanical-electrical and optical properties of nano
materials-Preparation techniques of nano materials (Sol-Gel, CVD, Ball Milling)-Nano tubes-Different methods
of preparation carbon nano tubes (CNT‘s) (CVD)-Applications of Nanomaterials
Permeability–Magnetization–Dielectric constant–Ferro and Piezo electric effect and materials
10+4 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Halliday, Resnick and Krane, Physics Part-II, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd, 2012
2. S. O. Pillai, Solid State Physics, 6th Ed., Newage International Publishers, 2015
3. M. R. Srinivasan, Engineering Physics, 2 nd Ed., Newage International Publishers, 2014
4. A. S. Vasudeva, Modern Engineering Physics, S. Chand and Company, New Delhi, 2006
5. C. M. Srivastava and C.Srinivasan, Science of Engineering Materials, Wiley Eastern Pvt. Ltd, 1997
6. C. P. Poole and F. J. Owens, Introduction to Nanotechnology, Wiley, New Delhi, 2007
Reference (s)
1. R. K. Gour and S. L. Gupta, Engineering Physics, Dhanpathrai Publications, New Delhi, 2002
2. V. Rajendran, Engineering Physics, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private LTD, 2010
3. M. Armugam, Engineering Physics, Anuradha Agencies, 2007

Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Assignment Test 7(%)
Remember 40 40 -
Understand 40 40 -
Apply 20 20 80
Analyze - - 20
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Sample question (s)

Remember
1. Define Principle of Superposition?
2. State Faraday‘s law of electromagnetic induction and Lenz‘s law.
3. Summarize Meissenr‘s effect of super conductors.
Understand
1. Explain the construction and working principle of Nicole‘s prism.
2. Construct Ruby laser and explain its working principle with energy level diagram.
3. Conclude the inferences from the M-H characteristics of Type-1 and Type-2 super conductors.
7
14
Apply
1. List any four applications of lasers with reference to their characteristics.
2. Apply Biot-Savart‘s law, and calculate the Magnetic field induction along the infinite length of a straight
conductor at points close to the conductor.
3. Calculate electric field intensity due to infinite line of charge by applying Gauss law.
Analyze
1. Compare Fraunhoffer‘s diffraction and Fresnel‘s diffractions.
2. Discuss the role of Meta stable states in lasing action.
3. Discuss the BCS theory of Superconductors.
15
16MEX01 Engineering Mechanics

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Draw the free body diagram of a given physical system and compute the resultant of a given coplanar
system of forces
2. Estimate the centroid of composite figures and bodies
3. Estimate area moment of inertia and mass moment of inertia of composite figures and bodies
4. Explain concepts of friction and principle of virtual work
5. Summarize power transmission through belts
6. Analyze plane truss (frame) by method of joints and method of sections
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO3
1 3 2 2
2 3 2 2
3 3 2 2
4 3 2 2
5 3 2 2
6 2 3 3
Unit I
System of forces-Equilibrium of system of forces
Types of Force systems-Coplanar Concurrent Forces–Resultant–Moment of a Force and its application–
Couples and Resultant of a Force System, Free body diagrams, equations of equilibrium of coplanar concurrent
and non-concurrent force systems, Lami‘s theorem, resolution of a force into a force and a couple
Polygon law of forces for resultant
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Centroid-Centre of Gravity-Area Moments of Inertia-Mass Moment of Inertia
Centroids of simple figures (from basic principles)-Centroids of Composite Figures, Centre of gravity of simple
body (from basic principles), center of gravity of composite bodies, Definition–Moments of Inertia of simple
Figures, Polar Moment of Inertia, Transfer Theorem, Moments of Inertia of Composite Figures. Definition,
Moment of Inertia of simple bodies, Transfer Formula for Mass Moments of Inertia
Mass moment of inertia of composite bodies
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Friction-Power transmission through belts
Theory of friction–Angle of friction–Laws of friction-static friction–Kinetic friction, friction in bodies moving
up or down on an inclined plane-Introduction to belt and rope drives, types of belt drives, velocity ratio of belt
drives, slip of belt drives, tensions for flat belt drive, angle of contact, centrifugal tension, maximum tension of
belt
Condition for transmission of maximum power
11+4Hours
Unit IV
Analysis of perfect frames (Analytical Method)-Virtual Work
Types of Frames-Assumptions for forces in members of a perfect frame, Method of joints, Method of sections,
Force table, Cantilever Trusses, Structures with one end hinged and the other freely supported on rollers
carrying horizontal or inclined loads, Principle of Virtual Work-Application of the Principle of Virtual Work-
potential Energy and Equilibrium
Stable and Unstable Equilibrium 11+3 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
16
Textbook (s)
1. K. Vijay Kumar Reddy, J. Suresh Kumar, Singer's Engineering Mechanics Statics and Dynamics, BS
Publications, 3rd Edition, 2011
2. A. K. Tayal, Engineering Mechanics Statics and Dynamics, Umesh Publications, 14th Edition, 2011
3. S. S. Bhavikatti, Engineering Mechanics, New Age International, 2008
4. S. Timoshenko & D. H. Young, and JV Rao, Engineering Mechanics, 4th Ed., TMH Education, 2006
Reference (s)
1. Irving H. Shames and G. Krishna MohanaRao, Engineering Mechanics, 4 th Ed., Pearson, 2006
2. R. K. Bansal, Engineering Mechanics, Laxmi Publications, 3rd Edition, 2004
Remember 20 20 -
Understand 30 30 -
Apply 50 50 60
Analyze -- - 40
Evaluate -- - -
Create -- - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Sample question (s)
Remember
1. Define centroid
2. List the different types of belt drives
3. Define angle of repose
Understand
1. Explain Lami‘s theorem
2. Compare mass moment of inertia and area moment of inertia
3. Explain the difference between frame and truss
Apply
1. Solve the resultant of three forces acting on a hook as shown in below figure
2. Identify the centroid of T-section shown in below figure
3. Solve to find the power transmitted by a belt running over a pulley of 600 mm diameter at 200 r.p.m.
The coefficient of friction between the belt and the pulley is 0.25, angle of lap 160° and maximum
tension in the belt is 2500 N.
8
17
16CSX01 Problem Solving using C

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Develop the flow charts and algorithms, and then implement, compile and debug programs in C
language for solving a problem
2. Design programs involving decision structures, loops for problem solving
3. Design programs to develop applications using array data structure
4. Solve scientific problems using functions
5. Make use of pointers to design applications for efficient and dynamic memory allocation
6. Design programs to create/update basic data files
COs – POs Mapping

COs PO1 PO2 PO3
1 3 3 3
2 3 3 2
3 3 3 2
4 3 3 3
5 2 2 3
6 2 3 3
Unit I
Programming Basics
Introduction, Algorithm / pseudo code, flowchart, program development steps, structure of a C program, Types,
Operators, and Expressions: C-tokens, Variable Names, Data Types and Sizes, Constants, Declarations, C-
operators, Type Conversions, Precedence and Order of Evaluation
Control Flow: Statements and Blocks, If-Else, Else-If, Switch, Loops-While and For, Loops- Do-while, Break
and Continue
Comma and size of operators–Conditional Expressions–goto and Labels
12+3 Hours
Unit II
Arrays and Functions
Array concept, definition, declaration, accessing elements, storing elements, strings and string manipulations, 2-
D arrays, Multidimensional arrays, Array Applications
Basics of Functions, Functions Returning Non-integers, External Variables, Scope Rules, Static Variables,
Block Structure, Storage Classes, user defined functions, standard library functions, recursive functions, passing
Arrays to functions, Functions Applications
Arithmetic operations on string–nesting of functions–preprocessor commands
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Pointers and Structures
Pointer concepts, initialization of pointer variables, pointers and function arguments, passing by address,
dangling memory, address arithmetic, Character pointers and functions, pointers to pointers, dynamic memory
management functions
Basics of Structures, Structures and Functions, Arrays of Structures, Pointers to Structures, Self-referential
Structures, typedef, Unions
Programs on Dynamic memory management using functions–Table Lookup
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
File Structures
Standard Input and Output, Formatted Output-printf, Variable-length Argument Lists, Formatted Input-scanf,
File Access
Data Structures: Introduction to linear and non-linear data Structures, definition: stack, queue
18
Error Handling-stderr and exit–Introduction to Single Linked Lists

11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. B. W. Kernighan, Dennis M. Ritchie, The C–Programming Language-, 2nd Ed., PHI, 1990
2. H. Sahni and A. Freed, Fundamentals of Data Structures in C, 2nd Ed., Universities Press, 2008
Reference (s)
1. Y. Kanetkar, Let us C, 8th Ed., BPB Publication, 2004
2. F. E. V. Prasad, C Programming: A Problem-Solving Approach, Giliberg, Cengage, 2010
3. A. S. Tenenbaum, Y. Langsam and M. J. Augenstein,Data Structures using C, Pearson Education, 2009
Remember 25 20 -
Understand 35 40 30
Apply 40 40 40
Analyze - - 30
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Sample question (s)

Remember
1. Define computer
2. List out operators
3. What is dangling pointer
Understand
1. Explain structure of a c program
2. Describe linear and nonlinear data structures
3. Explain multidimensional arrays
Apply
1. Implement matrix multiplication using arrays
2. Draw flow chart of program development steps
3. Demonstrate pointe to pointer concept.
Analyze
1. Compare structure and union
2. Differentiate logical and relational operators
3. Classify linear and nonlinear data structures
9
19
16PYX02 Engineering Physics Lab

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Build the knowledge in the scientific methods and learn the process of measuring different physical
parameters
2. Develop the laboratory skills in handling of electrical and Optical instruments
3. Demonstrate the interference and diffraction phenomena of light
4. Inspect and experience physical principles of Magnetic fields and optical fiber communications
5. Apply the principles of physics and measure the solid state properties of materials
6. Design and analyze experiment based on physics concepts
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO4
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
List of Experiments
1. Variation of magnetic field along the axis of current-carrying circular coil-Stewart and Gee‘s Method
2. Determination of wavelengths of spectral line of mercury spectrum using diffraction grating
3. Determination of radius of curvature of convex lens by forming Newton‘s rings
4. LCR circuit- Study of parallel and series Resonance
5. Measurement of thickness of a thin paper using wedge method
6. Fiber optics-Numerical aperture of a given fiber and study of bendig losses
7. Meldie‘s Experiment–Transverse and longitudinal modes
8. Determination of wave length of Laser by diffraction grating
9. Determination of Hall Coefficient and charge carrier density of semi-conductor
10. Determination of Band gap of a semiconductor
List of Augmented Experiments10

1. To study the magnetization (M) of a ferromagnetic material in the presence of a magnetic field B and to
plot the hysteresis curve (M vs. B)
2. Study theThermoemf of the thermo couple
3. LCR Series and Parallel–Design of circuit for various resonance frequencies
4. Determination of characteristics of Laser beam
5. Determination of Horizontal component of earth‘s magnetic field
6. Study of double refraction in calcite crystals
7. Dispersive power of various liquids using spectrometer
8. Photo cell–Characteristics and determination of Planks constant
Reading Material (s)

1. Physics Lab manual–Department of Physics, BS & H, GMRIT, Rajam, 2015
2. Y. Aparna and K. Venkateswararao, Engineering Physics–I and II, VGS Techno series, 2010
3. S. Panigrahi and B. Mallick, Engineering Practical Physics, Cengage leaning, Delhi, 2015
10
Students shall opt any one of the Augmented Experiments in addition to the regular experiments
20
16CSX02 Problem Solving using C Lab

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Implement, compile and debug programs in C language for solving a problem
2. Design programs involving decision structures, loops for problem solving
3. Design programs to develop applications using array data structure
4. Apply functions to solve real world problems
5. Make use of pointers to design applications with efficientuse of memory
6. Design programs to create/update basic data files
COs – POs Mapping

COs PO4
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
List of Experiments
1. Algorithms and Flow charts design and evaluation (Minimum 2)
2. Write C Programs to demonstrate C-tokens and operators
3. Write C Programs to demonstrate Decision Making And Branching (Selection)
4. Write a C program to demonstrate different loops
5. Write a C program to demonstrate arrays
6. Write a C program to demonstrate functions
7. Write a C program to implement the following
A. To manipulate strings using string handling functions.
B. To manipulate strings without using string handling functions
8. Write a C program to demonstrate different library functions
9. Write a C program to implement the following
A. To exchange two values using call by value and reference
B. To multiply two matrices using pointers
10. Write a C program to demonstrate functions using pointers
11. Write a C program to implement the following operations using structure and functions:
i) Reading a complex number ii) Writing a complex number
12. Write a C program
A. To copy data from one file to another
B. To reverse the first n characters in a given file (Note: The file name and n are specified on the
command line)
1. Merging of two arrays
2. Arithmetic operations on two complex numbers
3. Employee's Management System
4. Library management
5. Department store system
6. Personal Dairy Management System
7. Telecom Billing Management System
8. Bank Management System
9. Contacts Management
10. Medical Store Management System

1. C Programming Lab manual–Department of CSE-GMRIT Rajam
11
21
16MEX02 Engineering Drawing

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Understand Principles of engineering drawing
2. Construct Conic sections using general methods and other methods
3. Construct Orthographic projections of Points, Lines and Planes
4. Construct Orthographic projections of Solids using basic drafting software
5. Construct Isometric projections using basic drafting software
6. Construct Orthographic projections from given isometric projections of an object and vice versa
COs – POs Mapping

COs PO4 PO9 PO10 PSO1
1 3 3 3 -
2 3 3 3 -
3 3 3 3 -
4 3 3 3 3
5 3 3 3 3
6 3 3 3 3
List of Experiments
Unit I
Conic Sections-Introduction to Orthographic Projections
Construction of conics using general method and other special methods
Orthographic Projections of Points, Straight Lines parallel to both planes, parallel to one plane and inclined to
other plane
9 Hours
Unit II
Orthographic Projections of Straight Lines and Planes
Projections of Straight Lines inclined to both planes; Projections of Planes; Regular Planes Perpendicular
Parallel to one Reference Plane and inclined to other Reference Plane; inclined to both the Reference Planes
Practice the following topics by using any one 2D drafting software
9 Hours
Unit III
Projections of Solids &Isometric Projections
Projections of Prisms, Cylinders, Pyramids and Cones with the axis inclined to one Principal Plane and Parallel
to the other, Projections of Prisms, Cylinders, Pyramids and Cones inclined to both the Principal Planes
Introduction to Isometric Projections, Isometric axes, angles, Isometric views, Construction of Isometric views
of Simple planes and Solids in various positions
15 Hours
Unit IV
Conversion of Engineering Views
Conversion of Orthographic Views of Simple Solid objects into Isometric View, Conversion of Isometric View
of Simple Solid objects into Orthographic Views
9 Hours
Total: 42 Hours
List of Drawing Sheets
1. Conics by General Method
2. Conics by using Special Methods
3. Projections of Points and Straight lines in Simple Positions
4. Projections of Lines inclined to both planes
5. Projections of Planes in Simple positions
6. Projections of Planes inclined to both planes
22
7. Projections of Solids
8. Projections of Solids inclined to both planes
9. Isometric Projections
10. Conversion of Orthographic views into Isometric views
11. Conversion of Isometric views into Orthographic views

1. Draw the Knuckle Pin and fork end of the knuckle joint
2. Draw the Socket and spigot cotter joint
3. Draw the Tommy bar and body of the Screw jack
4. Draw the Cup and Big and Small screws of screw jack
5. Draw the Connecting rod of IC Engine using AutoCAD
6. Draw the Pipe spool with flanges and a valve
7. Draw a sample pipe line construction design in oil and gas industries using AutoCAD
8. Draw the Pipe truss design using AutoCAD
9. Draw a 3-D bolt and nut with Threads using AutoCAD
10. Draw a 3-D Cross head pattern using AutoCAD
11. Draw the sample Bridge using AutoCAD
12. Draw the pipe vice using AutoCAD
13. Draw the Ni-Cd Battery zapper circuit diagram using AutoCAD
14. Draw the circuit diagram of battery charger with automatic cutoff using AutoCAD
15. Draw the satellite dish and Antenna using AutoCAD

Textbook (s)
1. N.D. Bhatt, V. M. Panchal, Pramod R. Ingle, Engineering drawing, Charotar Publications, 54th Edition,
2014
2. D. M. Kulkarni, A.P. Rastogi, Ashoke K. Sarkar, Engineering Graphics with Auto CAD, Prentice Hall
of India, 2nd Edition, 2010
Reference (s)
1. K. C. John, Engineering Graphics for Degree, PHI Publications, 2nd Edition, 2009
2. M. B. Shah and B. C. Rana, Engineering Drawing, Pearson Publishers, 2nd Edition, 2009
3. D. A. Jolhe, Engineering Drawing, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 1st Edition, 2008
12
23
16HSX03 English Communication Skills II

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Build new academic vocabulary & phrases and make use of them in different contexts
2. Construct clear, grammatically correct sentences using a variety of sentence structures
3. Analyze and Produce various types & formats of emails, letters in formal & informal ways to meet
particular purposes
4. Compose and present ideas logically in written form
5. Organize ideas effectively in spoken form
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO10
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
Unit I
The Knowledge Society by A. P. J. Abdul Kalam
Forming Negative words, Quantifiers, Letter Writing, Interviews, Scientific Terminology
Famous Indian Scientist Inventions
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Principles of Good Writing by L. A. Hill
Word definitions, Articles, e-mail writing, Debates, Noticing changes in English, Origin and meaning of
borrowed words
Effective writing tips
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Man’s Peril by Bertrand Russell
Deriving nouns, Prepositions, Phrasal verbs, Speeches, Report Writing, Problem solving
Bertrand Russell and Einstein Manifesto
12+3 Hours
Unit IV
Shooting an Elephant by George Orwell
Using an appropriate word, conjunctions, voices, Cover letters, Resume, Dialogue writing, Group Discussion
Abridged version of Animal Farm
11+4 Hours
Total :45+15Hours
Textbook (s)
1. M. S. Rama Murty and M. Hariprasad, Prose for Communication Skills, Ravindra Publishing House,
Hyderabad, 2012
Reference (s)
24
1. J. Seely, Oxford Guide to Effective Writing and Speaking, OUP, 2013

2. Quirk, Greenbaum, Leech and Svartvik, A Comprehensive Grammar of the English language, Pearson,
India, 2010
3. Raymond Murphy, English Grammar in Use, 4th Ed, CUP, Cambridge, 2012
4. http://www.famousscientists.org/15-famous-indian-scientists-inventions/
5. http://www.grammarbook.com/grammar/effWrite.asp
6. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Russell%E2%80%93Einstein_Manifesto)
7. http://cbhs.portlandschools.org/UserFiles/Servers/Server_1098483/File/Migration/Animal-Farm-
Abridged.pdf

Remember 25 25 -
Understand 25 25 -
Apply 50 50 40
Analyze 30
Evaluate -- - -
Create -- - 30
Total (%) 100 100 100
Sample question (s)

Remember
1. Write one synonym for each of the following words.
a) Generate (b) Vivid
2. Write an antonym for each of the following words.
a) Unique (b) Interesting
3. Fill in the blanks with some or any in the following sentences.
a) There isn‘t ______ milk here.
b) She has _____ books and pens.
Understanding
1. Read the following passage
There is no dearth of fake patriotism in the world to disguise one‘s weakness of failure in
administration and planning. It rather becomes an instrument in the hands of dictators and selfish rulers to keep
their position safe. One can hear the slogans of patriotism on both the sides of the line of demarcation in the
Indian sub-continent. When there is dissatisfaction among the masses these slogans would be raised—‗danger is
lurking on the borders‘, ‗the enemy is making preparation to attack our country‘. This is not patriotism but
perverse thinking for selfish motives. Patriotism does not require a whip to rouse the sentiments of the people—
if it is true patriotism. The unity achieved during war may be a result of apprehension of slavery, not necessarily
true emotion generated by patriotism. It is in the blood of the people to mould their life according to the needs of
the motherland. It is not in the expediency to create circumstances befitting one‘s own interests. It is rather
regrettable that patriotism is the greatest casualty in almost all the fields in our country. Political expediency and
self-motives have become supreme, to the extent that even to talk of patriotism is labeled as puerile of
reactionary. Let us take inspiration from the young girl who wept and cried bitterly for she could not offer
flowers on the war memorial in London, for none of her forefathers had laid his life for the cause of the nation.
Let us inculcate this noble spirit among people if we have to bring back the glory that was India.
Answer the following question.
a) Show the effect of fake patriotism?
b) When are the slogans of patriotism raised?
c) Is this type of patriotism real patriotism? Whom does it benefit?
d) Is the unity during war real patriotism? Does true patriotism require any instigation?
e) What does the author regret?
f) Explain the result of political expediency and selfish motives?
g) Why did the little girl cry bitterly? Do we learn anything from her?
h) Locate the synonym of the word ‗conceal’ from the passage.
13
25
i) Find the antonym of the word ‗cheerful‘ from the passage.

j) Suggest a suitable title to the passage.
2. Read the following passage and answer the questions on it:
Many matters, however, are less easily brought to the test of experience. If, like most of mankind, you have
passionate convictions on many such matters, there are ways in which you can make yourself aware of your own
bias. If an opinion contrary to your own makes you angry, that is a sign that you are subconsciously aware of
having no good reason for thinking as you do. If someone maintains that two and two are five, you feel pity
rather than anger, unless you know so little of arithmetic that his opinion shakes your own conviction. The most
savage controversies are those about matters as to which there is no good evidence either way. Persecution is
used in theology, not in arithmetic because in arithmetic there is knowledge, but in theology there is only
opinion. So, whenever you find yourself getting angry about your difference of opinion, be on your guard; you
will probably find, on examination, that your belief is going beyond what the evidence warrants.
Answer the following questions

a) Do you consider the content of the passage, legal or logical? Ans: logical
b) Is the author of the passage finally telling you about changing your opinion? Ans: No giving info.
c) According to the passage when do we feel pity? Ans: When someone knowledge so poorer then
minimum standards.
d) What is the meaning of the word ‗savage‘ as used in the passage? Ans: uncivilized / unfair
e) What is the general reaction to an opinion contrary to your own? Ans: we get angry at first.
f) ‗In arithmetic there is no scope for opinion’-explain.
Apply
1. Develop an essay on the theme of ―Digital India and its consequences‖ in about 200 words.
2. Write a letter to your friend who is exclusively occupied with his studies. Advise him to take part in
games
Analyze
1. Discuss the chief components of knowledge society with reference to India according to Dr. A. P. J.
Abdul Kalam.
2. Analyze L. A. Hill‘s principles of good writing in achieving ‗vivid expression, simple and
conversational tone‘ to make the writing interesting to the readers.
3. Explain how L.A. Hill‘s principles of good writing are helpful to become a successful writer. (in about
250 words)
Create
1. Imagine yourself to be the instructor of a course in which 75 students have registered. Draft an email to
all your students asking them to prepare a presentation on the topic of their choice.
2. Build a model essay on impact of social media on youth.
26
16MAX02 Engineering Mathematics II

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Apply matrix knowledge to Engineering problems
2. Solve problems related to engineering applications using integral transform techniques
3. Make use of Laplace transforms in solving the differential equations with the initial and boundary
conditions
4. Apply the concept of Fourier series of periodic functions and expand a function in sine and cosine
series
5. Solve problems related to basic linear and non-linear partial differential equations
6. Formulate and solve some of the physical problems of engineering using partial differential equations
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2
1 3 3
2 3 2
3 3 2
4 3 2
5 3 2
6 3 2
Unit I
Matices
Linear systems of equations: Rank-Echelon form, Normal form–Solution of Linear Systems–Rank Method and
Gauss Seidal Method
Eigen values–Eigen vectors–Properties–Cayley-Hamilton Theorem (without proof)–Inverse and powers of a
matrix by using Cayley-Hamilton theorem, Quadratic forms-Reduction of quadratic form to canonical form–
Rank–Positive, negative, semi definite–index–signature
LU Decomposition Method
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Laplace Transforms
Laplace transforms of standard functions–Shifting Theorems, Transforms of derivatives and integrals–Unit step
function–Dirac delta function
Inverse Laplace transforms by Partial fractions–Convolution theorem (without proof)-Application of Laplace
transforms to ordinary differential equations with constant coefficients
Laplace Transform of Periodic Functions 11
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Fourier Series and Transformations
Fourier series–even and odd functions–Half-range sine and cosine series, Fourier integral theorem (without
proof)–Fourier transforms–sine and cosine transforms–properties–inverse transforms–Finite Fourier transforms
Fourier Transform of Convolution Products
12+3 Hours
Unit IV
Partial Differential Equations and Applications
Formation of partial differential equations-by elimination of arbitrary constants and arbitrary functions–
solutions of first order linear (Lagrange) equations and nonlinear equations (standard types)–Method of
27
Separation of Variables-Applications to wave equation, heat conduction equation in one dimension and
homogeneous Laplace equation in Cartesian coordinates in two dimensions
Charpits Method
11+4 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. B. S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 42 nd Ed., Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2012
2. S. R. K. Iyengar, R. K. Jain, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 4 th Ed., Narosa Publishing House,
New Delhi, 2014
3. B. V. Ramana, Engineering Mathematics, 4th Ed., Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2009
Reference (s)
1. T. K. V. Iyengar, B. Krishna Ghandhi, S. Ranganathan and M. V. S. S. N. Prasad, Engineering
Mathematics, 12th Ed.,Volume–I, S. Chand Publishers, 2014
2. U. M. Swamy, P. Vijaya Laxmi, K. L. Sai Prasad and M. Phani Krishna Kishore, A Text Book of
Engineering Mathematics–II, Excel Books, New Delhi, 2010
3. D. S. Chandrashekharaiah, Engineering Mathematics, Vol–1, Prism Publishers, 2010
4. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9th Ed., Wiley, 2012

Remember 30 30 -
Understand 40 40 -
Apply 30 30 60
Analyze - - -
Evaluate -- -- 30
Create -- -- 10
Total (%) 100 100 100
Sample question (s)

Remember
1. Define rank of the matrix
2. Define unit step function
3. Write the Fourier sine transform of 𝑓( )
Understand
1. If 𝑓 in the interval[ ], then for what values of the Fourier series of 𝑓
contains only sine terms
2. Form the partial differential equation by eliminating arbitrary constants from
z  (x  a )( y  b)
2 2
3. Evaluate L  2 t 
Apply
y  2 y  3 y  s in t
'' '
1.
Use Laplace transform technique to solve the differential equation if
y ( 0 )  0 , y '( 0 )  0 .
2. Using Convolution theorem, find [ ]
3. A tightly stretched string with fixed end points x  0 and x  l is initially in a position given by
3  x
y  y 0 Sin . If it is released from rest from this position, find the displacement y ( x , t )
l
14
28
Create
1. Compare the direct and iterative methods in solving system of equations.
2. Identifying the method to solve sparse systems.
3. What is the advantage of Fourier series over the Taylor‘s series in some real time problems?
29
16CYX01 Engineering Chemistry

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Outline the fundamental chemistry with an applied perspective as future engineers with a focus on
engineering and industry
2. Analyze the quality of water and its treatment methods for domestic and industrial applications
3. Utilize the polymers, plastics, elastomers and advanced materials (Nano materials) as engineering
materials and apply them in domestic and industrial life
4. Infer the concepts of renewable & non-renewable energy sources, quality of fuels and apply a suitable
fuel as an energy source
5. Outline the corrosion factors and implement the prevention measures
6. Interpret the Nernst equation for electrode potentials and construction and working of various types of
energy storage devices
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2
1 3 2
2 3 2
3 3
4 3 2
5 3
6 3 2
Unit I
Water Technology & Advanced Materials
Water technology: sources of water–hardness of water–disadvantages of hard water–boiler troubles–internal
treatment methods, softening methods–lime soda, zeolite, ion exchange and reverse osmosis -specifications for
drinking water–BIS & WHO standards–municipal water treatment–analysis of water for hardness, chloride &
fluoride, numerical problems
Advanced materials–Nanomaterials–Introduction–Preparation by chemical methods–Characterization–SEM–
Applications in industry–solar, water purification and battery technology
Preparation of some important membranes for reverse osmosis process
12+3 Hours
Unit II
Polymers & Composites
Polymers: Introduction–Advantages of polymers over Metals and Alloys; Types of polymers–Types of
polymerization–Physical properties: viscosity, polydispersity, molecular weight distribution etc., and
mechanical properties–Plastics: Thermosetting & thermoplastics–Compounding of plastics–Moulding methods
(Compression, Injection, Transfer, Extrusion)–Preparation, Properties and Engineering applications of important
industrial polymers–Poly Ethylene, Poly Styrene, PVC, PTFE, Bakelite–Molecular Imprinting Polymers (MIP)
–Conducting Polymers–Biodegradable polymers-Fiber reinforced plastics-Glass fiber reinforced plastic–Bullet
Proof Plastics–Rubbers: processing of natural rubber–Vulcanization and compounding of rubber–Engineering
applications of rubber
Inorganic rubbers-silicone rubbers
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Fuels & Energy Resources
Fuels–Introduction-Calorific value–determination of calorific value–Bomb calorimeter and Junker‘s
calorimeters-Classification of fuels–characteristics of a good fuel–classification and analysis of coal-Extraction
of Crude Oils–refining of crude oil–Cracking-Thermal and Catalytic cracking–Synthetic petrol–Polymerization,
Fischer Tropsch and Bergius processes–Knocking–Anti Knocking–Octane &Cetanenumber–ASTM standards of
30
fuels–Energy Resources: Energy scenario in India–working of thermal power plants–advantages and

disadvantages–non Renewable energy–solar energy–harnessing of solar energy–solar heaters–photo voltaic
cells–bio energy–biodiesel
Rocket fuels
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Corrosion & Energy Systems
Introduction–process of corrosion–Dry corrosion–Wet corrosion–galvanic corrosion–concentration cell
corrosion–water line corrosion–pitting corrosion–stress corrosion–Factors influencing corrosion–Control of
corrosion–Proper designing–passivity–using alloys–modifying the environment–using corrosion inhibitors:
Inorganic and Organic inhibitors-Cathodic protection–Metallic coatings–galvanization and tinning-Industrial
examples of high corrosion
Electrochemical energy systems:Introduction–Electrode potential–Nernst equation–EMF of cell–Storage
devices–Batteries: primary cell–dry cell; secondary cells–Lead acid battery, Lithium ion battery, flow batteries–
H2–O2 fuel cell and Photo galvanic cell
Organic coatings
11+4 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. P. C. Jain and Monica Jain, Engineering Chemistry, 16th Ed., Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company, New
Delhi, 2015
2. S. S. Dara, A Textbook of Engineering Chemistry, S. Chand and Company Limited, New Delhi, 1994
3. C. N. R. Rao, A. Muller and A. K. Cheetham, Nanomaterials Chemistry: Recent Developments and
New Directions, 2010
Reference (s)
1. S. Chawla, A Textbook of Engineering Chemistry, 3 rd Ed., Dhanpat Rai& Co (Pvt) Ltd, New Delhi,
2012
2. P. Murthy, C. V. Agarwal, A. Naidu, Textbook of Engineering Chemistry, B. S. Publications,
Hyderabad, 2006
3. T. Pradeep, Textbook of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, McGraw Hill Education,India,
Pvt.Limited, 2013

Remember 30 30 -
Understand 40 40 -
Apply 30 30 80
Analyze - - 20
Evaluate -- - -
Create -- - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Sample question (s)

Remember
1. Define hardness. Which salts are responsible for different types of hard nesses?
2. Differentiate between polymer and plastic? List out the differences between thermoplastics and
thermosetting plastics?
3. Define calorific value, HCV and LCV
15
31
Understand
1. What is meant by desalination? Explain the procedure for softening of water by Reverse osmosis
process?
2. What is compounding of plastics? Explain the role of Fillers and Stabilizers with examples
in compounding of plastics?
3. How a photo-voltaic cell constructed and what is is the working mechanism of it?
Apply
1. Water contains the constituents like CO2 , HCO3- , Mg(HCO3)2 , H+, CaSO4 , NaCl and Na2SO4 and
this water is subjected to Lime and Soda softening, which type of chemical reactions are involved
between these constituents with Lime and Soda?
2. Which moulding technique is involved in making a plastic ball in toys industry? Explain the process in
detail with neat sketch?
3. By which methods, the underground pipelines are protected from corrosion? Explain the involved
mechanisms?
Analyze
1. The Boiler fed water contains the following compositions: CaSO4, CaCl2, MgCl2, SiO2 &
Na2CO3.Suggest the suitable methods and involved principle to prevent the formation of scale and
sludge by these constituents?
2. When a metal X (of reduction potential = 0.337V at 250C) is connected to another
metal Y (of reduction potential = -0.140V at 250C) and this structure is exposed
continuously to sea water, which type of corrosion would take place? Explain with
suitable mechanism.
3. Which type of corrosion is involved in the following jointed pipeline and why? Explain the involved
mechanism in detail
Iron pipe Copper pipe
Sea water inlet Sea water outlet
32
16EEX01 Basic Electrical Engineering

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Demonstrate the basic principles of electrical components
2. Outline electric circuits using network laws and reduction techniques
3. Illustrate the behavior of basic circuit elements for an AC excitation
4. Relate the laws of electro-magnetism and select a machine for practical applications
5. Outline the working principle and construction of the measuring instruments
6. Choose appropriate safety measures and wiring schemes
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2
1 3 1
2 3 1
3 2 1
4 3 1
5 3 1
6 2 3
Unit I
Basic Electrical Components
Definition of charge, electric potential, electric field, voltage, current, power and energy, Ohm‘s law, Faraday‘s
Law of Electromagnetic Induction, Classification of network elements, Basic circuit elements–R, L and C,
Types of energy sources-Dependent and independent sources, Kirchhoff‘s laws, Resistive, inductive and
capacitive networks–series, parallel circuits, Self Inductance, mutual inductance, Types of induced emfs, Dot
Convention, Coefficient of coupling
Types of resistors–inductors and capacitors
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Fundamentals of Electrical Circuits
DC Circuits:Voltage and current division rule, Source transformation, mesh and nodal analysis, Star-delta
transformation. AC Circuits:Generation of alternating current, periodic waveforms and basic definitions, RMS
and average values of periodic and non-periodic waveforms, form factor and peak factor, AC through pure R
and L, Phasor representation, J-operator, Power in ac circuits
AC through pure capacitor
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Electrical Machines & Measuring Instruments
Electrical Machines:Principle of operation, Construction and Applications-DC Machines, 1-phase Transformers,
1-Phase Induction Motors, Stepper motors. Measuring Instruments: Classification of Measuring Instruments,
Construction and basic working principle of Voltmeter, Ammeter, Wattmeter
Working principle of Energy meter
12+4 Hours
Unit IV
Electrical Safety, Wiring and Introduction to Power System
Indian electricity safety rules, Electric shock- effects, protective measures and first aid, Earthling-Basic
principles and types.Electrical wiring-wiring accessories, staircase, tube light.Single line diagram of power
system
Design of corridor wiring 10+3Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
33
Textbook (s)
1. D. P. Kothari and I. J. Nagrath, Theory and Problems of Basic Electrical Engineering, 4 th Ed., PHI
Learning Private limited, 2013
2. S. Ghosh, Fundamentals of Electrical & Electronics Engineering, 2nd Ed., PHI, 2010
3. V. K. Mehta and Rohit Mehta, Basic Electrical Engineering, S Chand and company Ltd, New Delhi,
India, Revised Edition, 2012
Reference (s)
1. K. Alice Mary, P.Ramana and Preethi Thekkath , Basics of Electrical Engineering, 1 st Ed., S. Chand &
Company Ltd, 2016
2. J. B. Gupta, Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering, 3rd Ed., S. K. Kataria & Sons, 2009
3. B. L. Theraja, Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering and Electronics, 5 th Ed., S. Chand & Company
Ltd, 2013

Remember 40 40 -
Understand 60 60 -
Apply - - 50
Analyze - - 50
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Sample question (s)

Remember
1. State Faradays laws of Electro-magnetic Induction.
2. Define
i. Charge ii. Power
iii. Energy iv. Potential
3. State any five Indian electricity safety rules
4. Define coefficient of coupling
Understand
1. Explain the principle of operation of transformer.
2. Describe the working of DC generator.
3. Explain the construction and working of Wattmeter.
4. Illustrate the emf equation of a transformer
16
34
16CHX01 Environmental Studies

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Translate the learner‘s attitude to think globally and act locally
2. Motivate environmental organizaions to create a concern about our present state of Environment.
3. Find solutions for conservation of natural resources
4. Identify the benefits of ecosystem conservation, biodiversity protection, implement pollution
prevention and control measures
5. Illustrate social issues of environmental protection and adopt sustainable developmental practices
6. Perceives the basic structure of environmental policy and law pertaining to specific environmental
issues (water quality, air quality, biodiversity protection, Forest, etc.)
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO3 PO6 PO7
1 - - 3 3
2 - - - 3
3 3 3 - 3
4 - - 3 3
5 - - 3 3
6 - - - 3
Unit I
Multidisciplinary Nature of Environmental Studies & Natural Resources
Definition, Scope and Importance, Multidisciplinary nature of Environmental Studies, Value of Nature-
Productive, Aesthetic/Recreation, Option, Need for Public Awareness, Institutions (BNHS, BVIEER, ZSI, BSI)
and People in Environment (MedhaPatkar, Sundarlal Bahuguna, Indira Gandhi, Rachael Carson)
Natural Resources: Renewable and Non–renewable resources–Importance, uses, overexploitation/threats, and
conservation of (i) forest (ii) water (iii) mineral (iv) food and (v) energy resources, role of an individual in
conservation of natural resources
Biotic and abiotic components–Case studies of forest-water-mineral-food-energy resources
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Ecosystem & Biodiversity
Ecosystems: Concept of an ecosystem, Structure and function of an ecosystem, Biogeological cycles (Energy
flow, Carbon and Nitrogen Cycles), Ecological succession, Food chains, food webs and ecological pyramids,
Introduction, types, characteristic features, structures and functions of the following ecosystems: a. Forest
Ecosystem b. Aquatic Ecosystem Biodiversity and its Conservation: Definition and levels of biodiversity, Bio–
geographical classification of India, hot spots of biodiversity–India as a mega diversity nation, Threats to
biodiversity, Endangered and endemic species of India, Conservation of biodiversity: In–situ and Ex–situ
conservation
Phosphorus cycle–Desert ecosystems–Grassland ecosystem–Case studies on conservation of biodiversity
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Environmental Pollution & Social Issues
Environmental Pollution: Definition, Cause, effects, control measures and case studies of: Air pollution b. Water
pollution c. Soil pollution Solid waste Management: Causes, effects and control measures of urban and
industrial wastes. Disaster management (floods and cyclones) Social Issues and the Environment: Sustainability,
Urban problems related to energy, Water conservation and watershed management, Resettlement and
rehabilitation of people; Environmental ethics: Issues and possible solutions, global warming, ozone layer
depletion, Consumerism and waste products
Noise pollution–Case studies on pollution–Wasteland reclamation 11+4 Hours
35
Unit IV
Human Population and the Environmental Acts
Human Population and the Environment: Population growth, Affluence, Technology and Environmental Impact
(Master Equation), Population explosion and Family Welfare Programme, Value Education, HIV/AIDS,
Women and Child Welfare, Role of information Technology in Environment and human health, Environment
Protection Acts: Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, Water (Prevention and control of Pollution) Act,
Wildlife Protection Act and Forest Conservation Act. Issues involved in enforcement of environmental
legislation
Human Rights–The environment (Protection) Act, 1986
10+3 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. E. Bharucha, Textbook of Environmental Studies, 1 st Ed., University Press (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2005
Reference (s)
1. W. P. Cunningham, M. A. Cunningham, Principles of Environmental Science, 6 th Ed., Tata McGraw
Hill, 2008
2. A. Kaushik, C. P. Kaushik, Perspectives in Environmental Studies, 4 th Ed., New Age International
Publishers, 2008
3. H. S. Peavy, D. R. Rowe, G. Tchobanoglous, Environmental Engineering, 1 st Ed., McGraw Hill, 1984
4. T. E. Graedel, B. R. Allenby, Industrial Ecology and Sustainable Engineering, 1 st Ed., Pearson
Publications, 2009

Remember 40 35 15
Understand 45 50 50
Apply 15 15 35
Analyze -- -- --
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
Sample question (s)

Remember
1. List important natural resources & important institutions related to the environment.
2. Recall a simple food chain.
3. List important acts in environment.
Understand
1. Money deposited in a bank- identify under which environment value.
2. Summarize the methods for creating public awareness regarding environment.
3. Explain the consequences of over utilization of water resources.
Apply
1. Select the economic method of conservation of biodiversity and describe it.
2. Predict the effects and control methods of water pollution.
3. Find the urban problems related to energy and suggest suitable alternatives.
4. Assess why women and children need special care and what are all the supports that our Government is
extending to them?
17
36
16HSX02 English Communication Skills Lab

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Develop the pronunciation ability by using their gained knowledge of the English sound system
2. Improve the articulation of sounds and pronunciation of words for intelligible English
3. Recognize the use of language in conversational style with focus on communication in English
4. Organize ideas effectively in spoken form
6. Develop the pronunciation abilityby using their gained knowledge of the English sound system
COs – POs Mapping
COs P010
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
List of Experiments
Module 1–Sounds of English-Consonants

Module 2–Interaction-1: Greeting and taking leave, introducing oneself to others.
Module 3–Sounds of English-Vowels
Module 4–Interaction-2: Making request and response to them ask for and give/refuse permission, Ask for and
give directions, thank and respond
Module 5–Some rules of Pronunciation
Module 6–Interaction-3: Invite, accept, and declining invitations, Make complaints and respond to them,
Express sympathy
Module 7–Word Stress and Sentence stress
Module 8–Interaction-4: Apologize and respond, advise and suggest, Telephone Skills
Module 9–Presentation Skills: Oral and PPT Presentations
Module 10 Group Discussion
Extra Module
Module 11–Debate

1. Common Errors in English
2. Listening Skills
3. Speaking Skills
4. Writing Skills
5. Presentation Skills–observations
6. Reading Skills
7. Public Speaking
8. Interview Skills
9. Office Communication
10. Telephone Skills
11. Report Writing
12. Vocabulary
13. Body Language
14. Resume Writing
15. Functional English
18
37

1. K. Nirupa Rani, Jayashree Mohanraj and B. Indira, Strengthen Your Steps-Maruthi publications, 2012
2. K. Nirupa Rani, Jayashree Mohan Raj, B. Indira, (Ed) Speak Well (C.D) Orient Black Swan Pvt Ltd,
Hyderabad, 2012
3. D. Jones, English Pronouncing Dictionary (Software)CUP, Ver.1.0, 2003
4. J. Sethi, S. Kamlesh, D. V. Jindal. A Practical Course in English Pronunciation, Prentice-hall of India,
New Delhi, 2007
5. T. Balasubramanian, A Textbook of English Phonetics for Indian students, McMillan, 1981
6. K. Mohan and M. Raman, Effective English Communication, 1 st Ed., Tata McGraHills, 2000
7. R. K. Bansal and J. B. Harrison, Spoken English, 3 rd Ed., Orient Black Swan, Hyderabad, 1983
38
16CYX02 Engineering Chemistry Lab

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Utilize different Analytical tools and develop the necessary skills in executing experiments involving
estimation of metals in alloys, raw materials, finished products and environmental samples etc.
2. Utilize modern instruments like flame photometer, ion analyzer, UV Vis spectrophotometer, Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometer for characterization of materials used in industry & environmental
monitoring
3. Determine the amount of hardness, chloride, fluoride, nitrite, DO of water for its quality and know its
utility in domestic and industry
4. Summarize the characteristics of lubricants and able to choose/modify lubricants according to purpose
5. Compose some cross-linked polymers like Bakelite, Nylon etc.
6. Identify the adulteration of food items such as milk, honey, tea, coffee & fertility of soil to increase
crop production
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO4
CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 3
CO6 3
List of Experiments
Introduction to Quantitative Analysis
1. Assessment of Quality of water
i) Hardness ii) Chloride iii) Fluoride iv) Dissolved Oxygen v) Nitrite
2. Testing quality of lubricants
i) Viscosity Index ii) Flash & Fire point iii) Acid Number
3. Quality Analysis of engineering materials
i) Cement ii) Al/Cu wire iii) Steel
4. Preparation of Engineering and Nano materials
i) Bakelite ii) Nylon iii) Silver nano particles
5. Estimation of Purity of Iron in Ingot
6. Analysis of fertility of soil
i) Sodium & Potassium ii) Micro Nutrients
7. Determination of acid strength (for a citrus fruit) by Conductometr
8. Detection of adulteration of Food in Honey/ Milk/ Tea
9. Estimation of heavy metals in fast food items by AAS.
10. Testing of corrosion of metal
Note: Student should perform minimum of 12 experiments at least one form each head.

1. Assessment of ground water quality of your village/Mandal
2. Preparation of desired Viscosity Index lubricating oil
3. Studies on the effect of various factors on corrosion
19
39

1. K. Gouru Naidu, Engineering Chemistry Lab Manual, 1 st Ed., 2014
2. G. Svehla, Vogel‘s Qualitative Inorganic Analysis, 7th Ed., Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2003
3. Standard methods for the examination of water and waste waters, American Public Health Association,
21st Ed., EPA, Washington, 2005
4. Metcalf and Eddy, Waste Water Engineering Treatment and Reuse, 4 th Ed., Tata McGraw Hill, New
Delhi, 2003
5. D. Srinivasulu, Engineering Chemistry laboratory manual & Record, Parshva publications, 2010
40
16MEX03 Engineering Workshop

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Utilize basic carpentry tools for the preparation of wooden joints
2. Make use of basic hand tools for the preparation of mild steel joints
3. Build simple house hold items with GI sheet using tin smithy tools
4. Make use of house wiring accessories to build simple electrical circuits
5. Build simple components with hand tools for making experimental setups
6. Build simple components with hand tools as per the drawing specifications
COs - POs Mapping

COs PO1 PO2 PO10 PO12
1 3 2 2 2
2 3 2 1 2
3 3 2 2 1
4 3 2 3 2
5 3 3 1 3
6 3 2 1 3
List of experiments
Trades
Carpentry : 1. Cross Lap joint
2. T-Lap joint
3. Dovetail Joint
4. Mortise and Tennon Joint
Fitting : 1. Square Fit
2. V- Fit
3. Half Round Fit
4. Dovetail Fit
Tin Smithy : 1. Square Box without lid
2. Taper Tray
3. Open Scoop
4. Funnel
House Wiring : 1. Parallel/Series Connection of three bulbs
2. Florescent Lamp Wiring
3. Stair Case Wiring
4. Godown Wiring
Total: 45 Hours
20
List of Augmented Experiments
1. Prepare Tee–bridle joint
2. Prepare Corner dovetail joint
3. Make Corner bridge joint
4. Make Dovetail lap joint
5. Prepare 900 round elbow pipe
6. Prepare Ellipse using GI sheet
7. Make cylindrical pipe
8. Make Round T-pipe
9. Prepare hexagonal fitting
10. Prepare diagonal dovetail fitting
11. Prepare universal fitting
20
41
12. Make square fitting

13. Set the general house wring
14. Set the dim & bright lighting
15. Set the test lamping

1. Engineering workshop Lab manual, Department of Mechanical Engineering, GMRIT Rajam
42
16ME301 ENGINEERING THERMODYNAMICS

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain thermodynamic systems, Boyle‟s Law, Charles law and Avogadro‟s law
2. Analyze the flow and non-flow thermodynamic processes
3. Apply zeroth, first and second law of thermodynamics to various thermodynamic systems
4. Illustrate the concept of entropy and the mixtures of perfect gases
5. Analyze the properties of the steam
6. Evaluate the performance of Otto, diesel and dual cycles
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO3
1 3 1 1
2 3 3 2
3 3 3 2
4 3 1 1
5 3 3 2
6 3 2 2
3 – Strongly linked | 2 – Moderately linked | 1 – Weakly linked
Unit I
Introduction to Thermodynamic Processes
Types of thermodynamic Systems, State, Property, Process, Reversible Irreversible Process, Cycle, Quasi
-static Process, Energy in State and in Transition, Work and Heat, Point and Path function. Perfect Gas -
Boyel‟s Law, Charles law Avogadro‟s law, Equation of State, Deviations from perfect Gas Model,
Vander Waals Equation of State, Compressibility charts. Flow process, Non-flow processes, Specific
heat, enthalpy, Internal energy. Heat and Work Transfer, changes in Internal Energy in various flow and
Non-flow processes
Throttling and Free Expansion Processes
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Zeroth Law and First Law of Thermodynamics-Second Law of Thermodynamics
Zeroth Law of Thermodynamics- Basis for temperature measurement- Two-point, triple point and Ideal
gas temperature scales. Const. Volume gas Thermometer, Joule‟s Experiments, First law of
Thermodynamics, Steady flow process, SFEE, SFEE applied to a flow system, PMM I, Limitations of the
First Law, Thermal Reservoir, Heat Engine, Heat pump, Parameters of performance, Kelvin-Planck and
Clausius Statements of Second Law of Thermodynamics and their Equivalence, PMM- II of Second kind,
Irreversibility, Causes of Irreversibility, Carnot cycle
Carnot’s principle.
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Entropy and Availability-Mixtures of perfect Gases
Entropy, Entropy a point function, Change of entropy in various Non-flow processes, Clausius Inequality,
Principle of Entropy Increase, Availability in closed and open system, Max well relations Terminology of
gaseous mixtures Mole Fraction, Mass friction Volume fraction, Partial pressure- Daltons Law of Partial
pressures, Amagati‟s Law of additive volumes, Molecular Internal Energy, Enthalpy, specific Heat and
Entropy of Mixture of perfect Gases
Gravimetric and volumetric Analysis
11+3 Hours
Unit IV
Steam Properties-Air Standard Cycles
Phase transformation, Properties of the steam in phase transformation, P-V-T surface, Triple point at
critical state properties during change of phase, Entropy of steam at various stages of phase
transformation, Steam tables, Mollier Chart, Steam Calorimetry. Otto, Diesel, Dual Combustion cycles,
Description and representation on P–V and T-S diagram, Thermal Efficiency. Mean Effective Pressures
on Air standard basis, end properties
Comparison of Cycles
11+4Hours
43
Total: 45+15 Hours

Textbook (s)
1. PK Nag, Engineering Thermodynamics, TMH, 5th Edition, 2013
2. Claus Borgnakke, Richard E. Sonntag, Fundamentals of Thermodynamics, 9th Edition, Wiley, 2016
Reference (s)
1. Yunus A. Çengel, Michael A. Boles, Thermodynamics: An Engineering Approach, McGraw-Hill, 2011
2. Jack Philip Holman, Thermodynamics, McGraw-Hill, 4th Edition, 1988
3. Y. V. C. Rao, An Introduction to Thermodynamics, Universities Press, Revised edition, 2009
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 35 35 -
Understand 35 30 -
Apply 30 35 40
Analyze - - 45
Evaluate - - 15
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define entropy and mention whether it is a point function or path function.
2. State Kelvin-planck and classius second laws of thermodynamics.
3. Define zeroth law of thermodynamics.
4. State the intensive and extensive properties. Divide the following properties P, ρ, T into extensive or
intensive properties.
5. Define the characteristic gas constant.
6. List any three assumptions of ideal gas equation.
Understand
1. Explain the principle of entropy increase.
2. Explain the basic gas laws with practical example for each.
3. Derive the ideal gas equation.
4. Classify and define the thermodynamic systems. Give examples.
5. Estimate the formation of steam that undergoes number of stages and with the help of T-Q diagram.
Explain different stages of steam formation.
Apply
1. A perfect gas is compressed according to the law PV 1.25 = constant from an initial pressure of 1 bar and
volume of 0.9 m3 to a final volume of 0.6 m3. Determine the final pressure and change of entropy per
kg of gas during the process. Take γ=1.4, R=287 J/kg.K.
2. A gas undergoes a reversible non-flow process according to the relation p= (-3V+15) where V is the
volume in m3 and p is the pressure in bar. Determine the work done when the volume changes from 3
to 6 m3.
3. An engine equipped with a cylinder having a bore of 15 cm and a stroke of 45 cm operates on an Otto
cycle. If the clearance volume is 2000 cm3, compute a) Swept Volume b) Compression ratio c) air
standard efficiency d) Net work done e) Mean effective pressure.
4. A blower handles 1 kg/s of air at 20°C and consumes a power of 15 kW. The inlet and outlet velocities
of air are 100 m/s and 150 m/s respectively. Find the exit air temperature, assuming adiabatic
conditions. Take cp of air is 1.005 kJ/kg.K.
5. Two engines are to operate on Otto and Diesel cycles with the following data: Maximum temperature
1400 K, exhaust temperature 700 K. State of air at the beginning of compression 0.1 MPa, 300 K.
Estimate the compression ratios, the maximum pressure and efficiencies of the respective cycles.
Analyze
1. Analyze Zeorth law of thermodynamics with real time example.
2. Show that PVγ =C is an adiabatic process.
21
Assignment Test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills pertaining to this Course
44
3. Compare Otto cycle with Diesel cycle.

4. Justify the statement “Kelvin-Planck and Clausius statements of second law of thermodynamics are
equal”.
5. Show that the heat and work are path functions.
Evaluate
1. In an air standard Otto cycle, the compression ratio is 7 and the compression begins at 35ºC and 0.1
MPa. The maximum temperature of the cycle is 1100ºC. Find (a) the temperature and the pressure at
various points in the cycle, (b) the heat supplied per kg of air, (c) work done per kg of air, (d) the cycle
efficiency and (e) the MEP of the cycle.
2. How do you assess the performance of the Otto Cycle?
3. How do you assess the performance of Diesel cycle?
4. Steam at 3Mpa and 400 ºC enters an adiabatic nozzle steadily with a velocity of 40 m/sec and leaves at
2.5 MPa and 300 m/sec. Determine (a) the exit temperature and (b) the ratio of inlet to exit the area.
Create
1. Generate a valid relation the COP of refrigerator and heat pump.
2. An inventor claims to have developed an engine that takes in 1000 J of heat and produces 1500 J of
work during each cycle. Comment on the validity of this claim.
3. From time to time people suggest using the difference in the temperature of water at the surface of the
ocean and that near the bottom of the ocean for operating a heat engine. Using 20 0C as the high
temperature and 40C as the low temperature. What is the efficiency of such a device?
45
16ME302 FLUID MECHANICS& HYDRAULIC MACHINES

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Define fluid properties and explain procedure of dimensional analysis
2. Explain procedure of measurement of fluid pressure and manometry
3. Apply laws of conservation of mass, momentum and energy to fluid flow problems
4. Analyze the impact of jet on the vanes
5. Analyze flow through different pipes
6. Evaluate performance of hydraulic machines
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO3
1 3 2 2
2 3 2 1
3 - 3 2
4 3 3 2
5 3 3 2
6 3 3 2
Unit I
Fluid statics-Hydro Static Forces on surfaces and submerged bodies
Physical properties of fluids- specific gravity, viscosity, surface tension- vapor pressure and their
influence on fluid motion- atmospheric gauge and vacuum pressure –measurement of pressure-
Piezometer, U-tube and differential manometers. Total pressure, center of pressure, hydrostatic forces on
vertical, inclined and curved surfaces, Buoyancy, center of buoyancy, Meta center
Stability of floating bodies and applications
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Fluid Kinematics-Fluid dynamics
Classification of flows, Stream line, path line and streak lines and stream tube, differential equation of
continuity, Acceleration. Surface and body forces –Euler‟s and Bernoulli‟s equations for flow along a
stream line, momentum equation and its application on force on pipe bend, Viscous flow through pipe ,
Dimensional analysis, Boundary layer, displacement thickness, momentum thickness, energy thickness
Navier-stokes equation
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Flow through Pipes-Basics of turbo machinery
Reynold‟s experiment- Darcy Weisbach equation- Minor losses in pipes- pipes in series and pipes in
parallel- total energy line-hydraulic gradient line. Measurement of flow: pilot tube, venturimeter and
orifice meter. Hydrodynamic force of jets on stationary and moving flat, inclined, and curved vanes, jet
striking centrally and at tip, velocity diagrams, work done and efficiency
Work done and efficiency flow over radial vanes
12+3 Hours
Unit IV
Hydraulic Turbines and performance-Hydraulic Pumps
Classification of turbines, impulse and reaction turbines, Pelton wheel, Francis turbine and Kaplan
turbine-working proportions, work done, efficiencies, hydraulic design – draft tube theory-functions and
efficiency. Geometric similarity, Unit and specific quantities, characteristic curves, selection of turbine,
cavitation, surge tank, water hammer. Classification of pumps, Centrifugal pumps-work done, efficiency,
specific speed, characteristic curves, Reciprocating pumps, -work done
Slip and indicator diagram
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. R. K. Bansal, A Text book of Fluid mechanics and hydraulic machines, Reprint, Laxmi Publications
Ltd., 2009
46
2. R K Rajput, A Text book of Fluid Mechanics, S. Chand Publishers, 6th Edition, 1998
Reference (s)
1. Frank M. White , Fluid Mechanics, 7thEdition, McGraw Hill, 2011
2. P. N. Modi, S. M. Seth, Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines, 14 th Edition, standard book
house, 2002
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
22
Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Assignment Test (%)
Remember 40 40 -
Understand 35 35 -
Apply 25 25 30
Analyze - - 40
Evaluate - - 30
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define compressible fluids and Incompressible fluids with examples.
2. State the Bernoulli‟s equation? Explain the significance of each term and write any two applications of
the Bernoulli‟s equation.
3. Define Reynold‟s number.
4. What do you mean by single acting and double acting reciprocating pumps?
5. List any two pumps used in mechanical industries for the handling of fluids.
6. Write any two characteristics of fluid flows.
Understand
1. Explain the behavior of Non-Newtonian fluids with the help of plot and give examples.
2. How do you estimate the drag coefficient for Stoke‟s law regime?
3. Derive the Hagen- Poiseuille equation for a laminar flow of Newtonian fluid using appropriate
notations.
4. Formulate an expression for the motion of a spherical particle through fluid under the influence of
gravitational force and centrifugal fields.
5. Derive the Boundary layer equation for Momentum thickness, Energy thickness and Displacement
thickness.
Apply
1. The pressure difference between two points in a pipe due to turbulent flow depends on the velocity v,
diameter D, dynamic viscosity µ , density ρ , roughness k and the distance between the pints L. Using
dimensional analysis prove that f is a function of Reynolds number Re and roughness factor k/D.
2. 60 % sulfuric acid is to be pumped at the rate of 4000 cm 3/sec through a pipe 25 mm diameter and
raised to a height of 25 m. The pipe is 30 m long and it runs straight. Compute power required by the
pump. The specific gravity of the acid is 1.531 and its kinematic viscosity is 0.425 Stokes. Friction
factor is 0.0047.
3. Water is pumped from a reservoir to a height of 1000 m from the reservoir level, through a pipe of 15
cm I.D. at an average velocity of 4 m/s. If the pipeline along with the fittings is equivalent to 2000 m
long and the overall efficiency is 70%, what is the energy required for pumping? Friction factor f =
0.046 Re-0.2.
4. A catalyst tower 50 ft high and 20 ft in diameter is packed with 1-in. diameter spheres. Gas enters the
top of the bed at a temperature of 500oF and leaves at the same temperature. The pressure at the bottom
of the bed is 30 lbf/in.2 abs. The bed porosity is 0.40. If the gas has average properties similar to
propane and the time of contact (based on superficial velocity of gas) between the gas and the catalyst
is 10 s, what is the inlet pressure?
Analyze
1. How the drag coefficient varies with the Reynold‟s number for any two different cross-sections of
pipes?
22
47
2. Show that laminar flow of Newtonian fluids through a pipe is u/u max = 1 - (r/rw).
3. Compare centrifugal pumps with reciprocating pumps.
4. Justify the statement “In an adiabatic process the stagnation temperature is constant”.
5. Show that the velocity profile in the laminar flow of a Newtonian fluid through a circular pipe is a
parabola.
Evaluate
1. Determine the minimum fluidization velocity for a bad of particles fluidized by water. Take d p=120µm,
Øs=1.0, ρp=2500 kg/m3, €mf=0.45, ρ=1000 kg/m3, µ=0.9 mPa.s. Also calculate the bed voidage, € and
the ratio of the height of the fluidized bed to that of the fixed bed for uo/ umf =10.
2. How do you assess the performance of centrifugal pumps?
3. How do you assess the performance of venturimeter?
4. An aeroplane is flying at a height of 15 km where the temperature is -50 0C. The speed of the plane is
corresponding to M=2.0. Assuming k=1.4 and R=287J/kgK. Find the speed of the plane.
Create
1. Generate the velocity distribution of viscous flow between two parallel plates when both plates are
fixed across a section is parabolic in nature. Also prove that the maximum velocity is equal to the one
and half times the average velocity.
2. A liquid with a constant density ρ kg/m3 is flowing at an unknown velocity υ 1 m/s through a horizontal
pipe of cross sectional area A1 m 2 at a pressure p1 N/m2 , and then it passes to a section of the pipe in
which the area is reduced gradually to A2 m 2 and the pressure is p2. Assuming no friction losses,
calculate the velocities υ 1 and υ 2 if the pressure difference (p1 – p2) is measured.
3. Under conditions of laminar flow , the friction factor is given by 16/ NRe .Derive an expression for the
pressure drop per unit length in terms of the pipe diameter, „d‟, the average velocity „u‟, the density and
the viscosity of the fluid.
4. Lube oil(specific gravity 0.8) is flowing through a 15 cm steel pipe at 1500 LPM. A 10 cm orifice
attached to a mercury manometer is placed in the pipeline and the orifice coefficient may be taken as
0.62. If the manometer leg is inclined at an angle of 300 to the horizontal, what would be the
manometer reading along the sloping leg?
48
16ME303 MACHINE DRAWING

2044
Course Outcomes
1. Apply the principles of engineering drawing in machine drawing
2. Construct computer aided drawings using CAD software package
3. Understand the conventional representation of materials and machine components
4. Illustrate various permanent and temporary Fasteners, Joints and Couplings
5. Develop assembly drawings from the given part drawing and vice versa
6. Produce component drawings suitable for manufacturing
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO3 PO5 PO10 PSO1
1 3 1 3 3 3
2 - 2 2 3 2
3 3 1 3 2 2
4 3 3 3 3 3
5 3 3 3 3 3
6 3 3 3 3 3
Through drafting using any one drafting software
Unit I
Principles of Drawings
Principles of Drawing
Sections
Hatching of sections, cutting planes, Revolved or removed section, half section, Local section.
Conventional representation
Common features, springs, Gears, Materials Interrupted views and Braking of Shaft, Pipe, Bar Surface
finishing & Machining Symbols.
Dimensioning
General principles, Method of execution, Methods of indicating dimensions, arrangement of dimensions,
Special indications and Standard abbreviations.
Sectional views
Full section, half section and Auxiliary Sections
Practical Components
7. Principles of drawing: Exercise covering hatching of sections, cutting planes, dimensioning etc.,
8. Conventional representation of common machine components, Dimensioning and standard
abbreviations.
9. Sectional views: Draw the sectional views from the front, the view from above and the sectional view
from the left/ right from the given isometric view of an object or machine element.
6+12 Hours
Unit II
Fasteners
Screwed Fasteners
Screw thread nomenclature, Forms of threads, Types of threads, Representation of threads, Bolted joints,
Locking arrangements, Foundation bolts.
Key Joints
Types of Key Joints, Type of Cotter Joints, Types of Pin Joints and knuckle Joints.
Shaft couplings
Introduction, Applications of couplings, Types of Couplings, Working Principles.
Riveted Joints
Introduction, Rivet and Riveting, Classification of rivets, Terminology of riveted joint, Types of riveted joints.
10. Screwed fasteners – 1
49
a. Construction of different types of thread profiles, Methods of drawing hexagonal and square
nuts.
b. Forms of nuts, Types of machine and cap screws and foundation bolts
11. Screwed fasteners – 2

Construction of locking arrangements for nuts (Lock nut, locking by split pin, Castle nut, Wile‟s lock
nut, locking by set screw, Grooved nut, locking by screw, locking by plate and locking by spring
washer)
12. Key joints: Construction of different types of keys, Cotter joint with sleeve, Cotter joint with socket
and spigot ends, cotter joint with a Gib, Knuckle joint.
13. Shaft couplings – 1: Rigid couplings
Construction of Half-lap muff coupling, Split-muff coupling, flanged coupling, Protected flanged
coupling, Solid flanged coupling.
14. Shaft couplings – 2: Flexible couplings
Construction of Bushed pin type flanged coupling, compression coupling, Claw coupling, Cone
coupling, universal coupling and Oldham coupling
15. Riveted joints:
Construction of different types of riveted heads, Double strap diamond butt joint, Single riveted lap
joint, Double riveted chain lap joint, Double riveted zig-zag lap joint, Single riveted single strap butt
joint, single riveted double strap butt joint, Double riveted double strap chain butt joint, Double riveted,
double strap zig-zag butt joint.
9+18 Hours
Through Solid modeling using any one solid modeling software
Unit III
Assembly Drawings
Introduction, Importance of BOM, Assembly procedures, Construction of assembly drawings from the given
part or detailed views, using conventions and easy drawing proportions, Assembly drawings of Stuffing box,
Steam engine cross head, Eccentric, Single tool post, Plummer block, Swivel bearing, Screw Jack, C-Clamp.
Practical Components:
16. Construction of assembly drawing of Stuffing box
17. Construction of assembly drawing of Pedestal bearing
18. Construction of assembly drawing of Screw jack
7+14 Hours
Unit IV
Part drawings
Introduction, Importance of BOM, Part drawing procedure, construction of part drawings from the given
assembly drawings using conventions and easy drawing proportions. Part drawings of Stuffing box, Steam
engine cross head, Eccentric, Single tool post, Plummer block, Swivel bearing, Screw Jack, C-Clamp. Limits,
Fits and Tolerances: Representation of size, tolerances, roughness, form surface roughness, form and position
errors, and machining symbols required for the production of machine parts in shop floor.
19. Construction of part drawings of engine connecting rod
20. Construction of part drawings of tool post
21. Construction of detailed production drawings of engine connecting rod
22. Construction of detailed production drawings of helical gear
8+16 Hours
Total: 90 Hours
Note: Sheets under Unit-I and II need to be practiced with any one basic 2D drafting software, Sheets under
Unit-III and IV need to be practiced with any one solid modelling software and Sheets on production drawing
may be practiced either with Drafting software or solid modelling software.
Textbook (s)
1. K.L. Narayana, P. Kannaiah, K. Venkata Reddy, Machine Drawing, New Age International, 5 th Edition,
2016
2. K.L. Narayana, P. Kannaiah, K. Venkata Reddy, Production Drawing, New Age International, 3 rd
Edition, 2014
50
Reference (s)
3. Ajeet Singh, Machine Drawing includes AutoCAD, 2 nd Edition, McGraw Hill, 2012
4. Goutam Pohit, Goutam Ghosh, Machine Drawing with AutoCAD, 1st Edition, Pearson Education, 2007
5. N. D. Bhatt, Machine Drawing, 49th Edition, Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Limited, 2014
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%)
Remember 25 -
Understand 35 -
Apply 40 50
Analyze - -
Evaluate - 40
Create - 10
Total (%) 100 100
Remember
23. Show the conventional representation of concrete, aluminum, wood and glass.
24. Show the conventional representation of leaf spring, spur gear, ball bearing and splined shaft.
25. Sketch the method of dimensioning chamfers and countersunk.
26. Recall the positions of various orthographic views in first and third angle projections.
Understand
6. Explain the differences between engineering drawing and machine drawing.
7. Identify the points to be considered while laying out the different views of an object.
8. Interpret the usage of auxiliary section and its necessity.
9. Classify the different types of screw thread forms.
Apply
10. Sketch the two views of castle nut with proportions marked.
11. Demonstrate the various methods of fitting a feather key in position.
12. Draw the sectional view from the front, view from the side of a cotter joint with sleeve used to connect
two rods of 50 mm diameter each.
13. Assemble all the given parts of screw jack and draw half sectional front view, top view and right-side
view.
Analyze
51
27. Differentiate between butt muff coupling and half lap muff coupling.
28. Compare cone coupling and claw coupling.
29. Name three types of rigid shaft couplings. Justify why they are called rigid.
30. Justify where and why split muff coupling is used in preference to solid muff coupling.
Create
31. Generate the different views of petrol engine connecting rod using AutoCAD software.
32. Generate the isometric views from the given orthographic views of a machine component.
33. Generate the internal threads of a hexagonal headed nut in the AutoCAD software.
52
16ME304 MATERIAL SCIENCE AND METALLURGY

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Understand the crystal structure, Mechanical behavior of materials and necessity of alloying
2. Construct and interpret equilibrium diagrams
3. Illustrate Fe-Fe3C equilibrium diagram and heat treatment processes of steels
4. Understand the composition of alloy steels and cast iron
5. Outline non-ferrous alloys viz. copper, aluminum and titanium
6. Explain the mechanical properties of ceramic and composite materials and infer their application
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO3
1 3 2 1
2 3 3 3
3 3 3 3
4 3 1 -
5 3 1 1
6 3 3 1
Unit I
Structure of Metals-Mechanical Behavior of Materials- Mechanical working of metals
Bonds in solids-metallic bond-crystal structure-BCC, FCC, HCP, Unit cells, packing factor,
crystallization of metals, grains and grain boundaries, effect of grain boundaries on properties of metals,
crystal imperfections. Stress-Strain diagrams for engineering materials in tension and compression.
Testing of hardness and impact strength, elastic deformation, plastic deformation- Twinning and fracture.
Hot and cold working- characteristics, Recovery, recrystallization.
Grain growth analysis.
10+3 Hours
Unit II
Constitution of Alloys-Equilibrium Diagrams
Types of solid solutions, Hume Rothery rules, intermediate alloy phases and electron compounds. Phase
rule, Experimental method of construction of equilibrium diagrams, Isomorphous alloy systems,
equilibrium cooling and heating of alloys. Lever rule, coring, eutectic systems, peritectic reaction,
Transformations in solid state - allotropy, eutectoid, peritectoid reactions, and properties of alloys.
Relationship between equilibrium diagrams.
12+3 Hours
Unit III
Metallurgy of Iron and Steel-Heat treatment of steels
Fe-Fe3C equilibrium diagram, micro constituents in steels, classification of steels, structure and properties
of plain carbon steels. Effect of alloying elements on Fe-Fe3 C system, low alloy steels, stainless steels,
Hadfield manganese steels, tool steels and die steels, structure and properties of white cast iron, malleable
cast iron, grey cast iron and spheroidal grey cast iron. Annealing, normalizing, hardening, TTT diagrams,
tempering, hardenability, surface hardening methods.
Age hardening treatment.
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Non-Ferrous Metals and Alloys-Composite Materials
Structure and properties of copper and its alloys, aluminum and its alloys and titanium and its alloys.
Classification of composites, particle reinforced materials, fiber reinforced materials, metal ceramic
mixtures.
Metal-matrix composite and C-C composites.
12+5 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Sidney Avner, Introduction to physical metallurgy, McGraw Hill Education, 2nd Edition, 1997
53
2. V. D Kodgire, S Kodgire, Materials Science and Metallurgy, Everest Publishing House, 42nd
Edition, 2018
Reference (s)
1. L.H. Van Vlack, Elements of Materials Science and Engineering, Pearson India, 6th Edition, 2002
2. V. Raghavan, Elements of Materials Science, PHI Learning, 5th Edition, 2004
3. R.K. Rajput, Engineering Materials & Metallurgy”, S. Chand Publications, 2nd Edition, 2006
4. Donald R. Askeland, Pradeep P. Fulay, Essentials of material science, Cengage Learning, 2nd
Edition, 2009
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
23
Remember 35 25 -
Understand 35 35 -
Apply 30 40 50
Analyze - - 40
Evaluate - - 10
Create - - --
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. State Hume Rothery‟s rules for the formation of substitution type of solid solutions.
2. Define metallic bonds.
3. List any two types of steels.
4. What do you mean by tempering?
5. List any four different engineering materials used in industries.
6. Write about mechanical properties of any two composite materials.
Understand
1. Explain the various stages in a heat treatment cycle.
2. Identify the need for two different heat treatment processes.
3. Illustrate the four Hume‟s Rothary rules.
4. Compare the properties of grey cast iron with white cast iron.
5. Classify the Tool Steels.
Apply
1. Construct the Fe-Fe3C equilibrium diagram.
2. Demonstrate the Jominy End Quench test and show the cooling pattern on the mild steel work piece.
3. Select the best suitable materials among the alloy steels available for manufacturing of railway tracks.
4. Predict Cooling curves of duralumin.
Analyze
1. Differentiate Cast iron and steels through their equilibrium diagrams.
2. Compare the properties of crystalline ceramics and glass ceramics.
3. Resolve the degrees of freedom for the conversion of ice into water.
4. Differentiate between MMC‟s and C-C Composites
5. Compare the physical, chemical and mechanical properties of ceramics with those of metals.
Evaluate
1. Describe the slow cooling history of 0.4% C in Fe-Fe3C diagram and calculate the proportions of
different phases at 1100 0C, 727 0C, and at 600 0C and also draw the room temperature microstructures.
2. “Cooling of pure metals forms dendritic tree like structure”. Support the statement.
3. Choose among the best Aluminum alloys for the manufacture of Aircraft bodies.
4. Why do metals exhibit metallic luster? Support your answer with proper reasoning.
Create
1. Generate the temperature distribution of Bi-Cd alloy using a proper phase diagram.
23
54
2. A 4 in. cube of a liquid metal is allowed to solidify. A spherical shrinkage cavity with a diameter of
1.49 in. is observed in the solid casting. Derive the percent volume change that occurs during
solidification.
3. An age hardened, Al-Cu bracket is used to hold a heavy electrical-sensing device on the outside of a
steel-making furnace. Temperatures may exceed 2000C. Is this a good design? Argue and support with
proper reasoning.
4. Design the materials and processing required to produce a discontinuous, but aligned, fiber-reinforced
fiberglass composite that will form the hood of a sports car. Be sure to list all of the assumptions you
make in creating your design.
55
16IT306 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING THROUGH JAVA

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Apply object-oriented concepts to real world problems
2. Develop application software using different types of inheritances
3. Create and use user defined packages
4. Analyze and recover runtime exceptions arise in the applications
5. Apply parallel processing applications using threads
6. Develop internet based interactive applications using peripheral functions
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO5
1 3 3 2 3
2 3 3 3 3
3 2 2 3 3
4 2 2 3 3
5 3 3 3 3
6 3 3 3 3
Unit I
Introduction to Java
Overview of Object Oriented Programming principles, Importance of Java to the Internet, Byte code,
Methods, classes and instances, Data types, arrays, control statements, simple java program, Classes and
Objects– constructors, methods, access control, this keyword, overloading methods and constructors,
garbage collection
Features of object-oriented programming–Java History–Computer Programming Hierarchy–Role of Java
Programmer in Industry
11+3 Hours
Unit II
Inheritance, Packages & Interface
Inheritance: Hierarchical abstractions, Base class and subclass, subtype, substitutability, forms of
inheritance-specialization, specification, construction, extension, limitation, combination, Benefits of
inheritance, super keyword, final keyword with inheritance, polymorphism, abstract classes
Packages: Defining, Creating and Accessing a Package, Understanding CLASSPATH, importing packages,
Member access rules
Interface: Defining an interface, differences between classes and interfaces, implementing interface, variables
in interface and extending interfaces
Nested–Inner Class & Anonymous Classes–Generic Class Types
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Exception Handling & Multithreading
Exception handling: Concepts and benefits of exception handling, exception hierarchy, usage of try,
catch, throw, throws and finally, built-in and User Defined Exceptions
Multithreading: Definition thread, thread life cycle, creating threads, synchronizing threads, daemon threads
Control Flow In Exceptions– JVM reaction to Exceptions– Inter Communication of Threads– Critical Factor
in Thread–Deadlock
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Applets & Event Handling
Applets: Concepts of Applets, differences between applets and applications, life cycle of an applet, types
of applets, creating applets, passing parameters to applets, The AWT class hierarchy, user interface
components labels, button, Text components
Event Handling: Events, Delegation event model, handling mouse and keyboard events, Adapter classes, inner
classes, compare basic AWT components with swing components, more user interface components-canvas,
scrollbars, check box, choices, lists panels–scroll pane, dialogs, menu bar, layout managers
56
Applet Security Policies–Anonymous Inner classes a Short–cut to Event Handling–Java Utilities (java.util
Package)
12+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. H. Schildt, Java: The complete reference, TMH, 7th Edition, 2006
2. T. A. Budd, An Introduction to Object – Oriented Programming, Addison Wesley Longman, 3rd
Edition, 2002
Reference (s)
1. Dietal & Dietal, Java: How to Program, PHI, 8th Edition, 2010
2. C. S. Horstmann and G. Cornell, Core Java, Vol 1. Fundamentals, Pearson Education, 7th Edition,
2004
3. C. Horstmann, BIG JAVA Compatible with Java 5 & 6, Wiley Publishers, 3rd Edition, 2008
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 35 25 -
Understand 30 35 -
Apply 35 40 -
Analyze - - 40
Evaluate - - 30
Create - - 30
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. List all OOPs principles
2. Define class and object
3. Illustrate various data types supported by JAVA
4. State various access controls available in JAVA
5. Define inheritance
6. Define thread
Understand
1. Explain byte code
2. Explain the use of super, static and final keywords
3. Illustrate the use of try, catch, throw and throws
4. Java is purely object-oriented programming language. Explain
5. Explain types of polymorphism with Example
Apply
1. Write statements that perform the following one-dimensional-array operations:
a. Set the 10 elements of integer array counts to zero
b. Add one to each of the 15 elements of integer array bonus
c. Display the five values of integer array best Scores in column format
2. Create two arrays that store all even no‟s in one array and all odd no‟s in another array for a given set
of elements
3. Write a java program to implements final variable, Method and classes
4. Explain the reason for the following code giving compiling errors.
abstractclassAbstractClass
{
abstractvoidabstractMethod()
{
System.out.println("First Method");
24
57
}
}
5. Write a java program to implement the following techniques
a) Method Overloading
b) Method Overriding
6. Write a Java program to implement Virtual function technique

Analyze
1. Compare and Contrast an abstract class and an interface
2. Differentiate method overloading and overriding
3. Differentiate abstraction and encapsulation
4. Identify the uses of calling a synchronize method inside a synchronize method
5. Identify memory leak problems in Java objects
58
16ME305 RIGID BODY DYNAMICS

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Interpret kinematics and kinetics of a particle in rectilinear motion and solve simple problems
2. Interpret kinematics and kinetics of a particle in curvilinear motion solve simple problems
3. Explain kinematics and kinetics of rigid bodies in Plane motion and solve simple problems
4. Summarize alternate approaches for studying the kinetics of a rigid body in motion. Solve simple
problems
5. Apply Work-Energy principles to find relationships between velocity and position
6. Apply Impulse-Momentum principles in cases of impact to find approximate solutions
immediately after impact
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO3
1 3 3 2
2 3 3 2
3 3 3 2
4 3 - 3
5 - 3 2
6 - 3 2
Unit I
Rectilinear motion of a particle-Kinematics-Kinetics
Introduction to Dynamics, Rectilinear motion: displacement, velocity and acceleration, Graphical
representation, Motion with uniform acceleration and variable acceleration, Equations of rectilinear
motion, equations of dynamic equilibrium.
D’ Alembert’s Principle.
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Curvilinear Motion of a particle-Kinematics-Kinetics
Introduction, Position vector, velocity and acceleration, Components of Motion: Rectangular components,
Components of Acceleration: Normal and Tangential, Components of Motion. Components of Motion.
Radial and Transverse components. Introduction, Equations of Motion: In rectangular components,
Tangential and Normal Component, Equations of Dynamic Equilibrium (D‟ Alembert‟s Principle).
D’ Alembert’s Principle for Motion of Vehicles.
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Plane Motion of rigid bodies-Kinematics of Rigid Body-Kinetics of Rigid body
Introduction, Rotation, Linear and angular velocity, linear and angular acceleration in rotation, general
plane motion, absolute and relative velocity in plane motion. Instantaneous center of rotation in plane
motion, Location of Instantaneous Centre. Introduction, Plane motion of a rigid body, equations of motion,
relation between translator motion and rotary motion of a body in plane motion.
D’Alembert’s Principle in plane motion.
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Alternate approaches Motion of rigid bodies-Kinetics of Rigid Body-Impulse and Momentum
Work - Energy Method: Principle of Work and Energy for a Rigid Body- connected systems -fixed axis
rotation and plane motion. Introduction, Principle of Impulse and Momentum, Conservation of
Momentum, Angular Impulse and Momentum.
Conservation of angular momentum.
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. A.K Tayal, Engineering Mechanics-Statics and Dynamics, Umesh Publications, 14th Edition, 2010
2. S.S Bhavikatti, Engineering Mechanics, New Age International, 6th Multicolor Edition, 2015
59
3. S. Timoshenko, D.H. Young and JV Rao, Engineering Mechanics, TMH, 4th Edition, 2008
Reference (s)
1. S. S Bhavikatti and H.A. Vittal, Problems and Solutions in Engineering Mechanics, New Age
International, 2nd Edition, Reprint, 2012
2. Singer Ferdinand L, Engineering Mechanics, Harper & Row Publishers, 3rd Edition, 1975
3. R K Bansal, Engineering Mechanics, Laxmi Publications, 6th Edition, 2015
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 20 25 -
Understand 30 25 -
Apply 20 25 30
Analyze 30 25 45
Evaluate - - 25
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. List any two approaches of Motion of rigid bodies.
2. State the D‟Alembert‟s Principle.
3. List any two types of plane motion.
4. Recall the principle of law of conservation of energy. List any two applications.
5. Define absolute and relative velocities in plane motion.
6. Find the velocity of its center of gravity, when a right circular cylinder of mass m and radius r is
suspended by cord round its surface the cylinder is allowed to fall from rest through a vertical distance
„h‟.
7. Relate the translatory motion with rotary motion of body in plane motion.
Understand
1. Explain rectilinear motion of a particle moving with varying acceleration.
2. Explain the D‟Alembert‟s Principle for Rectilinear motion of a particle.
3. Explain the D‟Alembert‟s Principle for Curvilinear Motion of vehicles.
4. Explain the D‟Alembert‟s Principle for Plane Motion of rigid bodies.
5. Explain the Principle of Work and Energy for a Rigid Body.
6. Explain the various components of motions (a) normal and tangential (b) rectangular components (c)
radial and transverse components.
Apply
1. A particle of mass m resting on a smooth semicircular cylinder of radius r is prevented from moving by
string AB of length r as shown in fig. if the string is cut find the value of angle  defining the position
C of the particle when it jumps off the cylindrical surface.
2. An elevator of total weight 5000N starts to move upwards with a constant acceleration and acquires a
velocity 2 m/s after travelling a distance of 2 m. find the tensile force in the cable during accelerated
motion.
3. Two rough planes inclined at 300 and 600 to horizontal are placed back to back as shown in Fig. The
blocks of weights 50N and 100N are placed on the faces and are connected by a string running parallel
to planes and passing over a frictionless pulley. If the coefficient of friction between planes and blocks
is 1/3, find the resulting acceleration and tension in the string.
25 Assignment Test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills pertaining to this Course
60
4. A uniform spherical ball of mass m and radius r is projected along a rough horizontal plane with an
initial linear velocity of v0 and zero angular acceleration. The coefficient of friction between the ball
and the plane is µ. Determine the time after which the ball will start rolling without sliding. Also, find
the linear and angular velocities of ball at the time.
5. A flywheel weighing 50 KN and having radius of gyration 1m loses its speed from 400 rpm to 280 rpm
in 2 minutes. Calculate (i) the retarding torque acting on it (ii) change in its kinetic energy during the
above period (iii) Change in its angular momentum during the same period.
6. A cylinder of mass m and radius r resting on an inclined plane is released from rest rolls down the
inclined plane without slipping. Determine a) the acceleration of its centre of mass b) the maximum
angle θof inclined plane for which the body will roll without slipping c) the maximum velocity of the
Centre of the cylinder after it has rolled a distance of 1m. Assume the coefficient of static friction is
0.192. What would be the acceleration of the centre of the cylinder if it were to move down the inclined
plane under the frictionless conditions?
7. Derive the relationship between the linear motion of geometric centre and angular motion of a wheel
rolling without slipping.
Analyze
1. A man wishes to move wooden box of 1 meter cube to a distance of 5m with the least amount of work.
If the block weights 1kN and the coefficient of friction is 0.3, Inspect whether he should tip it or slide
it.
2. A body weighing 300N is pushed up a 300 plane by a 400N force acting parallel to the plane. If the
initial velocity of the body is 1.5 m/sec and coefficient of kinetic friction is 0.2, what velocity will the
body have after moving 6m?
3. A flywheel weighing 50kN and having radius of gyration 1m loses its speed from 400rpm to 280rpm in
2 minutes. Examine (i) the retarding torque acting on it. (ii) Change in its kinetic energy during the
above period.
4. A roller of mass m = 600 kg and radius r=0.25mts is pushed with a constant force p=850N on rough
horizontal plane. If the roller starts from rest and rolls without slipping find the distance required to be
rolled if it acquires a velocity of 3m/sec.
5. The rotation of rod OA is defined by the relation θ = 0.3t2. A collar P slides along this rod in such a
way that its distance from O is given by r = t3 /3 + 2t. in these relations θ is expressed in radians, r in
centimeters and t in seconds. Determine (i) the velocity, of the collar (ii) the total acceleration of the
collar when t = 2 seconds.
6. A rocket is released from a jet fighter flying horizontally at 1200kmph at an altitude of 3000m above
its target. The rocket thrust gives it a constant horizontal acceleration of 6 m/sec2 .At what angle below
the horizontal should pilot see the target at the instant of releasing the rocket in order to score a hit?
7. A block weighing 2500 N rests on a level horizontal plane for which coefficient of friction is 0.20. This
block is pulled by a force of 1000N acting at an angle of 300 the horizontal. Find the velocity of the
block after it moves 30m starting from rest if the force of 1000N is then removed how much further
will it move? Use work energy method.
Evaluate
1. Determine: (a) time required for the particle to reach a velocity of 72 m/s from its initial condition at t=
0, (b) acceleration of the particle when v= 30 m/s, and (c) net displacement of the particle during the
interval from t = 1s to t = 4s.Position coordinate of a particle confined to move along a straight line is
given by s= 2t3–24t+ 6, where sis measured in meters from a convenient origin and tis in seconds.
2. A slender beam AB of length 3 m which remains always in the same vertical plane has its ends A and
B constrained to remain in contact with a horizontal floor and a vertical wall respectively as shown in
61
Fig. Determine the velocity and acceleration of the end B at the position shown in figure, if the point A
has a velocity of 2m/sec and an acceleration of 1.6m/sec2 towards left.
3. Determine the velocities of the point B and D given in Example by instantaneous centre method.
Create
1. Design the six legged kinematic moving machine.
2. Modify the automated feed cutting mechanism model.
3. Design a model to convert wave energy into electrical energy.
62
16ME306 FLUID MECHANICS & HYDRAULIC MACHINES LAB

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Find co-efficient of discharge for the venturimeter
2. Demonstrate the concepts of discharge through orifice meter
3. Explain concepts of discharge through Rota meter
4. Analyze the performance characteristics curves of different turbines
5. Analyze the performance characteristics curves of different pumps
6. Build basic components of flow measurement & hydraulic machines
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO10
1 3 2 1
2 3 2 1
3 3 3 1
4 3 3 2
5 3 3 2
6 3 2 2
List of Experiments
1. Calibration of Venturimeter
2. Calibration of Orifice meter
3. Determination of Friction Factor in Flow Through Pipes
4. Calibration of Rota meter
5. Verification of Bernoulli‟s Theorem
6. Experiment on Reynolds‟s Apparatus
7. Impact of Jet on Vanes
8. Performance Test on Multistage Centrifugal Pump
9. Performance Test on Reciprocating Pump
10. Performance Test on Francis Turbine
11. Performance Test on Pelton Wheel
1. Performance evaluation of a centrifugal pump at different speeds
2. Fabrication of a venturimeter suitable for a given pipe to determine the discharge.
3. Fabricate a Pelton wheel proto type model.
4. Fabricate a centrifugal pump proto type model.
5. Fabricate a Francis turbine proto type model.
6. Fabricate a Kaplan turbine proto type model.
7. Fabrication of a orifice meter suitable for a given pipe to determine the discharge
8. Fabrication of a Rota meter suitable for a given pipe to determine the discharge
9. Fabricate a channel and a notch of V or rectangular type and determine its discharge.
10. Fabricate a bottle submarine by using Archimedes principle
1. Flow measurements and Hydraulic machinery manual, GMR institute of technology, Rajam
2. P. N. Modi, S. M. Seth, Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines, 14 th Edition, Standard book
house, 2002
3. R. K. Bansal, A Text book of Fluid mechanics and hydraulic machines, Reprint, Laxmi Publications
Ltd., 2009
1. Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines Lab manual, Department of Chemical Engineering,
GMRIT, Rajam
26
Students shall opt any one of the Augmented experiments in addition to the regular experiments
63
16IT309 JAVA LAB

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Make use of JAVA SDK environment to create - debug and run java programs
2. Create applications based on code reusability
3. Develop programs using threads
4. Develop and debug real time problems using exception handling
5. Create interactive applications using event handling mechanisms
6. Design Graphical User Interface using AWT components
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5
1 3 2 1 1
2 2 2 1 1
3 3 2 1 1
4 2 2 2 2
5 3 2 2 2
6 3 2 2 2
List of Experiments
1. Write a Java program to demonstrate String handling methods.
2. Write a Java program for sorting a given list using inheritance concept.
3. Write a Java program for creating one base class for student personal details and inherit those
details into the sub class of student Educational details to display complete student information.
4. Write a Java program to implement matrix operations using multidimensional arrays.
5. Write a Java program that illustrates runtime polymorphism.
6. Write a Java program - to demonstrate tokenizing given string/text using String Tokenizer class
7. Write a Java program to create a package which has classes and methods to read Student
Admission details.
8. Write a Java program to define and handle Exceptions in the implementation of Program3. (Also
make use of throw - throws).
9. Java program that simulates a traffic light.
10. Write a Java program for handling mouse events.
11. Write a Java Program to design a Job Application/ Student Admission Form and store the values
in a file.
12. Write a java program for a simple event handler to display cut/copy/paste events using swings.
13. Write a Java program that works as a simple Calculator.
1. New Patient Registry Management System
2. Restaurant Billing Management System
3. Library Management System
4. ATM Management System
5. Bus Ticket Booking Management System
6. Movie Ticket Booking Management System
7. Queuing Management System
8. Attendance Management System
9. Medical Store Billing Management System
10. Text Editor Projects in Java
11. Google Search Engine Filter
12. Electronic voting System
13. Day Planner
14. Library management System
15. Personal Finance Management System
1. JAVA Lab manual, Department of Information Technology, GMRIT, Rajam
27
64
16ME307 METALLURGY LAB
0032
Course Outcomes
1. Interpret crystal structure, Mechanical behavior of materials and necessity of alloying
2. Interpret equilibrium diagram
3. Demonstrate heat treatment process of steels
4. Summarize constitution of alloys and cast irons
5. Identify nonferrous alloys of copper
6. Identify aluminum and titanium alloys
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO10
1 3 2 2
2 3 1 2
3 3 2 1
4 3 3 2
5 3 1 2
6 3 1 1
List of Experiments
1. Introduction to metallurgy sample preparation.
2. Study of metallurgical microscope.
3. Preparation and study of microstructure of pure Iron.
4. Preparation and study of microstructure of copper.
5. Preparation and study of microstructure of Aluminium.
6. Preparation and study of the microstructure of low carbon, medium carbon and high carbon steels.
7. Preparation and study of the micro Structures of Cast Irons.
8. Preparation and study of the micro Structures of Non- Ferrous Alloy namely brass and bronze.
9. Heat treatment of steel by using Muffle furnace
10. Hardenability of steels by Jominy end quench Test.
11. To find out the hardness of various treated and untreated steels.
1. Time temperature and transformation diagrams for Cast Iron to evaluate phase change.
2. Time temperature and transformation diagrams for Mild Steel to evaluate phase change.
3. A study on micro structural and thermal analysis for high heat resisting materials.
4. Theoretical study of Ferrite and cementite for illuminate.
5. Theoretical study of Ferrite and cementite for Ni alloys.
6. Comparative analysis of Martensite and Austenite strength for cast Iron.
7. Theoretical study of allotropic change for Ferrous materials.
1. Metallurgy Lab manual, Department of Mechanical Engineering, GMRIT, Rajam.
28
65
16ME401 APPLIED THERMAL ENGINEERING

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Understand automobile engine working, valve timing and associated systems such as lubricating
system, cooling system, fuel feed system, ignition system etc., their necessity, requirements,
construction details, different types and their working.
2. Understand the concept of combustion in Spark ignition engine; Pressure Vs crank angle
diagrams, and pre-ignition.
3. Explain the concept of combustion in Compression ignition engine, Pressure Vs crank angle
diagrams, Knocking, Detonation
4. Analyze the performance of I.C. Engine.
5. Explain the emission measurement techniques.
6. Apply the concept of air compression in reciprocating and axial flow compressors.
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO7
1 3 2 1 -
2 3 2 1 -
3 3 2 1 -
4 - 3 - 2
5 2 - 3 2
6 2 - 3 -
Unit I
I.C. Engines-Engine Systems
Heat engine- IC engines Classification - Working principles two stroke and four stroke SI and CI engines,
Valve and Port Timing Diagrams, principle of Wankel engine. Principle of super charging. Fuel, Simple
Carburetor, Fuel Injection System, Ignition. Cooling and Lubrication, systems
Zenith Carburetor
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Combustion in S.I. Engines-Combustion in C.I. Engines
Normal Combustion and abnormal combustion – Importance of flame speed and effect of engine
variables, Types of Abnormal combustion, pre-ignition and knocking, Fuel requirements and fuel rating,
anti-knock additives, combustion chamber, requirements, types. Four stages of combustion, Delay period
and its importance, Effect of engine variables, Diesel Knock, Need for air movement, suction,
compression and combustion induced turbulence, open and divided combustion chambers and nozzles
used. Fuel requirements and fuel rating
Air squish
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Testing and Performance-Emission and Pollution
Parameters of performance, measurement of cylinder pressure, fuel consumption, air intake, exhaust gas
composition, Brake power, Determination of frictional losses and indicated power, Performance test, Heat
balance sheet and chart. SI Engine and CI Engine emissions and its control and comparison, Effect of
pollution on Human health and bio sphere
Motoring test
11+3 Hours
Unit IV
Compressors-Rotary and Axial Flow Compressors
Classification – Reciprocating compressors: Principle of operation, work required, Isothermal efficiency
volumetric efficiency and effect of clearance, stage compression, saving of work, minimum work
condition for stage compression. Roots Blower, vane sealed compressor, screw compressor, mechanical
details and principle of working, efficiency considerations. Mechanical details and principle of operation
of Axial Flow Compressors, velocity triangles and energy transfer per stage degree of reaction, work
done factor - isentropic efficiency, pressure rise calculations
Polytropic efficiency
66
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. V. Ganesan, Internal Combustion Engines, Tata McGraw Hill, 4 th Edition, 2012
2. R.K.Rajput, Thermal Engineering, Lakshmi Publications, 10 th Edition, 2018
Reference (s)
1. M.L. Mathur and R.P. Sharma, Internal Combustion Engines, Dhanpat Rai Publications, 2010
2. Rudramoorthy, Thermal Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill Education India, 4th Edition, 2010
3. PS Gill and Smith, IC engines, Tata McGraw-Hill Education India, 3rd Edition, 2009
4. John B. Heywood, Internal Combustion Engine Fundamental, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 1st
Edition, 2011
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 25 25 -
Understand 40 25 -
Apply 35 45 30
Analyze - 05 60
Evaluate - - 10
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define heat engine.
2. Define ignition lag for petrol and diesel engines.
3. List any four parameters considered for evaluating performance of your vehicle.
4. List any three different losses in a IC engine.
5. Define following terms with respect to reciprocating compressors, a) Mechanical efficiency b)
Volumetric efficiency c) Isothermal efficiency.
Understand
1. Explain 4-stroke engine with the help of neat sketch.
2. Explain working of cooling system of Maruthi 800 car.
3. With the help of P-θ diagram explain the stages of combustion in diesel engine.
4. Interpret the factors that affect knocking tendency in a petrol engine.
5. How can we estimate frictional power of a multi cylinder engine? Explain.
6. Formulate procedure for estimating the performance of an IC engine.
7. Classify compressors.
8. Exemplify applications of compressors in your day to day life.
Apply
1. Demonstrate working of a 2-wheeler in line with Otto cycle.
2. Show that IC engine is a heat engine.
3. For a particular engine swept volume is 10000 cm3 and clearance volume is 2000 cm3. Predict whether
it is petrol engine or diesel engine.
4. Compression ratios of 2 diesel engines are found to be 18:1 and 20:1, which engine would you select
for better power and why?
5. Apply the basic knowledge of compressors and predict which compressor is best suitable for gas
turbine power plant of 80 MW. Justify your answer.
6. Formulate generalized procedure for estimating performance of a petrol engine.
Analyze
1. Compare ideal and actual valve timing diagram.
2. Differentiate Diesel engine from petrol engine.
3. Criticize knocking in diesel engine.
29 Assignment Test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills pertaining to this Course
67
4. Overhead piston arrangement is widely used nowadays due to its specific advantages. Justify above
statement with appropriate reasoning.
5. What conclusions can you draw by performing Morse test?
6. Contrast advantages of reciprocating compressor and rotary compressor.
Evaluate
1. Choose which engine (petrol or diesel) you would select for better mechanical efficiency.
2. How do you assess performance of a reciprocating compressor?
3. Determine air standard efficiency of a diesel whose compression ratio is 18:1 and cutoff ratio is 1.2.
4. Combustion process of diesel engine is more efficient than petrol engine. Judge the above statement
with critical thinking.
5. Evaluate performance of a Maruti swift desire car (diesel) with reference to fuel properties.
Create
6. Generate valve timing diagram for Honda amaze car (VVTI- Variable valve timing diagram).
7. Relate air standard efficiency and thermal efficiency of a diesel engine.
8. Restate assumptions of air standard cycle with reference to practical approach.
68
16HS405 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS AND FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Apply the knowledge of simple economic analysis in their business decision problems
2. Analyze the implications of various elasticities affects the revenue
3. Apply cost-volume-profit (CVP) analysis in their business decision making
4. Evaluate the key elements of capital budgeting and measure various investment proposals
5. Apply the knowledge to prepare the simple financial statements for measuring performance of business
firm
6. Acquire the knowledge of sources and applications of funds
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO9 PO11
1 3 2 1 - -
2 1 - 3 2 -
3 2 3 1 - -
4 - 3 - 1 2
5 - 2 - 1 3
6 - 2 - 1 3
Unit I
Introduction to Engineering Economics
Economics, Flow in an Economy, Concepts of Engineering Economics, Types of Efficiency, Elementary
Economic Analysis, Material selection for product of Raw materials, Design selection for a product,
Building Material selection, Process planning/Process Modification, Definition of Managerial Economics,
Characteristics and Scope
Demand Analysis
Meaning and determinants of Demand, Law of Demand, exceptions, Supply and law of Supply
Elasticity of Demand
Meaning of Elasticity of demand, Price elasticity, Income elasticity, Cross elasticity and Promotional
elasticity of demand
Demand Forecasting
Meaning –Methods of demand forecasting (survey of buyers‟ Intentions, Delphi method, Collective
opinion, Analysis of Time series and Trend projections, Economic Indicators, Controlled experiments and
Judgmental approach)
Managerial Economics and its relation with other subjects, Factors governing demand forecasting
14+3 Hours
Unit II
Theory of Production
Production Function, Law of variable proportions, Isoquants and Isocosts, Least Cost Combination of
Inputs, MRTS, Law of returns to scale.
Cost Analysis
Cost concepts, Opportunity cost, Fixed Vs Variable costs, explicit costs Vs. Implicit costs, Out of pocket
costs vs. Imputed costs, Break Even Analysis, Determination of Break-Even Point (simple problems),
Managerial Significance and limitations of BEP analysis
Cobb-Douglas Production function, Economies and Diseconomies of Scale
8+5 Hours
Unit III
Market Structures and Pricing Policies
Types of competitions, features, Price-Output determination under perfect competition, Monopoly,
Monopolistic competition
Capital and Capital Budgeting
Significance of Capital, Types of Capital, Fixed Capital and Working Capital, Capital budgeting
decisions, Methods of Capital Budgeting: Payback Method, Accounting Rate of Return (ARR), Internal
Rate of Return (IRR) and Net Present Value Method (simple problems)
Prince output determination on Oligopoly, Methods of Pricing
9+4 Hours
69
Unit IV
Introduction to Financial Accounting
Introduction to Double-entry system, Journal, Ledger, Trial-Balance, Final Accounts (with simple
adjustments)
Interpretation and analysis of Financial Statements
Ratio Analysis, Liquidity ratios, Profitability ratios and solvency ratios, Preparation of changes in
working capital statement and fund flow statement (with simple problems)
Accounting concepts and conventions, importance of accounting, limitations of ratio analysis
13+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Aryasri & Ramana Murthy, Engineering Economics and Financial Accounting (ASCENT Series),
McGraw Hill, 1st Edition, 2004
2. N. Appa Rao. & P. Vijaya Kumar, Managerial Economics and Financial Analysis, Cengage
Publications, New Delhi, 1st Edition, 2012
3. R. Aryasri, Managerial Economics and Financial Analysis, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 3rd Edition,
2014
Reference (s)
1. R.L. Varshney & K. L. Maheswari, Managerial Economics, Sultan Chand & Sons, 19 th Edition, 2009
2. Suma damodaran, Managerial Economics, Oxford, 2011
3. S N Maheshwari, Sharad K Maheshwari & Suneel K Maheshwari, Financial Accounting, Vikas
Publishing House, 5th Edition, 2015
4. M. Pandey, Financial Management, Vikas Publishing House, 11 th Edition, 2015
5. R. Panneerselavam, Engineering Economics, PHI publications, 2nd Edition, 2011
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 25 25 -
Understand 25 20 -
Apply 10 20 20
Analyze 20 20 30
Evaluate 20 15 50
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Explain nature of demand. What could be the different variations in the nature of demand?
2. What is demand forecasting? Explain different methods of Survey method of demand forecasting.
3. Define markets? Elaborate how differently markets are classified.
4. Why is pricing significant in the context of business? Explain.
5. What do you understand by double entry book keeping? What are its advantages?
Understand
1. “Managerial Economics is the discipline which deals with the application of economic theory to
business management”. Discuss.
2. How do you forecast demand for products and services? Explain method of least squares as a method
of forecasting demand.
3. Classify the different types of market situations and its features.
4. Explain the factors affecting the requirements of working capital.
5. Who are the users of financial statements and for what purpose do they use?
Apply
1. Differentiate extension in demand and increase in demand. Illustrate.
2. Discuss the need of ratio analysis in engineering organization
30
70
3. Construct the break-even chart with assumed data. Explain the significances of Break-even analysis
4. What strategies do you recommend for markets obsessed with stiff competition conditions?
5. Calculate the Net Present Value of small sized project requiring an initial investment of Rs.20, 000/-
and which provides a net cash inflow of Rs.6, 000/- each year for six years. Assuming the cost of
capital to be 10% per annum and there is no scrap value.
Analyze
1. Distinguish between technical efficiency and economic efficiency by giving example.
2. The P/V ratio of Matrix books Ltd., is 40% and the Margin of Safety is 30%. You are required to work
out the BEP and Net Profit, if the sales volume is Rs.14,000/-
3. Compare between monopoly and perfect competition with suitable diagram.
4. List out the components to be consider while estimate the working capital.
5. State the different types of liquidity ratios and turnover ratios and explain their significances.
Evaluate
1. Differentiate between perfect and imperfect markets.
2. A company has two proposals each costing Rs 9 lakhs the details of cash inflows are as follows
Year Project- Project PV factor @ 10%

1 -2
1 300000 600000 1 0.909
2 500000 400000 2 0.826
3 600000 300000 3 0.751
4 200000 200000 4 0.683
The Cost of Capital 10% per year. Which one will you choose under NPV method?
3. Evaluate the importance of balance sheet and prepare the balances sheet showing different accounts.
4. The financial information about ABC company in given below
Items/Year 2012 2013
Sales 600000 430000
Cost of goods sold 570000 325000
Debtors 72000 30000
Inventories 114000 55000
Cash 15000 8000
Other current assets 40000 27000
Current liabilities 160000 110000
5. Compute the current ratio, quick ratio, debt collection period and inventory turnover ratios for the
above two years and comment on the results.
6. A company has current ratio of 3:1 and quick ratio of 1:2. If the working capital is Rs.1,80,000,
calculate current liabilities and stock.
Create
1. State which company is likely to earn greater profits in condition of:
I. Heavy demand for the product.
II. Low demand for the product.
Give your reasons.
2. Monopoly is disappearing from markets. Do you agree with this statement? Do you advocate for
monopoly to continue in market situations?
3. Name the financial institutions available in Indian industry to meet the financial needs. Also outline
the objectives of each of these institutions.
4. Classify the following into personal account, real account and nominal accounts
Furniture account
Commission received account
Creditors account
Land account
Bad debts account
Cash in hand
Purchases account
Wages account
Advertisement account
Rent received account
71
16MA303 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-III

3024
Course Outcomes
1. Utilize numerical techniques to find approximate solutions of non-linear Algebraic equations
2. Understand the concepts of interpolation, extrapolation to estimate the unknown functional values
3. Make use of method of least squares to fit a best curve for the given data
4. Find approximate values of derivatives and finite integrals using numerical techniques
5. Understand basic probability axioms and apply Baye‟s theorem related to engineering problems
6. Identify the suitable distribution among Binomial, Poisson, normal to compute probabilities
COs–POs Mapping
1 3 2 3 2 2
2 3 2 3 2 2
3 3 3 2 3 3
4 3 3 2 3 3
5 3 2 3 2 2
6 3 3 3 3 3
Unit I
Solution of Algebraic and Transcendental Equations
Introduction, Bisection Method, Method of False Position, Newton-Raphson Method
Curve fitting: Fitting a straight line, Second degree curve, exponential curve, power curve by method of
least squares
Geometrical interpretation of Bisection Method, Method of False Position, Newton-Raphson Method
Practical components
1. The Bisection method
2. Newton-Raphson Method
3. Linear Regression (Fitting of a straight line)
11+10 Hours
Unit II
Interpolation, Numerical Integration and Numerical solution of Ordinary differential equations
Introduction, Finite differences, Newton‟s- forward Differences, Backward differences, Symbolic
relations. Numerical Integration: Trapezoidal rule, Simpson‟s 1/3 Rule
Numerical Solution of Ordinary Differential equations: Solution by Taylor‟s series. Euler‟s, Modified
Euler‟s Method, Runge-Kutta Method
Predictor-Corrector Method-Milne’s Method
1. Trapezoidal rule
2. Simpson‟s 1/3 Rule
3. Solution of Initial Value Problem using Taylor‟s series method
4. Solution of Initial Value Problem using Runge-Kutta Method of order four
12+10 Hours
Unit III
Probability and Random variable
Probability, The axioms of probability, Conditional probability, Baye‟s theorem
Random variables, Discrete and continuous Distributions and properties, Mathematical expectation,
MGFs
Addition, Multiplication theorems of probability
1. Baye‟s Rule
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Probability Distributions, Correlation and Regression
72
Binomial, Poisson and Normal distribution – related properties

Correlation, Pearson‟s correlation coefficient and Spearman‟s Rank correlation coefficient, linear
Regression (construction of Regression lines)
Correlation of grouped data, curvilinear regression
1. Normal Distribution
2. Correlation related problems
11+6 Hours
Total: 45+30 Hours
Textbook (s):
1. S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, 42 nd Edition, New Delhi, 2012
2. B.V. Ramana, Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th Edition, 2009
3. Engineering Mathematics-III lab manual-Mathematics Department (BS&H)-GMRIT, Rajam
4. Steven C.Chapra, Applied Numerical Methods with MATLAB, McGraw Hill Publications, 3 rd
Edition, 2012
Reference (s):
1. T.K.V Iyengaret. al, Mathematical Methods, S.Chand Co., 2nd Edition, New Delhi, 2006
2. T.K.V Iyengaret. al, Probability and Statistics, S.Chand Co., New Delhi, 2012
3. Ervin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., 9 th Edition 2012
4. S.S. Sastry, Introductory methods of Numerical Analysis, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 4 th
Edition, 2006
5. Wan Y.Yang, Wenwu Cao, Tae-Chang Chung and John Morris, Applied Numerical Methods using
MATLAB, Wiley Publications, 2 nd Edition, 2005
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 25 25
Understand 45 45
Apply 30 30
Analyze - -
Evaluate - -
Create - -
Total (%) 100 100
Remember
1. List out the different methods to solve Algebraic and Transcendental Equations.
2. List out the different methods for interpolation.
3. Define axioms of probability.
4. Write the importance of Normal distribution.
5. Define Moment Generating function.
Understand
1. Explain the procedure involved in Newton‟s forward and backward interpolation formulas to
interpolate the data.
2. Describe mathematical principle involved in Trapezoidal rule and Simpson‟s 1/3 Rule.
3. Illustrate the difference between discrete and continuous distributions.
4. Compare Binomial, Poisson, Normal distributions.
Apply
1. Apply Newton‟s iterative method find the real root of the equation 3x = cosx + 1
2. A solid of revolution is formed by rotating about the x-axis, the area between the x-axis, the lines x = 0
and x = 1 and a curve through the points with the following co-ordinates.
x 0.00 0.25 0.5 0.75 1

y 1.0 0.9896 0.9589 0.9589 0.8415
73
Estimate the volume of the solid formed using Simpson‟s rule.

3. If three cars are drawn from a lot of 6 cars containing 2 defective cars, find (i) the probability
distribution of the number of defective cars, (ii) the expected number of defective cars.
4. Two machines A, B produces 60% and 40% of items from the total output. 6% and 8% are the
defective items produced by machines A and B respectively. An item is chosen from the total output
and found to be defective. Find the probability that the defective item is produced by machine A.
5. Write a MATLAB program for method of false position.
6. Write a MATLAB program for fitting a second-degree curve.
74
16ME402 KINEMATICS OF MACHINERY

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Summarize the inversions of a mechanism
2. Demonstrate the importance of straight motion mechanisms
3. Find velocity and acceleration of simple mechanisms using graphical method
4. Summarize the importance of steering gears and Hooke‟s joint
5. Develop the profile of a cam for a given follower motion
6. Analyze kinematics of gears and gear trains
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO3
1 3 2 1
2 3 2 1
3 3 3 2
4 3 - -
5 3 2 2
6 3 3 1
Unit I
Simple mechanisms-Straight line motion mechanisms
Element or Link, Types of links, Rigid Link, flexible and fluid link, Types of kinematic pairs, sliding,
turning, rolling, screw and spherical pairs, lower and higher pairs, closed and open pairs, Constrained
motion, completely, partially or successfully constrained and incompletely constrained, Kinematic chain,
Inversion, Mechanism, Machine, Types of kinematic chains, four bar or quadric cycle chain, single
slider crank chain, Double slider crank chain and their inversions. Exact and approximate copiers and
generated types, Peaucellier, Hart and Scott Russel, Grasshopper, Watt T. Chebicheff and Robert
Mechanisms and straight line motion
Pantograph.
12+3 Hours
Unit II
Velocity Analysis in mechanisms-Acceleration Analysis in mechanisms
Introduction, Absolute and relative motions, Vectors, Additional and subtraction of vectors, Motion of a
link, Four-link mechanism, Velocity images and Angular velocity of links, Velocity of rubbing, Slider-
crank mechanism, Crank and slotted lever mechanism. Introduction; Acceleration, Four-link mechanism
Acceleration of intermediate and offset points, Slider-crank mechanism, Coriolis acceleration component
Crank and slotted lever mechanism
12+3 Hours
Unit III
Steering mechanisms-Cams
Conditions for correct steering, Davis Steering gear, Ackerman‟s steering gear, velocity ratio, Hooke‟s
joint: Single and double Hooke‟s joint, problems. Classification of followers and cams, terms used in
radial cams, displacement, velocity and acceleration diagrams when the follower moves with uniform
velocity, uniform acceleration and retardation, simple harmonic motion, construction of cam profiles
Universal coupling – application
10+5 Hours
Unit IV
Gears- Gear trains
Higher pairs, friction wheels and toothed gears, types, law of gearing, condition for constant velocity ratio
for transmission of motion, Form of teeth, cycloidal and involute profiles. Velocity of sliding, phenomena
of interferences, Methods of interference, Condition for minimum number of teeth to avoid interference,
path of contact, Introduction, Train value, Types - Simple and reverted wheel train, Epicyclic gear Train,
Methods of finding train value or velocity ratio, Epicyclic gear trains
Expressions for arc of contact
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
75
Textbook (s)
1. S.S. Rattan, Theory of Machines and Mechanisms, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishers, 3rd Edition, 2009
2. R.S Khurmi and J.K Gupta, Theory of Machines, S. Chand, 14th Edition, 2014
Reference (s)
1. T Bevan, Theory of Machines, CBS Publishers, 3 rd edition, 2010
2. JS Rao and RV Dukkipati, Mechanism and Machine Theory, New Age, 2008
3. Shigley, Theory of Machines, Oxford University Press, 3 rd edition, 2010
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
31
Remember 25 25 -
Understand 35 25 -
Apply 20 25 50
Analyze 20 25 30
Evaluate - - 20
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. State the Grubler‟s criterion.
2. Define link.
3. Define constrained motion.
4. What do you mean by velocity of rubbing?
5. List any two steering gear mechanisms.
6. Write the various methods of finding the velocity ratio in gear trains.
Understand
1. Explain different types of constrained motions.
2. How do you find that the chain is kinematic chain or not?
3. Derive Coriolis acceleration component.
4. Formulate an expression for condition for correct steering.
5. Differentiate cycloidal and involute profiles.
Apply
1. In a crank and slotted lever quick return mechanism, the distance between the fixed centers is 150mm
and the driving crank is 75 mm long. Determine the ratio of the time taken on the cutting and return
strokes.
2. In a four-bar chain ABCD, AD is fixed and is 150 mm long. The crank AB is 40 mm long and rotates
at 120 r.p.m. clockwise, while the link CD = 80 mm oscillates about D. BC and AD are of equal length.
Find the angular velocity of link CD when angle BAD = 60°.
3. A cam is to give the following motion to a knife-edged follower:
4. 1. Outstroke during 60° of cam rotation; 2. Dwell for the next 30° of cam rotation ;3. Return stroke
during next 60° of cam rotation, and 4. Dwell for the remaining 210° of cam rotation. The stroke of the
follower is 40 mm and the minimum radius of the cam is 50 mm. The follower moves with uniform
velocity during both the outstroke and return strokes. Draw the pro-file of the cam when (a) the axis of
the follower passes through the axis of the cam shaft, and (b) the axis of the follower is offset by 20
mm from the axis of the cam shaft.
5. Two parallel shafts, about 600 mm apart are to be connected by spur gears. One shaft is to run at 360
r.p.m. and the other at120 r.p.m. Design the gears, if the circular pitch is to be 25 mm?
Analyze
1. How flexible link different from rigid link?
2. Show the importance of pantograph.
3. Compare Davis Steering gear, Ackerman‟s steering gear.
4. Justify, construction of cam profiles depends on follower motion.
5. Show that how to avoid interference in gears.
31
76
Evaluate
1. In a crank and slotted lever quick return motion mechanism, the distance between the fixed centres O
and C is 200 mm. The driving crank CP is 75 mm long. The pin Q on the slotted lever, 360 mm from
the fulcrum O, is connected by a link QR100 mm long, to a pin R on the ram. The line of stroke of R is
perpendicular to OC and intersects OC produced at a point 150 mm from C. Determine the ratio of
times taken on the cutting and return strokes.
2. How do you assess velocity of ram in crank and slotted lever mechanism?
3. How do you assess the length of path of contact is important to avoid interference?
4. How do you assess the length of arc of contact is important to avoid interference?
Create
1. Develop the working model of four bar chain mechanism with wood.
2. In a crank and slotted lever quick return motion mechanism, the distance between the fixed centres is
240 mm and the length of the driving crank is 120 mm. Find the inclination of the slotted bar with the
vertical in the extreme position and the time ratio of cutting stroke to the return stroke. If the length of
the slotted bar is 450 mm, Estimate the length of the stroke if the line of stroke passes through the
extreme positions of the free end of the lever.
3. Discuss the Location of all the instantaneous centres for a four bar mechanism with the lengths of
various links are: AD= 125 mm ; AB= 62.5 mm ; BC= CD= 75 mm. If the link AB rotates at a uniform
speed of 10 r.p.m. in the clockwise direction, find the angular velocity of the links BC and CD. Also,
angle between AB and Ad is 600.
Two parallel shafts are to be connected by spur gearing. The approximate distance between the shafts is
600 mm. If one shaft runs at 120 r.p.m. and the other at 360 r.p.m., find the number of teeth on each
Wheel, if the module is 8 mm. Also estimate the exact distance apart of the shafts.
77
16ME403 MECHANICS OF SOLIDS

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Find the stress and strain of composite bars
2. Find the shear force and bending moment in a beam
3. Analyze flexural and shear stresses in a beam
4. Solve principal stresses and torsional stresses for simple engineering problems
5. Find the deflection of a beam
6. Analyze the stresses and strains in thin and thick cylinders
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO3
1 3 2 2
2 3 2 2
3 3 3 2
4 3 2 2
5 3 2 2
6 3 3 2
Unit I
Simple stresses & strains-Shear force and bending moment
Elasticity and plasticity, Types of stresses & strains, Hooke‟s law, stress - strain diagram for mild steel,
Working stress, Factor of safety, Lateral strain, Poisson‟s ratio &volumetric strain, Elastic moduli &the
relationship between them, Bars of varying section, composite bars, Thermal stresses. Definition of
beam, Types of beams, Concept of shear force and bending moment, S.F and B.M diagrams for
cantilever, simply supported and overhanging beams subjected to point loads, distributed load
Moment or couple and combination of loads
12+3 Hours
Unit II
Flexural stresses in Beams-Shear stresses in Beams
Theory of simple bending, Assumptions, Derivation of bending equation, Neutral axis, Determination
bending stresses, section modulus of rectangular and circular sections (Solid and Hollow), I, T, Angle
and Channel sections, Design of simple beam sections Derivation of formula, Shear stress distribution
across various beams sections like rectangular, circular, triangular, I, T angle
Shear stress distribution across various beams sections like channel sections
12+3 Hours
Unit III
Principal stresses-Torsion- Deflection of beams
Transformation of plane stress into normal and shear stresses on inclined plane, principal planes, Mohr‟s
circle, Maximum shearing stress. Torsional Stresses in Shafts, Analysis of torsional stresses, Power
transmitted, combined bending and torsion. Bending into a circular arc, slope, deflection and radius of
curvature, Differential equation for the elastic line of a beam, Double integration method, Determination
of slope and deflection for cantilever and simply supported beams subjected to point loads, U.D.L un iformly
varying load, Mohr‟s theorems and application to simple cases
Moment area method
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Thin cylinders-Thick cylinders
Thin seamless cylindrical shells, Derivation of formula for longitudinal and circumferential stresses, hoop,
longitudinal and Volumetric strains, changes in diameter, and volume of thin cylinders, Riveted boiler shells,
Thin spherical shells. Lame‟s equations, cylinders subjected to inside & outside pressures
Compound cylinders
10+5 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. S.S Bhavikatti, Strength of materials, Lakshmi publications, 4 th Edition, 2013
78
2. Popov, Solid Mechanics, PHI Learning, 2 nd Edition, 2009

Reference (s)
1. Jindal, Strength of Materials, Asian Books Private Limited, 1st Edition, 2007
2. Vazirani and Ratwani, Analysis of structures, Khanna Publisher, 18 th Edition, 2012
3. S. Timshenko, Strength of Materials, Krieger (Robert E.) Publishing Co Inc., US, 3rd Edition, 1983
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
32
Remember 25 15 -
Understand 35 15 -
Apply 20 35 50
Analyze 20 35 40
Evaluate - - 10
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define the terms: Elasticity, elastic limit, Young‟s modulus and modulus of rigidity.
2. Define the terms: Longitudinal strain, Lateral strain and poisons ratio.
3. What do you understand by neutral axis, section modulus and moment of resistance?
4. What is Torsion? What are the assumptions made in the Derivation of shear stress produced in a
circular shaft subjected to Torsion?
5. Define thin cylinders. Name the stresses set up in a thin cylinder subjected to internal fluid pressure.
6. Find an expression for the change in volume of a thin cylindrical shell subjected to internal fluid
pressure.
Understand
1. Explain clearly the different types of stresses and strains.
2. Explain the different types of equilibrium equations.
3. Show that for a rectangular section of the maximum shear stress is 1.5 times the average stress.
4. Explain Macaulay‟s method.
5. Explain thin and thick cylinders.
Apply
1. A rod 200cm long and of diameter 3.0cm is subjected to an axial pull of 30 kN. If the Young‟s
modulus of the material of the rod is 2×104 N/mm2, determine: (i) stress. (ii) Strain and (iii) the
elongation of the rod.
2. A simply supported beam of 10m long carries a uniformly distributed load 2 kN/m over entire length
and point loads 1kN and 2kN at distances 2m and 5m from the left support. Draw the shear force and
bending moment diagrams.
3. A cast Iron beam has an I- section with top flange 80mm×40mm, web120mm×20mm and bottom
flange 160mm×40mm. If tensile stress is not to exceed 30 N/mm2 and compressive stress 90N/mm 2,
what is the maximum uniformly distributed load the beam can carry over a simply supported span of
6m if the larger flange is in tension.
4. Develop an expression for the slope and deflection of a beam subjected to uniform bending moment.
5. A thick cylinder of external and internal diameters of 300mm and 180mm is subjected to an internal
pressure of 42 N/mm2 and external pressure 6 N/mm2. Determine the stresses in the material. If the
external pressure is doubled, what internal pressure can be maintained without exceeding the
previously determined maximum stress?
Analyze
1. Distinguish between the following, giving due explanation
2. (i) Stress arid strain(ii) Force and stress and (iii) Tensile stress and compressive stress.
3. Compare the weights of the two shafts if the maximum shear stress developed in the two shafts is
equal. A solid circular shaft and a hollow circular shaft whose inside diameter is 3/4 of the outside
diameter, are of the same material, of equal lengths and are required to transmit a given torque.
4. Compare slope and deflection of a simply supported beam and cantilever beam.
32
79
5. Compare circumferential and longitudinal strains.

Evaluate
1. Determine (i) the stress in the rod and tube, and (ii) load carried by each bar. A steel rod of 2 cm
diameter is enclosed centrally in a hollow copper tube of external diameter 4cm and internal diameter
of 3.5 cm. The composite bar is than subjected to an axial pull of 50000 N. If the length of each bar is
equal to 20 cm, Take E for steel =2 x 105 N/mm2 and for copper = 1× 105 N/mm2.
2. Compare the difference between simply supported beam, cantilever beam and continuous beam.
3. Prove that the bending stress in any fibre is proportional to the distance of that fibre from neutral layer
in a beam.
4. Prove that the deflection at the centre of a simply supported beam, carrying a point load at the centre.
5. Prove that volumetric strain in case of a thin cylinder subjected to internal fluid pressure is equal to two
times the circumferential strain plus longitudinal strain.
Create
1. Develop an expression for the major and minor principal stresses on an oblique plane, when the body is
subjected to direct stresses in two mutually perpendicular directions accompanied by a shear stress.
2. Construct the shear force and bending moment diagrams and also determine the points of contra flexure
for the beam of 8.5m long rests on supports 5m apart. The right end overhang its support by 2m and the
left hand end by 1.5m. The beam carries a U.D.L. of 5kN/m between the supports only. The beam also
carries a point load of 6 kN at the extreme right end and point load of 4 kN at the left end.
3. A rectangular block of material is subjected to a tensile stress of 110 N/mm 2 on one plane and a tensile
stress of 47 N/mm2 on the plane at right angles to the former. Each of the above stresses is
accompanied by a shear stress of 63 N/mm2. Find the direction and magnitude of each of the principal
stresses and the magnitude of the greatest shear stress.
4. Solve the Slope and Deflection of a cantilever beam carrying uniformly distributed load over the whole
length, by using Double integrating method.
5. A cylindrical vessel, whose ends are closed by means of rigid flange plates, is made of steel plate 3mm
thick. The length and inner diameter of the vessel are 50cm and 25cm respectively. Determine the
longitudinal and hoop stresses in the cylindrical shell due to an internal fluid pressure of 3 N/mm2.
Also calculate the increase in length, diameter and Volume of the vessel. Take E=2×105 N/mm2 and
μ=0.3.
80
16ME404 MANUFACTURING PROCESSES

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Interpret proper moulds and design of a gating system for a given application
2. Select proper melting furnace for a given material
3. Identify the appropriate welding technique for a given joint
4. Distinguish the process details of soldering, brazing and welding
5. Demonstrate the characteristics of cold/warm/hot working process
6. Select proper tooling for forging, forming, bending and processing of plastics
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4
1 3 2 1 1
2 - 3 2 1
3 - 3 3 1
4 3 2 2 -
5 3 2 2 1
6 3 2 2 2
Unit I
Casting Process-Methods of Melting
Basic casting process and its characteristics, Patterns and Pattern making, pattern allowances and their
application, Principles and design of Gating systems, Special moulding methods and processes-Co2 & Shell
moulding processes and machine moulding. Crucible melting and cupola operation, steel making
processes, special, Solidification of casting, Introduction, Solidification of pure metal and alloys, short &
long freezing range alloys, Principles and design of risering system
Special casting processes: Centrifugal, Die and Investment. Casting processes
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Welding Process-Special welding and joining processes
Classification of welding processes, Types of welded joints and their characteristics, Welding processes:
Gas welding and cutting, ARC welding, Resistance welding, Thermit welding and Plasma welding
processes and their characteristics. Friction welding, Induction welding, Explosive welding, Laser
welding, Soldering & Brazing. Heat affected zones in welding, Welding defects- causes and remedies
Destructive non-destructive testing of welds
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Mechanical working of metals-Extrusion of metals
Hot and cold working Processes, characteristics, Recovery, recrystallization and grain growth analysis,
Theory of rolling, Fundamentals, types of Rolling mills and products. Analysis of rolling process and
estimation of power requirement, Basic extrusion process and its characteristics, Analysis of extrusion
process and estimation of power requirement, forging processes: Types Forging, Forging hammers,
forging defect
Analysis of forging process and estimation of power requirement
11+3 Hours
Unit IV
Press working of metals-Processing of plastics
Press working operations and their characteristics, Drawing processes and its force analysis, Hot and cold
spinning, Types of presses, Plastics Processing methods & Equipment (blow &injection moulding),
Introduction to powder metallurgy
Introduction to Rapid Prototyping
Fundamentals of Rapid prototyping Technologies, Stereo lithography, Selective Laser Sintering,
Laminated Object Manufacturing, Fused Deposition Modelling,3D Printing, Laser Engineering Net
Shaping
Electrode deposition techniques
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
81
Textbook (s)
1. S Kalpakjian, S R. Schmid, Manufacturing- Engineering and Technology, Pearson publications, 4 th
Edition, 2013
2. P.N. Rao, Manufacturing Technology – Foundry, Forming and Welding, McGraw Hill Companies,
Volume 1, 3rd Edition, 2013
3. CK Chua, K F Leong and C S Lim, Rapid prototyping, principles and Applications, Cambridge
university press (India) Pvt. Ltd., 3 rd Edition, 2010
Reference (s)
1. O.P. Khanna, Welding Technology, Dhanpat Rai Publications, 22nd Edition, 2008
2. Amitabha Ghosh, and Ashok Kumar Mallik, Manufacturing Science, East West Press Private Ltd.,
2nd Edition, 2010
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
33
Remember 35 30 -
Understand 35 25 -
Apply 20 25 40
Analyze 10 20 40
Evaluate - - 20
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. List any three types of patterns.
2. Recall the classification of welding processes.
3. Name any two types of mechanical working of metals.
4. List any four press working operations.
Understand
1. Compare blow & injection moulding processes.
2. Explain sand mould making procedure with support of neat diagram.
3. Illustrate recrystallization and grain growth analysis.
4. Outline the Arc welding process with neat diagram.
Apply
1. Choose a processing technique from a) Blow moulding, b) Injection moulding, c) Arc welding, d) Gas
welding to manufacture the object depicted below.
2. Construct a mind map depicting all the basic casting process and special casting process.
3. Develop a schematic diagram that shows the basic extrusion process.
4. Identify the welding process used in below picture.
33
82
Analyze
1. How a hot chamber die-casting differs from cold chamber die-casting?
2. How a runner extension is helpful for good casting quality?
3. Enunciate the factors based on which the type of fabrication method is chosen for a given application.
4. Compare drop forging and press forging processes with reference to the process and products obtained.
Evaluate
1. Explain the method of determining the moisture content in molding sand.
2. How is arc cutting different from oxy-fuel cutting process?
3. Compare the different regions of Oxy-acetylene flames with the help of neat sketches and its
Characteristics.
4. Choose a suitable method to produce small size castings with high dimensional accuracy in large
volumes.
5. Estimate the maximum force required for extruding a cylindrical aluminium billet of 50 mm diameter
and 75mm length to a final diameter of 10mm. The average tensile yield stress for aluminium is 170
N/mm2.
Create
1. Enumerate the various types of commonly used patterns and mention its applications.
2. Imagine that you have chocolates in different hollow shapes. What process do you choose these to
make these candies?
3. You are familiar with the arc welding with coated electrodes. From the point of ease of operation, this
method is said to be more convenient than the tungsten inert gas welding process. Comment giving the
reasons.
4. Discuss on the processing of plastics and their applications.
5. Discuss plastic processing methods and their specific advantages.
83
16ME405 MECHANICS OF SOLIDS LAB

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Estimate compressive strength of wood/Concrete/Brick materials
2. Predict the suitability of wood, steel and concrete in construction works
3. Find the impact resistance of steel used in construction works
4. Estimate young‟s modulus of wood/steel materials
5. Determine the stiffness and rigidity modulus of spring
6. Perform mechanical testing on various engineering materials
COs – POs Mapping
1 3 3 2 2
2 3 3 2 2
3 3 3 2 2
4 3 2 2 2
5 3 2 2 2
6 3 2 2 3
List of Experiments
1. Tension test
2. Bending test on (Steel/ Wood) Cantilever beam
3. Bending test on simple support beam
4. Torsion Test
5. Hardness Test
6. Spring Test
7. Compression test on wood / concrete/Brick
8. Impact Test
9. Shear Test
10. Verification of Maxwell‟s Reciprocal theorem on beams
11. Use of electrical resistance strain gauges
12. Continuous beam – deflection Test
1. To determine tensile, compressive, bending, shear and fatigue strength of following materials
(a) Cast iron
(b) En-8
(c) Die steel
(d) Copper
2. Design and fabricate a helical spring of given dimensions using a suitable material and find the rigidity
modulus of the spring wire.
3. Design and fabricate a cantilever beam using a suitable material for the following cross-sections and
determine its deflection.
(a) Hollow circular
(b) Box
4. Design and fabricate a simply supported beam using a suitable material for the following cross-sections
and determine its deflection.
(a) Hollow circular
(b) Box
5. Mechanical characterization of non-ferrous dissimilar welded joints.
6. Mechanical characterization of Ferrous dissimilar welded joints.
7. Draw stress Vs strain diagram for heat treated steels.
1. Mechanics of Solids lab manual, Department of Civil engineering, GMRIT, Rajam
34
84
16ME406 MANUFACTURING PROCESSES LAB

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Identify the use of various tools used in the Foundry, welding and metal forming processes
2. Develop moulds of simple objects and understand role played by various elements of moulds such as
cope, drag, riser etc.,
3. Explain various operations for Arc welding so as to produce Lap and T-joints etc.,
4. Illustrate the various gas welding operations and other processes such as spot welding etc.,
5. Apply die design and manufacturing for forming operations
6. Design and fabricate a simple product
COs – POs Mapping
1 3 2 - 2 -
2 3 2 - 2 2
3 3 2 - 2 -
4 3 2 2 2 -
5 3 3 3 2 2
6 3 2 3 2 3
List of Experiments
I Foundry
1. Design and making of a required pattern for the preparation of a mould cavity.
2. Preparation of a mould cavity for a straight pipe.
3. Design and making of a required pattern for the preparation of a mould cavity.
4. Testing of Flowability property of Moulding sand using Flowability meter.
5. Testing of Hardness property of Moulding sand using Mould hardness tester.
II Welding
1. Preparation of a Lap joint in downward direction using Arc Welding setup
2. Preparation of a T-joint in downward direction using Arc welding setup.
3. Preparation of a weld joint using spot welding setup.
4. Strength test of a weld joint on a universal testing machine.
III Mechanical press working
1. Preparation a washer of given dimensions using blanking and piercing operations with progressive
dies.
IV Processing of plastics
1. Preparation of an elbow pipe using Injection Moulding equipment
2. Study of Blow Moulding machine
3. Fabricate split patterns for gear casting process. And also cast the gear
4. Fabricate an automobile frame using different welding techniques
5. Weld two dissimilar metals and study the mechanical properties
6. Create a 3D models (using auto cad) and fabricate the following components using wood. (i) Cone (ii)
Prism (iii) Pyramid (pentagonal and hexagonal)
7. Welding of two dissimilar metals with and without magnetic field and study the mechanical properties
8. Design and fabricate wooden box (patterns) for making paraffin apple
9. Create a prototype model which explains about investment casting process using paraffin patterns
10. Fabrication of a mini cupola furnace
11. Fabrication of a mini hand operated sand Muller (mixture)for the preparation of moulding sand
12. Theoretical study and analysis of the force required in shearing operations like punching and blanking
13. Fabrication of adjustable metallic cupboard
14. Preparation of machine able wax
35
85

1. Production Technology lab manual, Department of Mechanical Engineering, GMRIT, Rajam
86
16ME407 THERMAL ENGINEERING LAB

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Interpret valve timing diagram of IC engine
2. Find air fuel ratio and volumetric efficiency of CI engine
3. Evaluate the performance of IC Engines and vapor compression refrigeration system.
4. Estimate the efficiency of reciprocating air compressor
5. Study the various parameters of boilers
6. Analyze and fabricate simple thermal systems.
COs – POs Mapping
1 3 2 2 - -
2 3 2 2 2 -
3 3 2 2 2 2
4 3 2 2 - -
5 3 3 2 2 1
6 3 2 2 3 3
List of Experiments
1. I.C. Engines valve diagrams
2. Performance test on 4 - Stroke slow speed diesel engine
3. Performance test on VCR engine
4. I.C. Engines heat balance.
5. Air fuel ratio and volumetric efficiency of IC engine
6. Measure quality of steam by using throttling and separating calorimeter.
7. Performance test on reciprocating air compressor Unit
8. COP of Refrigeration Unit
9. Performance on 4 - Stroke high speed diesel engine
10. Study of boiler
11. Morse test on multi cylinder Engine
12. Dis-assembly / assembly of engines.
List of Augmented Mini Projects36
1. An experimental study on the yielding of two different bio diesel
2. Fabrication of a demonstration model of fuel pump
3. A comparative experimental study on the viscosity of two different biodiesel at different temperatures
4. Fabrication of a cut section model of fuel injector
5. Fabrication of battery ignition system
6. An assembled model of hermetically sealed compressor used in vapor compression system
7. Construction of Thermoelectric generator.
8. Construction of Portable wind mill for cell phone charging
9. A comparative experimental study on the fire and flash points of two different biodiesel.
10. Experimental investigations on stirring time on the properties of bio diesel blends
11. Experimental study on the lift and drag forces of a selected object using wind mill
12. Fabrication of demonstrative model of solar water purifier
13. Preparation of PVT surface with wood or thermo-coal
14. Fabrication of vacuum pump from cycle pump
15. A poster presentation on the automobile chassis with all mountings
Reading Materials (s)
1. Thermal Engineering manual, GMR institute of technology, Rajam
2. V. Ganesan, Internal Combustion Engines, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th Edition, 2012
3. V P Vasandan & D S Kumar, Heat engineering, MPSSB Co. Ltd, 3rd Edition, 2008
36
87
16ME501 ELEMENTS OF MACHINE DESIGN

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain the design procedure and selection of materials for specific application
2. Analyse the component subjected to static loads based on strength and stiffness criteria
3. Design a component based on strength when it is subjected to variable load
4. Evaluate riveted, welded and bolted joints
5. Design transmission shafts, keys and shaft coupling
6. Interpret theory of columns
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO3
1 3 2 1
2 3 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 3 2 2
5 3 3 3
6 3 2 1
Unit I
Introduction- Design for Static Load & Design for Fatigue Load
Design process, Types of machine design, General considerations in machine design, Engineering
Materials –Selection, BIS system of designation of steels. Combined stresses - torsional and bending stresses
- Various theories of failure - Design for strength and rigidity - preferred numbers in design. Stress
concentration - Theoretical Stress Concentration factor - Fatigue stress concentration factor, notch sensitivity,
Endurance limit, Estimation of Endurance strength. Design for finite and infinite life. Design for fluctuating
stresses – Goodman‟s line, Soderberg‟s line.
Modified Goodman’s line
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Riveted and welded joints- Bolted joints
Design of riveted, welded and bolted joints with initial stresses and eccentric loading. Design of bolts with pre-
stresses.
Design of bolted joints under eccentric loading.
12+3 Hours
Unit III
Shafts- Theory of columns
Design of solid and hollow shafts for strength and rigidity - Design of shafts for combined bending and
axial loads - Shaft sizes – Failure of a column or a strut, types of end conditions of column, Euler‟s column
theory- Assumptions, Euler‟s formula- slenderness ratio- limitations, equivalent length of a column, Rankine‟s
formula for column, Johnson‟s formula for columns, long columns subjected to eccentric loading.
Design of shafts subjected to axial loads in addition to combined bending and twisting
12+3 Hours
Unit IV
Keys, Shaft Couplings and Cotter Joints
Design of Keys-stresses in keys. Shaft couplings-Muff, Split Muff, Flange and bushed pin type flexible
coupling. Cotter Joints- Socket and spigot, Sleeve and cotter and Gib and cotter joint. Knuckle joint.
Gib and cotter joint for square rods
10+5 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. V. B. Bhandari, Design of Machine Elements, TMH Publishers, 3 rd Edition, 2010.
2. S MD Jalaludin, Design Data hand Book, Anuradha Publishers, 2nd Edition, 2014
88
Reference (s)
1. Norton R. L., Machine Design – An Integrated Approach, Pearson, 3rd Edition, 2004.
2. Shigley J.E. & Mischkie C.R., Mechanical Engineering Design, TMH publishers, 3 rd Edition, 2005.
3. N. C. Pandya & C. S. Shah, Machine Design, Charotar publishing house Pvt. Ltd., 17 th Edition,
2009.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 25 25 -
Understand 35 35 -
Apply 40 40 40
Analyze - - 40
Evaluate - - 20
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. What are the various types of designs?
2. Define factor of safety.
3. Distinguish clearly between direct stress and bending stress.
4. What do you understand by the term riveted joint?
5. Define the following terms
6. Major diameter, (b) Minor diameter, (c) Pitch, and (d) Lead.
7. Define the term „key‟ and state it‟s functions.
Understand
1. Explain Rankine‟s and Guest‟s theories of failure.
2. Explain Notch sensitivity and fatigue stress concentration factor.
3. Explain various terms used in riveted joints.
4. List various types of screw threads and discuss them with neat sketches and state their applications.
5. Explain the function of a key and a keyway? Classify the keys and discuss them in brief.
6. Explain the design procedure of a socket and spigot type cottered joint.
Apply
1. The load on a bolt consists of an axial pull of 10 kN together with a transverse shear force of 5 kN.
Find the diameter of bolt required according to 1. Maximum principal stress theory; 2. Maximum shear
stress theory; 3. Maximum principal strain theory; 4. Maximum strain energy theory; and 5. Maximum
distortion energy theory.
2. A plate 100 mm wide and 12.5 mm thick is to be welded to another plate by means of parallel fillet
welds. The plates are subjected to a load of 50 kN. Find the length of the weld so that the maximum
stress does not exceed 56 MPa. Consider the joint first under static loading and then under fatigue
loading.
3. A machine component is subjected to a flexural stress which fluctuates between + 300 MN/m2 and –
150 MN/m2. Determine the value of minimum ultimate strength according to 1. Gerber relation; 2.
Soderberg relation. Take yield strength = 0.55 Ultimate strength; Endurance strength = 0.5 Ultimate
strength; and factor of safety = 2.
4. Design and draw a cotter joint to support a load varying from 30 kN in compression to 30 kN in
tension. The material used is carbon steel for which the following allowable stresses may be used. The
load is applied statically. Tensile stress = compressive stress = 50 MPa; shear stress = 35 MPa and
crushing stress = 90 MPa.
5. Design and make a neat dimensioned sketch of a muff coupling which is used to connect two steel
shafts transmitting 40 kW at 350 r.p.m. The material for the shafts and key is plain carbon steel for
which allowable shear and crushing stresses may be taken as 40 MPa and 80 MPa respectively. The
material for the muff is cast iron for which the allowable shear stress may be assumed as 15 MPa.
Analyze
37
Assignment Test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills pertaining to this course
89
1. Hydraulic press exerts a total load of 3.5 MN. This load is carried by two steel rods, supporting the
upper head of the press. If the safe stress is 85 MPa and E = 210 kN/mm2, find: 1. diameter of the rods,
and 2. extension in each rod in a length of 2.5 m. Find the efficiency of the following riveted joints:
Single riveted lap joint of 6 mm plates with 20 mm
Diameter rivets having a pitch of 50 mm
Double riveted lap joint of 6 mm plates with 20 mm
Diameter rivets having a pitch of 65 mm
Assume
Permissible tensile stress in plate = 120 MPa
Permissible shearing stress in rivets = 90 MPa
Permissible crushing stress in rivets = 180 MPa
2. A steam engine cylinder has an effective diameter of 350 mm and the maximum steam pressure acting
on the cylinder cover is 1.25 N/mm2. Calculate the number and size of studs required to fix the
cylinder cover, assuming the permissible stress in the studs as 33 MPa.
3. A pair of wheels of a railway wagon carries a load of 50 kN on each axle box, acting at a distance of
100 mm outside the wheel base. The gauge of the rails is 1.4 m. Find the diameter of the axle between
the wheels, if the stress is not to exceed 100 MPa.
Evaluate
1. Identify key parts in an automobile and give possible failures of components.
2. Identify 10 components with threaded forms and justify the usage of a specific form of thread for that
member.
3. Under what conditions will the temperature rise of the cold fluid in a heat exchanger be equal to the
temperature drop of the hot fluid?
4. A mild steel shaft transmits 20 kW at 200 r.p.m. It carries a central load of 900 N and is simply
supported between the bearings 2.5 metres apart. Determine the size of the shaft, if the allowable shear
stress is 42 MPa and the maximum tensile or compressive stress is not to exceed 56 MPa. What size of
the shaft will be required, if it is subjected to radially applied loads?
5. Design a bushed-pin type of flexible coupling to connect a pump shaft to a motor shaft transmitting 32
kW at 960 r.p.m. The overall torque is 20% more than mean torque. The material properties are as
follows:
6. The allowable shear and crushing stress for shaft and key material is 40 MPa and 80 MPa respectively.
The allowable shear stress for cast iron is 15 MPa. The allowable bearing pressure for rubber bush is
0.8 N/mm2. The material of the pin is same as that of shaft and key and Draw neat sketch of the
coupling.
Create
1. Identify transverse fillet welded lap joint of your choice and determine its strength.
2. Design a socket and spigot cottered joint for your choice of loading and three material types.
3. Identify the members subjected to combined loads and connected by bolted joints and evaluate the
stresses.
90
16ME502 DYNAMICS OF MACHINERY

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Interpret static and dynamic force analysis of simpler planar mechanisms
2. Apply the principle of gyroscope and compute gyroscopic effect for aero planes and ships
3. Make use of the principle of gyroscope and interpret the stability for two wheelers and four wheelers
4. Summarize the working of important machine elements like clutches, brakes, flywheels and governors
5. Examine the balancing of rotating and reciprocating masses
6. Summarize free and forced vibrations
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO3
1 3 2 2
2 3 2 2
3 3 3 2
4 2 3 3
5 3 3 3
6 3 2 2
Unit I
Static and dynamic force analysis-Precession
Static and dynamic force analysis of planar mechanisms- four bar mechanism. Gyroscopes, effect of
precession motion on the stability of moving vehicles such as motor car, motor cycle, aero planes and ships
Analysis of planar mechanism of slider crank mechanism
9+3 Hours
Unit II
Clutches
Friction clutches- single disc or plate clutches and multi disc clutches
Brakes and Dynamometers
Simple block brakes and band brake of vehicles, Absorption and Transmission type dynamometers
Turning moment diagram and fly wheels-Governors
Turning moment - crank effort and turning moment diagrams – fluctuation of energy – fly wheels and their
design. Watt, Porter and Proell governors. Sensitiveness, isochronism and hunting
Spring loaded governors - Hartnell and Hartung with auxiliary springs
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Balancing of rotating masses-Balancing of reciprocating masses
Single and multiple - single and different planes. Primary, Secondary and higher balancing of reciprocating
masses, analytical and graphical methods. Locomotive balancing - Hammer blow, Swaying couple, variation
of tractive efforts. Unbalanced forces and couples - examination of “V” multi cylinder in line engines for
primary and secondary balancing
Unbalanced forces and couples for radial engines for primary and secondary balancing
12+4 Hours
Unit IV
Mechanical vibrations-Torsional vibrations and whirling of shafts
Free Vibration of single DOF system - oscillation of pendulums, centers of oscillation and suspension.
Transverse loads, vibrations of beams with concentrated and distributed loads, Dunkerly‟s methods, Raleigh‟s
method, Simple problems on forced damped vibration, Vibration Isolation & Transmissibility. Torsional
vibrations, two and three rotor systems
Whirling of shafts, critical speed.
12+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. S.S Rattan, Theory of Machines, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited, 4 th Edition, 2014
91
2. Dr. Jagadish Lal, Theory of Mechanisms & Machines, Metropolitan Book Co. (P) Ltd., 1st Edition,
2002.
Reference (s)
1. J S Rao and R V Dukkipati, Mechanism and Machine Theory, New Age International (P) Ltd., 2 nd
Edition, 2006.
2. J J. Uicker, Gordon R. Pennock, J E. Shigley, Theory of Machines and Mechanisms, Oxford University
Press, New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2009.
3. Thomas Bevan, Theory of Machines, CBS Publishers, 3rd Edition 2005.
4. R. S. Khurmi, Theory of Machines, S. Chand, 14 th Edition, 2005
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 25 25 -
Understand 45 45 -
Apply 30 30 60
Analyze - - 40
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define axis of spin
2. Define axis of precision
3. List out the different centrifugal type governors
4. Define critical speed of a shaft
Understand
1. Compare the function of governor and flywheel
2. Classify different types of governors
3. Explain the difference between Porter and Proell governors
4. Demonstrate the working of Hartnell governor
Apply
1. A conical friction clutch is used to transmit 90 kW at 1500 r.p.m. The semi-cone angle is 20º and the
coefficient of friction is 0.2. If the mean diameter of the bearing surface is 375 mm and the intensity of
normal pressure is not to exceed 0.25 N/mm2. Find the dimensions of the conical bearing surface and
the axial load required.
2. The turning moment diagram for a petrol engine is drawn to the following scales: Turning moment, 1
mm= 5 N-m; crank angle, 1 mm= 1°. The turning moment diagram repeats itself at every half
revolution of the engine and the areas above and below the mean turning moment line taken in order
are 295, 685, 40, 340, 960, 270 mm2. The rotating parts are equivalent to a mass of 36 kg at a radius of
gyration of 150 mm. Determine the coefficient of fluctuation of speed when the engine runs at 1800
r.p.m.
3. The turbine rotor of a ship has a mass of 3500 kg. It has a radius of gyration of 0.45 m and a speed of
3000 r.p.m. clockwise when looking from stern. Determine the gyroscopic couple and its effect upon
the ship: 1. when the ship is steering to the left on a curve of 100 m radius at a speed of 36 km/h. 2.
when the ship is pitching in a simple harmonic motion, the bow falling with its maximum velocity. The
period of pitching is 40 seconds and the total angular displacement between the two extreme positions
of pitching is 12 degrees.
4. Four masses m1, m2, m3and m4 are 200 kg, 300 kg, 240 kg and 260 kg respectively. The corresponding
radii of rotation are 0.2 m, 0.15 m, 0.25 m and 0.3 m respectively and the angles between successive
masses are 45°, 75° and 135°. Find the position and magnitude of the balance mass required, if its
radius of rotation is 0.2 m.
5. A single cylinder reciprocating engine has speed 240 r.p.m., stroke 300 mm, mass of reciprocating
parts 50 kg, mass of revolving parts at 150 mm radius 37 kg. If two-third of the reciprocating parts and
all the revolving parts are to be balanced, find: 1. The balance mass required at a radius of 400 mm, and
2. The residual unbalanced force when the crank has rotated 60° from top dead centre
38
92
6. A shaft 50 mm diameter and 3 meters long is simply supported at the ends and carries three loads of
1000 N, 1500 N and 750 N at 1 m, 2 m and 2.5 m from the left support. The Young's modulus for shaft
material is 200 GN/m2. Find the frequency of transverse vibration.
93
16ME503 METAL CUTTING AND MACHINE TOOLS

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain cutting tool geometry; analyze mechanism of chip formation and forces in orthogonal cutting.
2. Explain tool failure and influence of various process parameters on tool life.
3. Illustrate basic parts and operations of machine tools including lathe, shaper, planer, drilling, boring,
milling and grinding machine.
4. Select a machining operation and corresponding machine tool for a specific application in real time.
5. Identify the need of super finishing operations like honing, lapping and broaching.
6. Design locating and clamping devices to produce a component.
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO3
1 3 3 2
2 3 2 2
3 3 1 1
4 3 2 2
5 3 3 3
6 - 3 2
Unit I
Fundamentals of Machining
Elementary treatment of metal cutting theory, elements of cutting process, geometry of single point cutting
tool, tool angles, chip formation and types of chips, built up edge and its effects, chip breakers, Mechanics of
orthogonal cutting, Merchant‟s force diagram, cutting forces, problems.
Chip thickness ratio
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Mechanics of machining
Measurement of forces using dynamometers, Tool tip temperatures, Friction and heat sources in cutting, Effect
of cutting process parameters on tool life, Problems, tool wear, machinability, machinability index, economics
of machining, problems, Cutting fluids.
Cutting tool materials and properties
10+4 Hours
Unit III
Lathe Machines
Engine lathe, principle of working, specification of lathe, types of lathe, work holders tool holders, box tools
taper turning, thread turning for lathes, constructional features of speed gear box and feed gear box. Turret and
capstan lathes, collet chucks, other work holders.
Shaping, Slotting and Planning Machines
Principles of working, principal parts, specifications, operations performed.
Drilling and Boring Machines
Principles of working, specifications, types, operations performed, tool holding devices, twist drill Boring
Machines, jig boring machine.
Machining time calculations on shaping, slotting, planning, drilling and boring machines
14+4 Hours
Unit IV
Milling Machines
Principles of working, specifications, classification, principal features of horizontal, vertical and universal
Milling machines, machining operations, types of cutters, geometry of milling cutters, methods of indexing,
accessories to milling machines.
Finishing Processes
Theory of grinding, classification, cylindrical and surface grinding machines, tool and cutter grinding
machines, different types of abrasives, bonds, specification and selection of a grinding wheel. Lapping, Honing
& Broaching operations, comparison to grinding
Introduction to Jigs and Fixtures
9+3 Hours
94
Total: 45+15 Hours

Textbook (s)
1. Hajra Choudhury S. K., Elements of workshop technology Volume No. II Machine Tools, Media
Promotors and Publishers Pvt. Limited, 12 th Edition, 2007
2. Mikell P. Groover, Fundamentals of Modern Manufacturing: Materials, Processes, and Systems, John
Wiley & Sons, Inc., 4th Edition, 2010
3. B. L. Juneja, G. S. Sekhon and Nitin Seth, Fundamentals of Metal Cutting and Machine tools, New Age
International Publishers-2nd Edition., 2005.
4. P N Rao, Manufacturing Technology: Metal Cutting and Machine Tools, MC Graw Hill Education
(India) Pvt. ltd, 3rd Edition, 2013
Reference (s)
1. Winston A. Knight and Geoffrey Boothroyd, Fundamentals of Metal Machining and Machine Tools,
CRC Press, 3rd Edition, 2005
2. Serope Kalpakjain and ‎Stephen‎ Schmid,‎ Manufacturing‎ Engineering‎ and‎ Technology,‎
Prentice‎Hall‎Publication,‎6th Edition, 2006
3. Amitabha Ghosh and Ashok Kumar Mallik, Manufacturing Science, East West Press Private Ltd, 2nd
Edition, 2010
4. B. S Raghuwanshi, Workshop Technology Vol-II, Dhanpatrai & Co., 10th Edition, 2012.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 45 40 -
Understand 35 40 -
Apply 20 20 40
Analyze - - 45
Evaluate - - 15
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. What are the adverse effects of the built-up edge formation?
2. What Is an indexing jig? What are the various kinds of indexing devices commonly used?
3. What are the advantages and disadvantages of conical locators?
4. List out the advantages of CNC systems over conventional NC systems.
5. What are the applications of CNC machines? Explain.
6. What is the coordinate system used for CNC milling machine?
7. What is 3-2-1 principle of location? Explain with neat sketch.
8. What are different types of clamping elements? Explain with neat sketches.
Understand
1. Explain the nomenclature of a single point cutting tool.
2. Explain the working principle of a Lathe. What are the operations that can be performed on lathe?
3. Demonstrate the Merchant‟s force diagram and state its significance in machining.
4. Explain the following grinding processes: Form Grinding. Gear tooth grinding, Thread grinding and
Cam grinding and Sketch.
5. Explain the mechanism behind the working of a shaper in detail.
6. Discuss the principles of design of jigs and fixtures.
Apply
1. A steel work piece s to be milled. Metal removal rate 1s30 cm3 /mm. Depth of cut is5mm and width of
cut is 100 mm. Find the table speed.
2. In a turning operation, it was observed that the tool life was 100 min and 50 min at cutting speed of
25m/min and 100 m/min respectively. Find out tool life at 200 m/min under same cutting condition.
39
95
16ME504 MECHANICAL MEASUREMENTS AND METROLOGY

3024
Course Outcomes
1. Explain the working of transducers measuring Displacement, Temperature, Level & Flow
2. Make use of different methods for measuring of pressure, speed, force, torque, power and humidity
3. Utilize appropriate instruments for measuring acceleration and vibrations
4. Apply and analyze the limits and tolerances for engineering components
5. Illustrate the different methods of measurement of angles and tapers
6. Infer the working of comparators, screw thread and gear teeth measuring instruments
COs – POs Mapping
1 3 - - - 1
2 3 2 2 3 1
3 3 - - 1 1
4 3 3 3 2 1
5 3 3 2 - 1
6 3 2 2 1 1
Unit I
Basic Principles of Measurement-Measurement of Displacement, Temperature, Level & Flow
Types, generalized configuration and functional descriptions of measuring instruments - examples, Static
&dynamic performance characteristics - sources of error, classification and elimination of error. Types of
transducers to measure displacement - Piezo electric, inductive, capacitance, resistance, calibration. Types of
transducers to measure temperature- expansion, electrical resistance - thermistor - thermocouple – pyrometers.
Direct method - indirect methods - capacitive, ultrasonic, magnetic, cryogenic fuel level indicators – bubbler
level indicators, Rota meter, magnetic, ultrasonic, turbine flow meter
Practical experiments
1. Measurement of level using capacitive transducer.
2. Study and calibration of LVDT transducer for displacement measurement.
3. Calibration of hot wire anemometer for temperature measurement.
4. Calibration of thermistor and RTD
5. Study and calibration of a rotameter for flow measurement.
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Measurement of Pressure, Speed, Force, Torque, Power and Humidity
Bourdon pressure gauges, bellows, diaphragm gauges, low pressure measurement - thermal conductivity
gauges –McLeod pressure gauge. Mechanical tachometers – electrical tachometers - stroboscope, noncontact
type of tachometer, Measurement of Acceleration and Vibration: Different simple instruments – principles of
seismic instruments - vibrometer and accelerometer using this principle, Elastic force meters, load cells,
torsion meters, and dynamometers, Sling psychrometer, Absorption psychrometer, Dew point meter
1. Study and calibration of McLeod gauge for low pressure
2. Study and calibration of photo and magnetic speed pickups for the measurement of speed
3. Calibration of load cell
4. Measurement of cutting tool forces using Lathe Tool Dynamometer
5. Measurement of torque & thrust force using Drill Tool Dynamometer
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Systems of Limits and Fits-Measurement of Angles and Tapers
Introduction, normal size, tolerance limits, deviations, allowance, Fits & their types- unilateral and bilateral
tolerance systems, hole & shaft basis systems- Interchangeability and Selective assembly. Different methods -
Bevel protractor - angle slip gauges - spirit levels - sine bar - sine plate, rollers and spheres used to determine
96
the tapers, Limit gauges- Taylor‟s principle. Design of GO & NO-GO gauges
1. Performance on linear measurements using Vernier Calliper, Vernier height gauge, and Micrometre.
2. Performance on angular measurement of given specimen by using Vernier bevel protractor.
3. Perform micrometre calibration by Slip gauges
4. Performance on angular measurement of given specimen by using sine bar and sin center.
5. To carry out measurement with the help of different indirect and direct non-graduated measurement.
9+3 Hours
Unit IV
Measurement through Comparators-Screw Thread & Gear Teeth Measurement
Comparators - Mechanical, Electrical and Electronic Comparators, pneumatic comparators and their uses in
mass production. Flat surface measurement: surface plates - optical flat and autocollimator. Measurement of
effective diameter, angle of thread and thread pitch, Gear measuring instruments, Gear tooth profile
measurement, Measurement of diameter, pitch pressure angle and tooth thickness, Coordinate Measuring
Machines- Working principle, Types of CMM, blue light scanning, white light scanning, applications,
Alignment test on lathe machine.
1. Measurements of Surface roughness using Mechanical Comparator.
2. Measurement of surface flatness using Optical Flats.
3. Measurements of Surface roughness using Talysurf
4. Measurement of straightness and squareness using Autocollimator.
5. Measurement of thread parameters using Optical Projector / Toolmaker Microscope
6. Measurement of gear tooth profile using gear tooth Vernier /Gear tooth micrometre
12+4 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. R. K. Jain, Engineering Metrology, Khanna Publishers, 20 th Edition, 2007.
2. D.S Kumar, Measurement Systems: Applications & Design, Metropolitan, 6 th Edition, 2002.
3. Beckwith, Thomas G, Marangoni, Roy D, Lienhard V and John H, Mechanical Measurements, Prentice
Hall, 6th Edition, 2006.
Reference (s)
1. BIS Standards on Limits & Fits (IS 919), Surface Finish (IS 2073), Machine Tool Alignment, 1993.
2. J. P. Holman, Experimental Methods for Engineers, McGraw-Hill; 8th Edition, 2012.
3. R. K. Jain, Mechanical and Industrial Measurements: Process Instrumentation and Control, Khanna
Publishers, 12th Edition 2008.
4. I. C. Gupta, Engineering Metrology, Dhanpat Rai and Sons, 7 th Edition, 2012.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 50 40
Understand 40 50
Apply 10 10
Analyze - -
Evaluate - -
Create - -
Total (%) 100 100
Remember
1. Define the generalized configuration and functions of measuring instruments.
2. State the principles for pressure and speed measuring instruments.
3. Define normal size, tolerance limits, deviations, allowance, Fits & their types.
4. State the roll of CMM in measurement.
5. List different methods used to measure taper.
Understand
97
1. Explain the principles of seismic instruments.

2. Explain the principle and working of McLeod pressure gauge.
3. Classify different flat surface measuring instruments with neat sketches.
4. Classify temperature measuring instruments. Give brief description about Hot-wire anemometer.
5. Classify different types of comparators. Explain them with neat sketch.
Apply
1. A perfect gas is compressed according to the law PV 1.25 = constant from an initial pressure of 1 bar and
volume of 0.9 m3 to a final volume of 0.6 m3. Determine the final pressure and change of entropy per
kg of gas during the process. Take γ=1.4, R=287 J/kg.K.
98
16ME505 STEAM AND GAS TURBINES

3103
Course Outcomes
2. Interpret Rankine cycle
3. Explain the working of boilers and its performance parameters
4. Estimate the performance of steam nozzles
5. Evaluate the performance of steam turbines
6. Explain the working of steam condensers and their performance parameters
7. Estimate the performance of gas turbines
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO7
1 3 3 2 1
2 3 2 1 1
3 3 3 3 -
4 3 2 - -
5 3 2 2 1
6 3 2 2 1
Unit I
Vapour Power Cycles-Steam Generators and Draft system
Thermodynamic analysis of simple Rankine cycle- performance improvement of simple Rankine cycle by
Reheating and Regeneration. Classification of Steam Generators, Basic construction and working details of
steam generators-Cochran, Bobcock & Wilcock, La-mont, Loeffler and Benson boilers-Boiler performance
parameters-Equivalent evaporation and boiler efficiency, Boiler mountings and accessories. Draft System:
Theory of Natural, Induced, Forced and Balance Draft
Cornish boiler
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Steam nozzles-Super Saturated Flow
Function of nozzle – applications - types, Flow through nozzles, thermodynamic analysis – assumptions -
velocity of nozzle at exit-Ideal and actual expansion in nozzle, velocity coefficient, condition for maximum
discharge, critical pressure ratio, criteria decide nozzle shape Its effects, degree of super saturation and degree
of under cooling
Wilson line
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Steam Turbines-Reaction Turbine
Classification – Impulse turbine; Mechanical details – Velocity diagram – effect of friction – power developed,
axial thrust, blade efficiency – condition for maximum efficiency. Velocity compounding, pressure
compounding, Pressure velocity compounding, Velocity and Pressure variation along the flow – combined
velocity diagram for a velocity compounded impulse turbine. Mechanical details – principle of operation,
thermodynamic analysis of a stage, degree of reaction –velocity diagram. Parson‟s reaction turbine – condition
for maximum efficiency
Comparison of turbines, criteria for the selection of turbine Blade materials
12+3 Hours
Unit IV
Steam Condensers-Gas turbines
Classification of condensers – working principle of different types – vacuum efficiency and condenser
Introduction to Ideal Simple-Cycle Gas Turbine, Analysis of the Ideal Cycle, Analysis of the Open Simple-
Cycle Gas Turbine, Maximizing the Net Work of the Cycle, Regenerative Gas Turbines, Intercooling and
Reheat, Combined Intercooling, Reheat, and Regeneration
Introduction to jet engine
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
99
Textbook (s)
5. R. Yadav, Steam and Gas Turbines and Power Plant Engineering, Central Book Depot, 7 th Edition, 2011
6. P K Nag, Power Plant Engineering, 3rd Edition, TMH, 2008.
7. V. Ganesan, Gas Turbines, TMH, 3rd Edition, 2010.
8. R. K. Rajput, Thermal Engineering, Lakshmi Publications, 7 th Edition, 2013.
Reference (s)
9. Yunus A. Çengel, Michael A. Boles, Thermodynamics: An Engineering Approach, McGraw-Hill, 8th
Edition, Reprint, 2014
10. R. Yadav, Thermodynamics and Heat Engines, Volume 1, SI Units, Central Publishing House, 7 th
Edition, 2002.
11. P. Khajuria and S. P. Dubey, Gas Turbines and Propulsive Systems, Dhanpatrai, 5th Edition, 2012
12. Rogers and Saravana Muto, Gas Turbines, Addison Wesley – Longman, 2012
13. M. L. Marthur and Mehta, Thermal Engineering, Jain Bros, 3 rd Edition, 2013
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
40
Cognitive level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Assignment Test (%)
Remember 20 25 -
Understand 40 25 -
Apply 40 45 40
Analyze - - 40
Evaluate - - 20
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
8. Reproduce T-S Diagram of simple Rankine cycle.
9. Define boiler efficiency.
10. Classify boilers.
11. Define degree of saturation for steam nozzles.
12. Define compounding of steam turbines.
13. Reproduce expression for maximum efficiency of parson‟s reaction turbine
14. Define vacuum efficiency of steam condensers.
15. Reproduce T-S Diagram of simple Brayton cycle.
Understand
16. Illustrate simple Rankine cycle with a neat sketch.
17. Illustrate Rankine cycle with reheating with a neat sketch.
18. Differentiate fire tube boiler and water tube boiler.
19. Identify the function of nozzle in steam power plants.
20. Explain pressure compounding with pressure and velocity variation diagram.
21. Differentiate jet condensers and surface condensers.
22. Illustrate Brayton cycle with inter cooling with neat sketch.
Apply
23. Steam is supplied to a turbine of power plant at 5 bar, 3000 C and leaves the turbine at 0.1 bar. Use the
basic formulas of simple Rankine cycle and solve the above problem for efficiency of the plant.
24. Classify steam turbines and with the help of neat sketch write the working of each turbine.
25. Examine the use of nozzle in steam power plants.
26. Show that degree of reaction for parson‟s reaction turbine is 50%.
27. Steam enters the nozzle at 2 bar dry saturated and leaves at 0.1 bar. Use basic formulas of steam
nozzle and solve the above problem for exit velocity of nozzle.
28. Classify boilers and with a neat sketch write the working of water tube boiler.
Analyze
29. Thermodynamically analyze basic Rankine cycle.
30. Technically Contrast steam turbine and gas turbine
40
100
31. Investigate different ways by which efficiency of steam power plant can be increased.
32. Investigate different ways by which efficiency of gas power plant can be increased.
33. A power plant of 50 mw is to be installed in a process industry, identify which type of power plant
(steam or gas) is suitable and support your answer.
34. Analyze velocity triangles for impulse turbine.
Evaluate
35. Asses the performance of reheat Rankine cycle.
36. How do you assess the performance of condensers?
37. How do you assess the performance of boilers?
38. Impulse turbine is best suited for low power generation application. Is the above statement true or
false? Justify your answer.
Create
39. Create velocity triangle for velocity compounded impulse turbine and define each velocity component.
40. Create velocity triangle for reaction turbine and define each angle of the velocity triangle.
41. Design a steam nozzle for maximum discharge condition.
42. Create velocity triangle for following data of a parson‟s reaction turbine,
43. Outlet angle = 200, Speed ratio = 0.8, Speed of rotor = 3000 rpm, Diameter of rotor = 150cm.
101
16ME001 ADVANCED IC ENGINES

3103
Course Outcomes
44. Explain the parameters which will influence the operation and performance of an IC engine
45. Explain the practical engine cycles
46. Determine the parameters effecting the performance of superchargers and turbochargers
47. Explain the fuel spray behavior and ignition delay in an IC engine
48. Examine the performance and emissions of IC engines operated with Alternative fuels
49. Outline the recent trends to IC engines
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO3
1 3 2 2
2 3 2 2
3 3 2 -
4 3 2 -
5 3 3 3
6 3 1 -
Unit I
Introduction and cycle analysis
Introduction, Historical Review, Engine Types, Design and operating Parameters of IC engine. Cycle Analysis:
Thermo-chemistry of Fuel, Air mixtures, Ideal Models of Engine cycles, Real Engine cycles, differences and
Factors responsible for it
IC Engine components and working
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Gas exchange processes and engine combustion
Volumetric Efficiency– Supercharging and Turbo charging. Swirl, Squish – Pre-chamber Engine flows.
Abnormal combustion in SI engine, MPFI, SI engine testing. CI engine: Fuel Spray Behavior, Ignition Delay,
Mixing Formation and control, Common rail fuel injection system
Combustion stages in SI and CI engines
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Alternative fuels
Alcohols, Vegetable oils and bio-diesel, Bio-gas, Natural Gas, Liquefied Petroleum Gas, Hydrogen, Properties,
Suitability, Engine Modifications, Performance, Combustion and Emission Characteristics of SI and CI
Engines using these alternate fuels. Emission norms and NOx control methods
Indian Driving Cycles and emission norms
11+3 Hours
Unit IV
Recent trends in IC Engines
Homogeneous Charge Compression Ignition Engine, Lean Burn Engine, Stratified Charge Engine, Surface
Ignition Engine, Four Valve and Overhead Cam Engines, Electronic Engine Management, Gasoline Direct
Injection Engine, pressure pick up, charge amplifier PC for Combustion and Heat release analysis in Engine
Data Acquisition System
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
14. V. Ganesan, Internal Combustion Engines, Tata McGraw Hill, 4 th Edition, 2012.
15. V. P. Vasandan & DS Kumar, Heat engineering, MPSSB Co. Ltd, 3 rd Edition, 2008.
Reference (s)
16. M. L. Mathur and R. P. Sharma, A Course in Internal Combustion Engines, Dhanpat Rai, 4 th Edition,
2008
102
17. Rudramoorthy, Thermal Engineering, TMH, 4 th Edition, 2010

18. P. S. Gill and Smith, IC engines, TMH, 3rd Edition, 2009
19. John B. Heywood, Internal Combustion Engine Fundamental, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, Revised
reprint, 1988
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
41
Remember 25 25 -
Understand 35 25 -
Apply 40 50 30
Analyze - - 50
Evaluate - - 20
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
50. Label the components of IC engine.
51. List the parameters influences the performance of IC engine.
52. Define air swirl and air squish.
53. List any four recent developments in IC engines.
Understand
54. Explain the principle of engine cycles.
55. Classify the engine types.
56. Derive a relation for the efficiency of diesel cycle.
57. Combustion in IC engine undergoes number of stages. Explain them with the help of p-Ө diagram.
Apply
58. Asses the importance of volumetric efficiency to the IC engine.
59. Demonstrate the MPFI Engine.
60. Swift car is provided with a turbo charger with an expectation of improved performance. Justify.
61. Using Morse test asses, the indicated power of multi cylinder SI engine.
Analyze
62. Analyze the reasons for the lower efficiency in real engine cycles.
63. Conclude that the efficiency of Otto > Dual> Diesel cycle for the same compression ratio and heat
input.
64. Compare The abnormal combustion in SI engine with CI engine
65. Justify the statement “IC engines will accept the biofuels”.
Evaluate
66. Defend the statement, the ideal cycle are more efficient tan real.
67. Judge the importance of ignition delay in CI engine performance
68. Criticize the emissions of an engine fueled with biodiesel?
69. CRDI is a system used to improve the performance CI engine. Support the statement.
Create
70. Conclude the valid reasons of biofuels in the aspect of emissions
71. Generalize the fuel spray behavior of CI engine.
72. Make an argument that the HCCI engine ensures better combustion
41
103
16ME002 ADVANCED MATERIALS

3103
Course Outcomes
73. Explain the need and applications different types of composite materials
74. Summarize the various methods of manufacturing composite materials
75. Outline different types of reinforcements used in the metal matrix and ceramic matrix composites with
their properties and applications
76. Infer the principles, types and applications of different functionally graded materials
77. Interpret the shape memory effect and exemplify their properties and applications
78. Explain the properties and applicants of Nano and Bio materials
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO3
1 3 2
2 3 2
3 3 3
4 3 2
5 3 2
6 3 3
Unit I
Introduction to Composite Materials
Introduction, Classification: Polymer Matrix Composites, Metal Matrix Composites, Ceramic Matrix
Composites, Carbon – Carbon Composites, Particulate, Whisker, Fiber – Reinforced Composites, Laminates.
Manufacturing Methods of Polymer Matrix composites
Autoclave, tape production, molding methods, filament winding, man layup, spray layup, Automated Fiber
placement, automated tape placement methods, RTM
Pultrusion
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Reinforcements
Glass, Silica, Kevlar, Carbon, Boron, Silicon Carbide, and Boron Carbide fibers
Metal Matrix and Ceramic Matrix Composites
Manufacturing of ceramic matrix & metal matrix composites and their applications
Stress strain relations for MMC and CMC
12+3 Hours
Unit III
Functionally Graded Materials
Types of Functionally graded materials – classification – different systems – preparation – properties and
applications of functionally graded materials
Shape Memory Alloys
Introduction – Shape memory effect – Classification of shape memory alloys – Composition – properties.
Applications of shape memory alloys
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Nanomaterials and Biomaterials
Introduction – preparation of Nanomaterials – top down and bottom up approaches – advantages &
disadvantages – applications in comparison with bulk materials (Nano – structure, dots, wires, tubes,
composites),Properties at Nano scales
Introduction to Biomaterials Engineering and Processing, Bioceramics, Polymer and smart polymers as
biomaterials, Silicone biomaterials
Examples and Applications
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
104
Textbook (s)
20. A.K. Bandyopadyay, Nano materials, New age Publishers, 1 st Edition, 2008
21. E. J. Kramer, Robert W. Cahn and Peter Haasen, Materials Science and Technology: A Comprehensive
Treatment, Wiley, 1st Edition, 2005
22. Isaac M. Daniel and Ori Ishai, Engineering Mechanics of Composite Materials Volume 13, Oxford
University Press, 2nd Edition, 2006
Reference (s)
23. R. M. Jones, Mechanics of Composite Materials, CRC Press, 2 nd Edition revised, 1998
24. Bhagwan D. Agarwal, Lawrence J. Broutman, K. Chandrashekhara, Analysis and Performance of Fiber
Composites, John Wiley & Sons, 3rd Edition, 2012
25. P. K. Mallick, Fiber-reinforced composites: materials, manufacturing, and design
Dekker Mechanical Engineering Series, CRC Press, 3rd Edition, 2008
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 25 25 -
Understand 35 25 -
Apply 40 50 40
Analyze - - 50
Evaluate - - 10
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
79. Define Carbon – carbon composites. Write one application.
80. Recall the purpose of Metal matrix composites? Give one application.
81. Recall the purpose of designing composite materials with two examples.
82. Recall the types of Carbon fiber and their precursors. Explain the preparation of high strength Carbon
fiber.
Understand
83. Explain the process of Pultrusion.
84. Summarize the necessity of Curing.
85. Summarize any two advantages and limitations of carbon fiber.
86. Classify composites based on the type of matrix. List any two advantages and limitations of Polymer
matrix composites.
Apply
87. Demonstrate the reason behind high strength of Aramid fiber with figure.
Analyze
88. State „True‟ or „False‟ and justify. “Kevlar is used for compressive load bearing elements”.
Create
89. Create Jute fiber reinforced Polymer (resin) composite laminate.
42
105
16ME003 INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain fundamentals of the robotics, history, evolution, applications and anatomy
2. Infer basic configurations and components of robotic systems
3. Apply the basic transformations to robotic systems
4. Model the robot motion through forward kinematics and inverse kinematics
5. Develop mathematical models for dynamic motions and trajectory planning
6. Explain various actuators and feedback components in robotic systems
COs – POs Mapping
1 3 2 1 -
2 3 2 2 -
3 3 2 3 2
4 3 2 3 3
5 3 2 3 3
6 3 2 1 -
Unit I
Introduction-Components of the Industrial Robotics
Industrial automation and Robotics, CAD/CAM and Robotics – An over view of Robotics – present and future
applications – classification by coordinate system and control system. Function line diagram representation of
robot arms, common types of arms. Components, Architecture, number of degrees of freedom – Requirements
and challenges of end effectors, determination of the end effectors
Comparison of Electric Hydraulic and Pneumatic types of locomotion devices.
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Motion Analysis-Manipulator Kinematics
Homogeneous transformations as applicable to rotation and translation – problems. Specifications of the
matrices, D-H notation joint coordinates-problems World Coordinates Forward kinematics.
Inverse kinematics
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Dynamic analysis and Trajectory planning
Differential transformation and manipulators, Jacobians – problems.
Dynamics
Lagrange – Euler and Newton – Euler formations – Problems.
Path and Trajectory planning
General considerations in path description and generation. Trajectory planning and avoidance of obstacles,
path planning, Skew motion, joint integrated motion –straight line motion
Robot programming languages and software packages.
11+3 Hours
Unit IV
Robot actuators and feedback components-Robot Application in Manufacturing
Actuators
Pneumatic, Hydraulic actuators, electric &stepper motors.
Feedback components
Position sensors – potentiometers, resolvers, encoders – Velocity sensors.
Applications of Robots
Material Transfer - Material handling, loading and unloading- Processing - spot and continuous arc welding &
spray painting.
Robots in Assembly and Inspection.
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
106
Textbook (s)
1. M P Groover, Industrial Robotics (Special Indian Edition), Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2nd Edition,
2012.
2. R K Mittal and Nagrath, Robotics and Control, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 1st Edition, 2003
Reference (s)
1. Philippe Coiffet, Michael Chirouze, An Introduction to Robot Technology, Springer Science & Business
Media, Illustrated Edition, 2012
2. K S Fu, Ralph Gonzalez, C S G Lee, Robotics: Control Sensing. Vision, and Intelligence, Tata
McGraw-Hill Education, 2nd Edition, 2008
3. Richard David Klafter, Thomas A. Chmielewski, Michael Negin, Robotic Engineering: An Integrated
approach, Prentice Hall, 1st Edition, 1989.
4. John J. Craig, Introduction to Robotics: Mechanics and Control, Pearson/Prentice Hall, 3 rd Edition, 2005
5. S K Saha, Introduction to Robotics, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2nd Edition, 2014.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 25 15 -
Understand 55 15 -
Apply 20 50 40
Analyze - - 40
Evaluate - - 20
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define the terms „Robot‟ and „Robotics
2. Discuss the different feedback components used in robots
3. What are the main characteristics of a robot
Understand
1. Explain the principle of entropy increase.
2. Explain the various robot configurations with neat sketches
3. Draw the graphical representation of Rotational joint in DH notation
4. Discuss the application of Lagrangian Newtonian techniques in writing the equation of motion for
Robotics
Apply
1. Discuss the role of robots in engineering.
2. What are the various fields in which the robots used
3. Explain the application of robots in welding
4. Explain the application of robots in loading\unloading
Analyze
1. What is DH convention for selecting frames of reference in robotic application? Explain.
2. What are future manufacturing applications of robot?
Evaluate
1. Determine dexterous space of a 3R SCARA robot, assume the robot parameters.
Create
1. Create a robot cell for packing purpose with your own specifications
2. Create a 6-DOF robot to perform assembly welding with your own specifications
43
107
16ME004 NON-TRADITIONAL MACHINING AND FORMING PROCESSES

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain the need and applications of modern machining processes
2. Outline working principles of USM, AJM, WJM and AWJM techniques
3. Summarize working principles of CM, ECM and EDM processes
4. Select a suitable modern machining process for given applications
5. Explain working principles of EBM, LBM and PAM processes
6. Summarize the working principle of various Forming and finishing processes
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PSO2
1 3 2 1
2 3 2 1
3 3 2 3
4 3 1 1
5 2 1 1
6 3 1 1
Unit I
Introduction- Abrasive jet machining, Water jet machining and abrasive water jet machine-
Ultrasonic machining
Need for modern machining methods, Classification of modern machining processes-considerations in process
selection, Materials and Applications. Basic principles, equipment, process variables Elements of the process,
mechanics of metal removal process parameters, economic considerations
Applications and limitations
8+4 Hours
Unit II
Chemical Machining
Basic principles, equipment, process variables, mechanics of metal removal, MRR, application and limitations.
Fundamentals of chemical, machining, advantages and applications, Chemical machining-principle-maskants,
etchants.
Electrochemical Machining
Fundamentals of electro chemical machining, electro chemical grinding, electro chemical honing and
deburring process, metal removal rate in ECM, tool design, Surface finish and accuracy economic aspects of
ECM, Simple problems for estimation of metal removal rate. Fundamentals of chemical machining, advantages
and applications
EDM
General Principle and applications of Electric Discharge Machining (EDM), Electric Discharge Grinding and
electric discharge wire cutting processes, Power circuits for EDM, Mechanics of metal removal in EDM,
Process parameters, selection of electrode and dielectric fluids, methods surface finish and machining
accuracy.
Wire EDM
Wire EDM Working principle, applications.
Electro stream drilling, Shaped tube electrolytic machining.
14+3 Hours
Unit III
Thermal metal removal processes – EBM
Principle, applications, Generation and control of electron beam for machining, theory of electron beam
machining (EBM).
LBM
General Principle and application of laser beam machining (LBM), comparison of thermal and non-thermal
processes.
PAM
Working principle and types of PAM, Application of plasma for machining, metal removal mechanism,
process parameters, accuracy and surface finish and other applications of plasma in manufacturing industries.
Analysis of process parameters of EBM, LBM, PAM.
108
14+4 Hours
Unit IV
Non-Traditional forming, Hydro forming and super plastic forming
Working principal of Non-Traditional forming, Hydro forming and super plastic forming in manufacturing
industries. HERFs- explosive forming, Electrohydraulic forming, magnetic pulse forming.
Finishing processes
Magnetic abrasive finishing, Abrasive flow finishing.
Hydrostatic extrusions
9+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. VK Jain, Advanced machining processes, Allied publishers, 1st Edition, 2007
2. ASM Handbook, Forming and Forging, Volume 14, 9 th Edition, 2003
Reference(s)
1. P C Pandey and H S Shah, Modern Machining Process, McGraw Hill, 1st Edition, 2013
2. P. K. Mishra, Non-conventional machining, Narosa publishers, 9th Edition, 2009
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 25 25 -
Understand 35 25 -
Apply 40 50 50
Analyze - - 50
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. What is conventional machining process?
2. List the advantages and disadvantages of nontraditional machining process?
3. Define the EDM?
4. What is ECM?
5. Name the types of machining process?
6. What are the benefits of wire EDM?
7. Write about non-traditional forming process.
Understand
1. Classify and explain the machining process.
2. Explain USM and EBM.
3. Outline a about ECM and chemical machining process.
4. Explain wire EDM process.
5. Explain the role of non-traditional machining process?
6. Compare the traditional and non-traditional machining process.
Apply
1. Identify the need of non-traditional machining process.
2. Choose the applications of EDM.
3. Choose the importance of non-traditional machining process.
4. Why unconventional machining process is better than
5. conventional machining process?
6. Identify merits and demerits in EBM.
Analyze
1. Explain the plasma arc welding.
2. Explain Electric Discharge Grinding and electric discharge wire cutting processes
3. Write mechanics of metal removal, MRR, application and limitations in Magnetic abrasive finishing.
44
109
4. Explain about photo chemical machine process.

5. Write about Electrohydraulic forming.
6. Write about super plastic forming.
110
16ME507 MACHINE TOOLS & DYNAMICS LAB

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Build simple features by performing basic turning operations on lathe
2. Develop simple features by performing basic operations on shaper, planer and milling machines
3. Create features by making use of grooving, boring, reaming, thread cutting, knurling and grinding
4. Determine the critical speed using whirling of shaft
5. Test for balancing of rotating masses, gyroscopic couple and analysis of cam profile
6. Fabricate basic shapes using programmable machines
COs – POs Mapping
1 3 1 1 1 -
2 3 2 2 1 -
3 3 2 2 1 1
4 3 3 2 1 -
5 3 3 2 1 -
6 3 3 3 3 3
List of Experiments
1. Introduction of general purpose machine- Lathe, drilling machine, Milling machine, Sharper, Planning
machine, Slotting machine, Cylindrical Grinder, Surface grinder and tool and cutter grinder.
2. Perform Step turning and taper turning on lathe machine.
3. Perform Thread cutting and knurling on lather machine.
4. Perform grooving, boring and reaming operations on lathe machine.
5. Perform drilling and tapping operations by using Drilling machine.
6. Prepare a spur by using milling machine.
7. Prepare V-tool by using tool cutter grinder.
8. Generate a flat surface and prepare V-groove using shaping machine.
9. Determination of critical Speed by using Whirling of Shaft.
10. Balancing of Rotating Masses.
11. Determination of Gyroscopic Couple.
12. Analysis of Cam profile.
1. Study of cutting tool geometry.
2. Preparation of single point cutting tool according to ASA systems.
3. Preparation of tensile test specimen according to ASTM standards using conventional lathe machine.
4. Preparation of tensile test specimen according to ASTM standards using CNC lathe machine.
5. Multiple turning operations on CNC machine.
6. Preparation of Helical Gear.
7. Comparative study between conventional machining and CNC Machining.
8. To study the characteristic features of lathe machine by comparing the observations recorded at low,
medium and high speeds.
9. To study the characteristic features of Milling machine by comparing the observations recorded at low,
medium and high speeds.
10. Compare the surface roughness of workpiece fabricated using drilling machine and EDM.
11. To study the characteristic features of Shaper by comparing the observations recorded at low, medium
and high speeds.
12. Analysis of Cam profile using various types of followers.
13. Study of balancing of rotating masses.
14. Locate the balancing masses on a rotating shaft with unbalanced weights.
15. Verification of principle of gyroscopic couple.
1. Machine tools and Dynamics lab manual, GMR Institute of Technology, Rajam.
45
111
16ESX2A EMPLOYABILITY SKILLS III

0200
Soft Skills: Introduction to Campus Placements: Stages of Campus Placement, Skills assessed in Campus
Placements & How to get ready? Building Vocabulary: Through reading Articles, Exploring New Words,
Meanings and the usage with examples; Motivational Talks on Positive Thinking: Beliefs, Thoughts, Actions,
Habits & Results (Success); Resume Preparation: Resume? Templates? Mistakes to be avoided in a Resume,
Steps to be followed in preparing it. (with examples); Group Discussions (Recap): GD? Stages of a GD, Skills
assessed in a GD, Blunders to be avoided, how to excel in a GD? (through Practice Sessions); Psychometric
Tests: Definition, Types of Psychometric Tests: Numerical Computation, Data Interpretation, Verbal
Comprehension, Verbal Critical Reasoning and Personality Questionnaires; Exercises related to
Communication: JAMs, Case Studies, Video Synthesis, Story Writing, TAT etc.
112
16ME601 DESIGN OF MACHINE MEMBERS

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Design journal bearings, ball and roller bearings subjected to static and dynamic loads
2. Analyze curved beams subjected to static loads
3. Design engine parts including connecting rod, crank shaft, pistons and cylinders
4. Design power transmission systems including pulleys, spur and helical gears
5. Design Power screws and springs.
6. Apply the Knowledge of design theories on various machine members
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO3
1 3 3 3
2 3 3 2
3 3 3 2
4 3 2 2
5 3 3 3
6 3 2 2
Unit I
Bearings and Curved Beams
Types of Journal bearings, Lubrication, Bearing Modulus, Full and partial bearings, Clearance ratio, Heat
dissipation of bearings, bearing materials, Journal bearing design, Petroff„s equation, Ball and roller bearings,
Static loading of ball & roller bearings, Bearing life. Design of curved beams: introduction, stresses in curved
beams, Expression for radius of neutral axis for rectangular, circular, trapezoidal and T-Section, C – clamps.
Design of crane hook
13+4 Hours
Unit II
Engine parts
Connecting Rod, thrust in connecting rod, Stress due to whipping action on connecting rod ends, Cranks and
Crank shafts, strength and proportions of over hung and center cranks, Crank pins, Crank shafts. Pistons,
Forces acting on piston, Construction, Design and proportions of piston, Cylinder.
Cylinder liners.
9+3 Hours
Unit III
Power transmission systems - Pulleys, Spur & Helical Gears
Transmission of power by Belt and Rope drives, Transmission Efficiencies, Belts – Flat and V types – Ropes -
pulleys for belt and rope drives, Materials, Chain drives. Spur & Helical gear drives: Spur gears- Helical gears
– Load concentration factor – Dynamic load factor. Surface Compressive strength – Bending strength – Design
analysis of spur gears – Estimation of Centre distance, module and face width, check for plastic deformation.
Check for dynamic and wear considerations.
Chain drive
12+3 Hours
Unit IV
Design of power screws
Design of screw, Square, ACME, Buttress screws, design of nut, compound screw, differential screw, ball
screw- possible failures. Types of springs, end connection for tension and compression helical springs, stress
and deflections in helical springs – circular wire, helical springs subjected to fatigue loading, springs series and
parallel, composite springs, leaf springs.
Helical spring subjected to fatigue loading
11+3 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. V. B. Bhandari, Design of Machine Elements, TMH Publishers, 3 rd Edition, 2010.
2. S MD Jalaludin, Design Data hand Book, Anuradha Publishers, 2nd Edition, 2014.
113
Reference (s)
1. Norton R. L., Machine Design – An Integrated Approach, Pearson, 3rd Edition, 2004.
2. Shigley J.E. & Mischkie C.R., Mechanical Engineering Design, 3 rd Edition, TMH publishers, 2005.
3. N. C. Pandya & C. S. Shah, Machine Design, Charotar publishing house Pvt. Ltd. 17th Edition, 2009.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 25 25 -
Understand 35 25 -
Apply 40 50 60
Analyze - - 40
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. List the commonly used materials for sliding contact bearings and state any four desirable properties of
a good bearing material.
2. How do you prefer trapezoidal section with wider edge inside for the cross section of a crane hook?
Understand
1. Explain the various stresses induced in the connecting rod.
2. State the advantages and disadvantages of the chain drive over belt and rope drive.
3. Explain step by step procedure to design a lathe machine bed.
Apply
1. A journal bearing for a centrifugal pump from the following data: Load on the journal is 20000 N,
speed of the journal is 900 r.p.m, type of oil is SAE10 for which the absolute viscosity at 55°C is 0.017
kg/m-s, ambient temperature of oil is 15.5°C and maximum bearing pressure for the pump is 1.5
N/mm2. Calculate also mass of the lubricating oil required for artificial cooling, if rise of temperature
of oil be limited to 10°C. Take Heat dissipation coefficient 1232 W/m2 /°C.
2. An overhung crankshaft for a 250 mm x 300 mm single cylinder vertical engine. The weight of the
flywheel is 30 kN and the explosion pressure is 2.1 N/mm2. The gas pressure at the maximum torque is
0.9 N/mm2, when the crank angle is 35° from inner dead centre. The connecting rod is 4.5 times the
crank radius. Assume any other data if required.
3. A flat belt is required to transmit 30 kW from a pulley of 1.5m effective diameter running at 300 rpm.
The angle of contact is spread over 11/24 of the circumference. The coefficient of friction between the
belt and pulley surface is 0.3. Determine taking centrifugal tension in to account, width of the belt
required. It is given that the belt thickness is 9.5 mm. density of belt material is 100 kg/m3 and the
permissible working stress is 2.5 MPa.
Analyze
1. Distinguish between differential and compound screws and mention applications of these screws.
2. List a short note on gear drives giving their merits and demerits.
Evaluate
1. A crane hook shown in figure-1 is having the capacity to lift a load of 150 kN. Determine the
maximum compressive and tensile stresses in the section AB of the crane hook.
46
114
Figure-1
Create
1. Design a cast iron piston for a single acting four stroke diesel engine with the following data: Cylinder
bore = 200 mm; Length of stroke = 250 mm; Speed = 600 rpm; Brake mean effective pressure = 0.6
MPa; Maximum gas pressure = 4 MPa; Fuel consumption = 0.25 kg/BP/h; l/d ratio for bush in small
end of connecting rod = 1.5. Assume any other data if required.
2. A pair of parallel helical gears consists of a 20 teeth pinion meshing with a 100 teeth gear. The pinion
rotates at 720 rpm. The normal pressure angle is 200, while the helix angle is 250, the face width is 40
mm and the normal module is 4 mm. the pinion as well as gear is made of steel 40C8 (S ut = 600
N/mm2) and heat treated to a surface hardness of 300 BHN. The service factor and the factor of safety
are 1.5 and 2 respectively. Assume that the velocity factor accounts for the dynamic load and calculate
the power transmitting capacity of gears.
3. Compose an expression for radius of neutral axis of a rectangular cross- section curved beam.
115
16ME602 GEOMETRIC MODELING AND COMPUTER AIDED MANUFACTURING

3024
Course Outcomes
1. Explain the use of computers in product design and manufacturing
2. Perform basic 2D and 3D geometric Transformations
3. Interpret and develop parametric models of simple curves, surfaces and solids
4. Explain NC, DNC and CNC
5. Develop manual part programs for machining components on Milling and Turning machines
6. Summarize GT, CAPP, FMS, CAQC, CIM systems
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO5 PO9 PO10 PSO1
1 3 2 1 - - -
2 3 3 2 2 1 3
3 3 3 2 1 1 3
4 3 2 3 1 - -
5 3 3 3 3 2 -
6 3 2 2 - - -
Unit I
Design process
Basic Design process, Role of computers in Design process, product life cycle .
2D and 3D Transformations
Rotation, scaling, translation.
Wireframe modeling
Geometric Model wireframe model, wireframe entitles, parametric representation method, parametric
representation of synthesis curves, Genetic cubic splines, Bezier curves, B-Splines.
1. Write a program to perform 2D-transformations on a given object.
3. To generate cubic spline curves using C language.
4. To generate the following parametric curves using C language.
5. To generate the B-spline curve using C language.
Unit II
Surface Modeling
Surface model surface entitles, surface representations, parametric representations of surfaces, plane surface,
ruled surfaces, surface of revolution, tabulated cylinder, Hermite Bicubic surface. Bezier surface, B- Spline
surfaces
Solid modeling
Solid representation Boundary representation (B-Rep), constructive Solid Geometry, examples.
1. To generate a plane Bezier surface using C language.
2. To generate a B-spline surface using C Language.
3. To study the CSG technique for solid modeling.
4. To study the boundary representation technique for solid modeling.
Unit III
Fundamentals of CNC machines
CNC Technology - Functions of CNC Control in Machine Tools - Classification of CNC systems – Contouring
System - interpolators, open loop and closed loop CNC systems - CNC Controllers, Hardware features – Direct
Numerical Control (DNC Systems). -Automatic tool changers.
Part programming for CNC machines
116
Numerical control codes - Standards - Manual Programming - Canned cycles and subroutines – Computer
Assisted Programming, CAD / CAM approach NC part programming, Machining of free form surfaces.
1. To write manual part programming for practicing simple facing operation, simulate and to machine the
given component on CNC milling machine.
2. To write manual part programming for practicing simple turning operation, simulate and to machine
the given component on CNC milling machine.
3. To write manual part programming for practicing step turning operation, simulate and to machine the
given component on CNC lathe machine.
4. To write manual part programming for practicing multiple taper turning operation, simulate and to
machine the given component on CNC lathe machine.
5. To write manual part programming for practicing multiple threading operation, simulate and to
6. To write manual part programming for practicing linear and circular interpolations, simulate and to
machine the given component on CNC milling machine.
Unit IV
Group technology
Part families, Part classification and coding, Production flow analysis, Machine cell design, Advantages of GT.
Process planning
Conventional process planning, CAPP, benefits of CAPP, architecture of CAPP, CAPP approaches- variant
CAPP, generative CAPP, Hybrid CAPP, CAPP systems.
Flexible manufacturing systems
Introduction, FMS components, types of FMS, FMS layouts, planning for FMS, Advantages and applications.
1. For the given variant or generative system, what is the GT classifying and code system used.
2. Consider yourself a process planner with very little hands-on experience with titanium. How can you
develop a process plan for the following titanium part?
3. Develop the squaring graph, the interaction graph and the plan graph of the parts shown below and
write the sequence of steps of the resulting process plan for each part.
4. Performing simple facing and drilling operation with FMS.

5. Performing plane turning and pocketing operation with FMS.
117
Textbook (s)
1. Mikell P-Grover, Emory W. Zimmers, Jr., CAD/CAM –5th Edition 2008.
2. Ibrahim Zeid - CAD/CAM Theory and Practice, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 2nd
Edition, 1992.
3. Michael E. Mortenson, Geometric modeling, Industrial Press, 3 rd Edition, 2006
4. Koren, Computer Control of Manufacturing Systems, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2nd Edition, 2005
Reference (s)
1. P.N Rao, CAD/CAM Principles & Applications, TMH, 2nd Edition, 2008.
2. Chennakesava R. Alavala, CAD/CAM: Concepts and Applications, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2 nd Printing,
2008.
3. David F. Rogers, Mathematical Elements for Computer Graphics, McGraw-Hill, 2nd Edition, 1990
4. Tien-Chien Chang, Richard A. Wysk, Hsu-Pin Wang, Computer-Aided Manufacturing, Pearson
Prentice Hall, 3rd Edition, 2006.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 25 25
Understand 35 25
Apply 20 25
Analyze 20 25
Evaluate - -
Create - -
Total (%) 100 100
Remember
1. How does FMC differ from FMS?
2. List the objectives of CAQC.
3. Describe product life cycle.
4. Describe the parametric representation of surface.
5. List the characteristics of B-spline curve.
Understand
1. Explain the different computer aided inspection methods.
2. Explain the classification and coding system used in GT in Opitz classification systems.
3. Explain generative CAPP with the help of layout diagram.
4. Explain the function of various components of FMS.
5. Explain the line/polygon classification for B-representation of solids.
Apply
1. Relate constructive solid geometry and boundary representation with neat pictorial examples.
2. With a mathematical example demonstrate trimming of a curve.
5. To generate cubic spline curves using C language.
Analyze
1. Write manual part programming for practicing multiple taper turning operation, simulate and to
2. Write manual part programming for practicing multiple taper turning operation, simulate and to
3. Write manual part programming for practicing multiple threading operation, simulate and to machine
the given component on CNC lathe machine.
118
16ME603 HEAT TRANSFER

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain basic modes of heat transfer and compute temperature distribution in steady state and unsteady
state heat conduction
2. Analyze heat transfer through extended surfaces
3. Interpret and analyze free & forced convection
4. Comprehend the phenomena and flow regimes of boiling and condensation
5. Apply LMTD and NTU methods to design heat exchangers
6. Explain the principles of radiation heat transfer
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO7
1 3 2 2 -
2 3 3 2 -
3 3 3 3 -
4 3 2 2 1
5 - 3 3 1
6 3 2 2 3
Unit I
Introduction- Conduction Heat Transfer-One Dimensional Steady State Conduction Heat Transfer
Modes and mechanisms of heat transfer – Basic laws of heat transfer. General heat conduction equation in
Cartesian, Cylindrical and Spherical coordinates. Homogeneous slabs, hollow cylinders and spheres – overall
heat transfer coefficient – electrical analogy – Critical radius of insulation. Systems with variable Thermal
conductivity – systems with heat sources or Heat generation, extended surface (fins). Heat Transfer – Long
Fin, Fin with insulated tip and Short Fin
Twisted fin
12+4 Hours
Unit II
One Dimensional Transient Conduction Heat Transfer-Convective Heat Transfer
Systems with negligible internal resistance – Significance of Biot and Fourier Numbers - Chart solutions of
transient conduction systems., Dimensional analysis as a tool for experimental investigation – Buckingham Pi
Theorem and method, application for developing semi – empirical non- dimensional correlation for convection
heat transfer – Concepts of Continuity, Momentum and Energy Equations.
Classification of systems based on causation of flow, Significance of non-dimensional numbers
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Forced convection-External Flows-Free Convection-Heat Transfer with Phase Change-Boiling-
Condensation
Concepts about hydrodynamic and thermal boundary layer and use of empirical correlations for convective
heat transfer -Flat plates and Cylinders. Development of Hydrodynamic and thermal boundary layer along a
vertical plate – Use of empirical relations for Vertical plates and pipes. Pool boiling – Regimes, Calculations
on Nucleate boiling, Critical Heat flux and Film boiling. Film wise and drop wise condensation. Film
condensation on vertical.
Film condensation horizontal cylinders using empirical correlation
11+3 Hours
Unit IV
Heat Exchangers- Radiation Heat Transfer
Classification of heat exchangers – overall heat transfer Coefficient and fouling factor – Concepts of LMTD
and NTU methods - Problems using LMTD and NTU methods. Emissivity characteristics and laws of black-
body radiation – Irradiation– laws of Planck, Wien, Kirchoff, Lambert, Stefan and Boltzmann– heat exchange
between two black bodies – concepts of shape factor.
Heat exchange between grey bodies, radiation shields
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
119
Textbook (s)
1. R. K. Rajput, Heat and Mass Transfer, S. Chand Publishers, 6 th Edition, 2014
2. R. C. Sachdeva, Fundamentals of Engineering Heat and Mass Transfer, New Age publishers, 4 th
Edition, 2010
3. J. P Holman, Heat Transfer, McGraw Hill publishers, 9 th Edition, 2002
4. S. Subramanyan, C P Kothandaraman, Heat and Mass Transfer Data Book, New Age Publishers, 8th
Edition, 2014
Reference (s)
1. Dr. M. L. Mathur & Prof. F. S. Mehta, Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer,2nd Edition, 2012
2. Welty, Wicks, Wilson, Rorrer, Fundamentals of momentum, heat, and mass transfer, Wiley, 5 th Edition,
2010
3. F.P. Incropera, D. Dewitt, T Bergman, A.S. Lavine, Principles of heat and mass transfer”, Wiley, 7 th
Edition, 2013
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 30 20 -
Understand 30 30 -
Apply 40 50 60
Analyze - - 40
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define various modes of heat transfer.
2. Define Buckingham‟s π – theorem.
3. What is lumped system analysis? When is it applicable?
4. Define boundary layer thickness.
5. Give some examples to counter flow heat exchanger.
6. Define the properties reflectivity and transmissivity and discuss the different forms of reflection.
Understand
1. Explain the method of heat transfer occurs when particles with a a lot of energy take place of those
with less.
2. When you get into a car with hot black leather in the middle of the summer and you get your buns
toasted, justify the above statement.
3. Explain over all heat transfer coefficient.
4. List and explain the various non-dimensional parameters used in forced convection.
5. Explain the differences between natural convection and forced convection, give some examples to free
and forced convection.
Apply
1. Develop the one-dimensional steady state heat conduction equation for without internal heat generation
case.
2. Consider a 0.8-m-high and 1.5-m-wide double-pane window consisting of two 4-mm-thick layers of
glass (k = 0.78 W/m °C) separated by a 10-mm-wide stagnant air space (k=0.026 W/m °C). Determine
the steady rate of heat transfer through this double-pane window and the temperature of its inner
surface for a day during which the room is maintained at 20°C while the temperature of the outdoors is
= 10°C. Take the convection heat transfer coefficients on the inner and outer surfaces of the window to
be h1 =10 W/m2 °C and h2 =40 W/m2 °C, which includes the effects of radiation
3. Air at 20C, at a pressure of 1 bar is flowing over a flat plate at a velocity of 3 m/s. if the plate
maintained at 60C, calculate the heat transfer per unit width of the plate. Assuming the length of the
plate along the flow of air is 2m.
4. Water is to be boiled at atmospheric pressure in a mechanically polished steel pan placed on top of a
heating unit. The inner surface of the bottom of the pan is maintained at 110°C. If the diameter of the
47
120
bottom of the pan is 25 cm, determine (a) the rate of heat transfer to the water and (b) the rate of
evaporation.
5. Calculate the following for an industrial furnace in the form of a black body and emitting radiation at
2500 0C: i) monochromatic emissive power at 1.2μm wave length ii) Wave length at which the
emission is maximum iii) Maximum emissive power iv) Total emissive power.
Analyze
1. The inside and outside surfaces of a hollow sphere of radii r 1 and r2 are maintained at t1 and t2
respectively. The thermal conductivity of sphere material varies with temperature as given below:
k=k0(1+αt1+βt2), derive the expression for total heat flow rate through the sphere.
2. Consider heat transfer between two identical hot solid bodies and the air surrounding them. The first
solid is being cooled by a fan while the second one is allowed to cool naturally. For which solid is the
lumped system analysis more.
3. What is the heat transfer through a fluid conduction and when is it a convection process? For what case
is the rate of heat transfer being higher? How does the convection heat transfer coefficient differ from
the thermal conductivity of a fluid?
4. Physically, what does the Grashof number represent? How does the Grashof number differ from the
Reynolds number?
5. Consider film condensation on a vertical plate. Will the heat flux be higher at the top or at the bottom
of the plate? Why?
Evaluate
1. How do rating problems in heat transfer differ from the sizing problems?
2. A very long fin 25 mm diameter copper rod (k=380 W/m0C) extends horizontally from a plane heated
wall at 1200C. The temperature of the surrounding air is 25 0C and the convective heat transfer
coefficient is 9 W/m2 0C. Determine the heat loss.
3. Under what conditions will the temperature rise of the cold fluid in a heat exchanger be equal to the
temperature drop of the hot fluid?
4. How is the thermal resistance due to fouling in a heat exchanger accounted for? How do the fluid
velocity and temperature affect fouling?
Create
1. The deep human body temperature of a healthy person remains constant at 37°C while the temperature
and the humidity of the environment change with time. Discuss the heat transfer mechanisms between
the human body and the environment both in summer and winter, and explain how a person
2. Consider the cooking process of a roast beef in an oven. Would you consider this to be a steady or
transient heat transfer problem? Also, would you consider this to be one, two or three-dimensional?
3. When the earth is closest to the sun, we have winter in the northern hemisphere. Explain why. Also
explain why we have summer in the northern hemisphere when the earth is farthest away from the sun.
121
16ME604 MECHATRONICS
3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain different control methods used in the typical mechatronics systems
2. Infer signal condition and the hardware used for signal conditioning
3. Outline the use of common electrical and mechanical components to achieve precision in Mechanical,
Electrical, Fluid & Thermal systems
4. Explain the need and working of interfacing circuits and their components
5. Illustrate the working principles of various electromechanical drives and micro controllers
6. Explain PLCs, PMCs and Feedback components and their applications in mechatronic systems
COs – POs Mapping
1 3 - - 3 2
2 3 3 2 - 2
3 3 3 3 3 3
4 3 3 3 1 2
5 3 - 2 2 2
6 3 3 3 2 3
Unit I
Introduction
Definition – Trends - Control Methods: Standalone, PC Based (Real Time Operating Systems, Graphical User
Interface, Simulation) - Applications: SPM, Robot, CNC, FMS, CIM.
Signal Conditioning
Introduction – Hardware - Digital I/O, Analog input – ADC, resolution, sped channels Filtering Noise using
passive components – Resistors, capacitors - Amplifying signals using OP amps – Digital Signal Processing –
Low pass.
High pass, notch filtering.
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Precision Mechanical Systems
Pneumatic Actuation Systems - Electro-Pneumatic Actuation Systems - Hydraulic Actuation Systems -
Electro-Hydraulic Actuation Systems - Timing Belts – Ball Screw and Nut - Linear Motion Guides - Linear
Bearings - Harmonic Transmission - Bearings- Motor / Drive Selection.
Electronic interface subsystems
TTL, CMOS interfacing - Sensor interfacing – Actuator interfacing – solenoids, motors Isolation schemes-
opto- coupling, buffer IC‟s - Protection schemes – circuit breakers, over current sensing, resettable fuses,
thermal dissipation - Power Supply.
Bipolar transistors / MOSFETs.
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Electromechanical drives
Relays and Solenoids - Stepper Motors - DC brushed motors – DC brushless motors - DC servo motors - 4-
quadrant servo drives, PWM‟s - Pulse Width Modulation – Variable Frequency Drives, Vector Drives - Drive
System load calculation.
Microcontrollers overview
8051 Microcontroller, microprocessor structure – Digital Interfacing - Analog Interfacing - Digital to Analog
Convertors - Analog to Digital Convertors - Applications. Programming –Assembly, C (LED Blinking,
Voltage measurement using ADC).
Voltage measurement using ADC
11+3 Hours
Unit IV
Programmable Logic Controllers
Basic Structure - Programming: Ladder diagram - Timers, Internal Relays and Counters - Shift Registers -
Master and Jump Controls - Data Handling - Analog input / output - PLC Selection - Application.
Programmable Motion Controllers
122
Introduction - System Transfer Function – Laplace transform and its application in analyzing differential
equation of a control system.
Feedback Devices
Position, Velocity Sensors - Optical Incremental encoders - Proximity Sensors: Inductive, Capacitive, Infrared
- Continuous and discrete processes - Control System Performance & tuning - Digital Controllers - P, PI, PID
Control - Control modes – Position, Velocity and Torque - Velocity Profiles – Trapezoidal - S. Curve -
Electronic Gearing - Controlled Velocity Profile - Multi axis Interpolation, PTP, Linear, Circular - Core
functionalities – Home, Record position, Go to Position - Applications: SPM, Robotics.
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. W. Bolton, Mechatronics, Pearson Education India 3 rd Edition, 2006.
2. Lawrence J. Kamm, Understanding Electro-Mechanical Engineering – An Introduction to Mechatronics,
IEEE Press,2nd Edition, 2000.
Reference (s)
1. Sabri Cetinkunt, Mechatronics with Experiments, John Wiley & Sons, Illustrated Reprint, 2015
2. HMT, Mechatronics, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 1st Edition, 2000.
3. Mahalik, Mechatronics, TMH, 1st Edition, 2003.
4. David and Alcaire Michael B. Histand, Introduction Mechatronics, TMH, 4 th Edition, 2006.
5. Bradley, D.A., Dawspn, D, Buru, N.C. and Loader, AJ., Mechatronics, Chapman and Hall, 2 nd Edition,
1993
6. Michael B. Histand and David G. Alciatore, Introduction to Mechatronics and Measurement Systems,
McGraw Hill International Editions, 1999
Web Reference (s)
1. http://www.engr.sjsu.edu/sjlee/vendors.htm
2. www.engr.colostate.edu/~dga/mechatronics/resources.html
3. www.NI.com
4. www.cambridgemechatronics.com/contact/terms
5. www.pdf-free-download.com/mechatronics-labs.pdf
6. www.mechatronics.me.wisc.edu
Video Reference (s)
1. http://video_demos.colostate.edu/mechatronics/index.html#actuators
2. http://video.designworldonline.com/channel/MECHANICAL
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 25 25 -
Understand 55 50 -
Apply 20 25 50
Analyze - - 40
Evaluate - - 10
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. What is signal conditioning?
2. List various control methods using in mechatronic systems
Understand
1. Explain role of various hardware components used in the signal conditioning.
2. Outline the purpose and role of interfacing unit in the electronic circuits.
Apply
48
123
1. Choose appropriate electronic circuit components suitable for building an interfacing circuit for a
circuit.
Analyze
1. Compare programmable logic controllers with programmable motion controllers.
124
16ME005 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain the importance of AM in Manufacturing
2. Distinguish different AM Technologies
3. Illustrate STL file processing
4. Select suitable materials for AM
5. Analyze different methods for Post-processing of AM parts
6. Explain the non-thermal and thermal AM techniques
COs – POs Mapping
1 3 1 1 1
2 3 1 1 1
3 3 3 2 2
4 3 1 2 2
5 3 1 1 2
6 3 1 2 2
Unit I
Introduction to Additive Manufacturing
Introduction to AM, AM evolution, Distinction between AM & CNC machining, Advantages of AM, AM
process chain: Conceptualization, CAD, conversion to STL, Transfer to AM, STL file manipulation
Machine setup, build, removal and clean up, post processing.
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Classification of AM processes-Design for AM
Liquid polymer system, discrete particle system, molten material systems and solid sheet system. Motivation,
DFMA concepts and objectives, AM unique capabilities, exploring design freedoms, Design tools for AM,
Part Orientation, Removal of Supports, Hollowing out parts, Inclusion of Undercuts and Other Manufacturing
Constraining Features, Interlocking Features.
Reduction of Part Count in an Assembly, Identification of markings/ numbers etc.
11+3 Hours
Unit III
Guidelines for process selection- AM Applications
Introduction, selection methods for a part, challenges of selection, example system for preliminary selection,
production planning and control. Functional models, Pattern for investment and vacuum casting, Medical
models, art models, Engineering analysis models, Rapid tooling, new materials development, Bi-metallic parts,
Re-manufacturing, application examples for Aerospace, defense, automobile.
Bio-medical and general engineering industries
12+4 Hours
Unit IV
3D Scanners, Post processing of AM parts-Future Directions of AM
Introduction to 3D Scanners and its applications, Support material removal, surface texture improvement,
accuracy improvement, aesthetic improvement, preparation for use as a pattern, property enhancements using
non-thermal and thermal techniques. Introduction, new types of products and employment.
Digiproneurship.
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. C C Kai, L K Fai, Rapid Prototyping: Principles & Applications, World Scientific Publishing Co. Pvt.
Ltd, 3rd Edition, 2010
2. I Gibson, D W Rosen, Brent Stucker, Additive Manufacturing Technologies: Rapid Prototyping to
Direct Digital Manufacturing, 2nd Edition, Springer, 2010
125
Reference (s)
1. D.T. Pham, S.S. Dimov, Rapid Manufacturing: The Technologies and Applications of Rapid
Prototyping and Rapid Tooling, Springer Science & Business Media, Technology & Engineering, 2012
2. Paul F. Jacobs, Rapid prototyping & Manufacturing: Fundamentals of Stereolithography, Society of
Manufacturing Engineers, computer and Automated systems, Association of SME, 1992
3. Ali K. Kamrani, Emand Abouel Nasr, Rapid Prototyping: Theory & Practice, Springer, 2006
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 25 20 -
Understand 35 30 -
Apply 20 25 40
Analyze 20 25 40
Evaluate - - 20
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. What is additive manufacturing?
2. List the advantages and disadvantages of RP.
3. Define the Rapid Tooling.
4. What is Virtual prototyping?
5. Name the inputs required for product development.
6. What are the benefits of rapid tooling?
Understand
1. Classify and explain the AM process.
2. Explain how AM has influenced the 3D printing technology.
3. Outline a note on the impact of AM on product development.
4. Explain the transition of RP to AM.
5. Classify the role of process planning in SLA?
6. Compare the liquid based and solid based AM systems
Apply
1. Identify the solid, liquid and powder-based system of 3DP.
2. Apply the pre and post processing in BPM.
3. Choose the few case studies of 3DP.
4. Why surface deviation occurs in SLS?
5. Identify are the materials used in SLS.
6. Why pre-build process is required in SLA?
Analyze
1. Compare the liquid based and solid based AM systems.
2. Classify and explain the AM process.
3. Classify the need and development of AM systems.
4. List out the basic requirements of product development.
5. Formulate the applications of rapid tooling.
6. List the merits of virtual prototyping.
Evaluate
1. Evaluate the AM with an example.
2. Formulate STL file format and post processing of a part.
3. List out the benefits and applications of AM.
4. Explain in detail of impact of AM on product development.
5. Describe about various SLA materials, advantages and applications.
1. What are the merits of product development?
Create
49
126
1. Explain how rapid production helped to evolve additive manufacturing.

2. What are the limitations of AM?
3. Explain how AM has influenced the 3D printing technology.
4. Formulate the applications of rapid tooling.
5. Why surface deviation occurs in SLS?
127
16ME006 AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain different types of automobiles, engine construction, turbo charging and supercharging
2. Illustrate the necessity and working of elements of transmission system
3. Demonstrate the elements of vehicle control systems viz., steering, suspension, braking and electrical
systems
4. Outline electrical systems, engine specifications and safety features of automobiles
5. Summarize the emission control methods used in automobiles
6. Identify different causes for engine failures and outline engine service
COs – POs Mapping
1 3 1 1 - -
2 3 2 2 - -
3 - 3 3 - -
4 3 2 1 - -
5 3 1 1 3 3
6 3 1 2 1 1
Unit I
Introduction
Components of four-wheeler automobile - chassis and body - power unit - power transmission - rear wheel
drive, front wheel drive, 4-wheel drive - types of automobile engines, engine construction, turbo charging and
super charging - oil filters, oil pumps - crank case ventilation – reboring, de carbonization
Transmission system
Clutches, principle, types, cone clutch, single plate clutch, multi plate clutch, magnetic and centrifugal
clutches, - gear boxes, types, sliding mesh, construct mesh, synchro mesh gear boxes, epicyclic gear box, over
drive torque converter. Propeller shaft - universal joint- differential- rear axles- types - wheels and tyres
Hardening of crank shaft.
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Steering system
Steering geometry - camber, castor, king pin rake, combined angle toe-in, center point steering. types of
steering mechanism - Ackerman steering mechanism, Davis steering mechanism, steering gears - types.
Suspension system
Objects of suspension systems - rigid axle suspension system, torsion bar, shock absorber, Independent
suspension system.
Braking system
Mechanical brake system, hydraulic brake system, master cylinder, wheel cylinder tandem master cylinder
requirement of brake fluid, pneumatic and vacuum brakes.
Assembly of steering suspension and braking system in the assembly line of an automobile assembly unit
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Electrical system
Charging circuit, generator, current – voltage regular - starting system, bendix drive mechanism solenoid
switch, lighting systems, horn, wiper, fuel gauge - oil pressure gauge, engine temperature indicator etc.
Engine specification and safety systems
Introduction- engine specifications with regard power, speed, torque, no. of cylinders and arrangement,
lubrication and cooling etc. Safety: Introduction, safety systems - seat belt, air bags, bumper, anti-lock brake
system (ABS), wind shield, suspension sensors, traction control, mirrors, central locking and electric windows,
speed control.
Process parameters study during engine testing in a test rig
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Engine emission control
128
Introduction - types of pollutants, mechanism of formation, concentration measurement, methods of

controlling- engine modification, exhaust gas treatment-thermal and catalytic converters - use of alternative
fuels for emission control - National and International pollution standards
Engine service
Introduction, service details of engine cylinder head, valves and valve mechanism, piston connecting rod
assembly, cylinder block, crank shaft and main bearings, engine reassembly-precautions.
Study of National and International standards relating to Engine emissions
10+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Kirpal Singh, Automobile Engineering Vol. I & Vol. 2, Standard publishers, 12 th Edition, 2011.
2. William Crouse and Donald L Anglin, Automotive Mechanics, TMH Distributors, 10 th Edition, 2010.
Reference (s)
1. 1. P.S Gill, Text book of Automobile Engineering, S.K. Kataria & Sons New Delhi, 2 nd Edition, 2012.
2. 2. Joseph Heitner, Automotive mechanics: principles and practice, CBS Publishers New Delhi, 1 st
Edition,1998.
3. 3. Jack Erjavec, Automotive Technology: a system approach, Thomson/Delmar Learning, 1 st Edition,
2011.
4. 4. K.M. Moeed, Automobile Engineering, S. K. Kataria & Sons, 1 st Edition, 2012
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 25 15 -
Understand 55 55 -
Apply 20 25 50
Analyze - - 40
Evaluate - - 10
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Classify the components of an automobile.
2. State the main parts of an automobile engine.
3. Define supercharging.
4. State the objectives of lubrication.
5. List the three methods of decarbonizing.
Understand
1. Explain positive crankcase ventilation.
2. Explain the different processes for hardening of crankshafts.
3. Derive the expression for torque transmitted in a single plate clutch.
4. Classify the different types of oil pumps.
Apply
1. In a situation in cold countries the water in the radiator freezes as the temperature fall below zero
degrees centigrade. What measures would you suggest for encountering this situation?
2. A sliding mesh type of gear box with forward speeds only is to be designed. The gear box should have
the following gear ratios available approximately: 1.0, 1.5, 2.5 and 3.9. The center distance between the
lay shaft and the main shaft is 78 mm and the smallest gear is to have at least 16 teeth with a diametric
pitch of 3.25 mm. Calculate the number of teeth of various gears and exact gear ratios thus available
3. An engine equipped with a cylinder having a bore of 15 cm and a stroke of 45 cm operates on an Otto
cycle. If the clearance volume is 2000 cm3, compute a) Swept Volume b) Compression ratio c) air
standard efficiency d) Net work done e) Mean effective pressure.
50
129
4. Two engines are to operate on Otto and Diesel cycles with the following data: Maximum temperature
1400 K, exhaust temperature 700 K. State of air at the beginning of compression 0.1 MPa, 300 K.
Estimate the compression ratios, the maximum pressure and efficiencies of the respective cycles.
Analyze
1. Analyze the braking torque provided by each shoe in a drum brake with 380 mm diameter. The shoes
are anchored together 150 mm away from the brake drum center. The free ends of the two shoes are
pushed apart with a force of 320 N which may be considered acting at a distance of 320 mm from the
anchor. Assume that the normal pressure on the brake shoes act at right angles to the line joining the
anchor with the brake drum centre and the resultant frictional force acts at a distance of 200 mm from
the brake drum centre. Take coefficient of friction between the shoes and the drum as 0.5.
2. Show that the braking torque for leading shoe (T T) and trailing shoe (TL) is
W . L  B .R
TL 
f
M   B .R f
and
W . L  B .R
TT 
f
M   B .R f
3. Compare between turbocharging and supercharging.

4. Due to some accident, only one-cylinder bore has been damaged and it is found that it needs reboring
to next oversize, whereas other cylinder bores are perfectly alright. Should only the affected cylinder be
rebored and fitted with oversize piston or should all the cylinders be rebored oversize? Justify your
answer.
Evaluate
1. In an air standard Otto cycle, the compression ratio is 7 and the compression begins at 35ºC and 0.1
MPa. The maximum temperature of the cycle is 1100ºC. Find (a) the temperature and the pressure at
various points in the cycle, (b) the heat supplied per kg of air, (c) work done per kg of air, (d) the cycle
efficiency and (e) the MEP of the cycle.
2. How do you assess the performance of the Otto Cycle?
3. How do you assess the performance of Diesel cycle?
Create
1. Create a computer program depicting the sequence of steps involved in engine disassembly.
2. Create a computer program depicting the sequence of steps involved in engine assembly. Use functions
and subroutines wherever required for engine sub-assemblies.
130
16ME007 CONTROL SYSTEMS

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Build mathematical models for controlling physical systems
2. Formulate a control system using block diagram and signal flow graph techniques
3. Analyze the transient and steady state performances of a control system
4. Contrast the stability of a system using time domain and frequency domain techniques
5. Design different compensators and controllers in time/frequency domain
6. Compute the controllability and observability of a given physical system
COs – POs Mapping
1 3 3 3 3 2
2 3 3 2 1 2
3 3 3 1 1 1
4 3 3 3 2 2
5 3 3 2 2 2
6 3 3 3 2 3
Unit I
Mathematical Models of Physical Systems
Concepts of Control Systems-Open Loop and closed loop control systems, Classification of control systems,
Transfer function, Modeling of Electric systems, Translational and rotational mechanical systems, Block
diagram reduction Technique, Signal flow graph, Feedback Characteristics-Effects of feedback.
Effect of feedback on disturbance
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Time Domain Analysis
Standard test signals, Time response of first and second order systems, time domain specifications,
characteristic Equation, Static error constants, generalized error series, Effects of P, PI, PD and PID
controllers, Concept of stability, Routh-Hurwitz stability criterion, Difficulties and limitations in RH stability
criterion, Root locus concept, construction of root loci, Stability analysis using root locus, Effects of addition
of poles and zeros on root locus plot
PID controller, Rate feedback controller
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Frequency Domain Analysis
Frequency response characteristics, Frequency domain specifications, Time and frequency domain parameters
correlations, Bode plot, transfer function from the Bode plot, Stability Analysis using Bode Plot, Polar Plot and
Nyquist‟s stability criterion.
M & N circles, Nicholas Chart
12+3 Hours
Unit IV
State Space Analysis and Compensators
Concepts of state, state space modeling of physical systems, Representation of state space model in different
canonical forms, Transfer function and state space model correlations, Solution of state equations, State
Transition Matrix and it‟s Properties, Basic concept of Controllability and Observability. Lag, lead and lag-
lead compensators.
Diagonalization
10+5 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. I.J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, Control Systems Engineering by New Age International (P) Limited, 6 th
Edition, 2015.
2. Katsuhiko Ogata, Modern Control Engineering, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 4 th Edition, 2006.
Reference (s)
131
1. K. Alice Mary and P. Ramana, Control Systems by Universities Press (India) Pvt. Ltd., 1 st Edition,
2016.
2. Smarajit Ghosh, Control Systems, Pearson education. 2nd Edition, 2012.
3. Benjamin C.Kuo, Automatic Control Systems, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2011
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 20 20 -
Understand 40 20 -
Apply 35 60 50
Analyze - - 50
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define a closed loop control system.
2. List any 4 applications of closed loop control system.
3. Define transfer function
4. List 2 advantages of Signal flow graph over Block-diagram reduction technique.
5. List any 3 properties of state transition matrix
6. Label different types of frequency domain analysis methods
Understand
1. Differentiate SISO and MIMO systems.
2. Explain the traffic control system concepts using open loop as well as closed loop system.
3. Derive f-v and f-i analysis.
4. Explain different cases in R-H criteria.
5. Derive state transition matrix.
6. Explain Mason‟s gain formula.
Apply
1. Apply Open Loop and closed loop control systems for the person walking on a road.
2. Construct root locus for the open loop T.F function G(s) = (s+2)/(s+1) (s+3)
3. Evaluate transfer function for the state space equation give bellow
x = AX+BU; y = CX+DU
4. Construct the Bode plot for given open loop transfer function
G(s) = (s+2)/(s+1) (s+3)
5. Develop the Nyquist plot for the given open loop transfer function. G(s) = (s+2)/(s+1) (s+3)
Analyse
1. Compare the properties of time domain and frequency domain analysis.
2. Analyse the effect of disturbance on the system performance due to feedback
3. Feedback will increase instability of the system. Justify?
4. Distinguish the advantage and disadvantages of the root locus and Bode plot.
5. Illustrate the variation of root locus with respect to variations in K.
6. Formulate the state space model in different canonical forms
51
132
16ME008 FATIGUE, FRACTURE AND CREEP

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Illustrate the characteristics of fracture surfaces and concept of energy release rate
2. Infer the modes of fracture and plastic zone at the crack tip
3. Outline linear elastic fracture mechanics and extend critical stress intensity factor as the failure
prediction parameter
4. Summarize EPFM and extend CTOD as the failure prediction parameter
5. Explain high cycle fatigue and low cycle fatigue
6. Illustrate fatigue damage and micro mechanisms
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO3
1 3 2 2
2 3 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 3 3 3
5 3 2 2
6 3 2 2
Unit I
Introduction-Griffiths analysis
Prediction of mechanical failure. Macroscopic failure modes; brittle and ductile behaviour, Fracture in brittle
and ductile materials – characteristics of fracture surfaces; intergranular and intra-granular failure, cleavage
and micro-ductility, growth of fatigue cracks, The ductile/brittle fracture transition temperature for notched
and un notched components. Concept of energy release rate, G, and fracture energy, R. Modification for
ductile materials, loading conditions.
Concept of R curves.
13+4 Hours
Unit II
Linear Elastic Fracture Mechanics, (LEFM)-The effect of Constraint
Three loading modes and the state of stress ahead of the crack tip, stress concentration factor, stress intensity
factor and the material parameter the critical stress intensity factor. Definition of plane stress and plane strain
and the effect of component thickness, The plasticity at the crack tip and the principles behind the approximate
derivation of plastic zone shape and size.
Limits on the applicability of LEFM
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Elastic-Plastic Fracture Mechanics (EPFM)
The definition of alternative failure prediction parameters. Crack Tip Opening Displacement
J integral
7+3 Hours
Unit IV
Fatigue-Micro mechanisms of fatigue damage
Definition of terms used describe fatigue cycles, High Cycle Fatigue, Low Cycle Fatigue, mean stress R ratio,
strain and load control. S-N curves. Goodman‟s rule and Miners rule. Fatigue limits and initiation and
propagation control, leading a consideration of factors enhancing fatigue resistance.
Total life and damage tolerant approaches life prediction.
13+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. T.L. Anderson, Fracture Mechanics Fundamentals and Applications, 2 nd Edition, CRC press, 1995
2. S. Suresh, Fatigue of Materials, Cambridge University Press, 2 nd Edition, 2012
Reference (s)
1. B. Lawn, Fracture of Brittle Solids, Cambridge Solid State Science Series, 2 nd Edition,1993
133
2. J.F. Knott, Fundamentals of Fracture Mechanics, Butterworths, 1 st Edition, 1973

3. J.F. Knott, P Withey, Worked examples in Fracture Mechanics, Institute of Materials
4. H.L. Ewald and R.J.H. Wanhill Fracture Mechanics, Edward Arnold, 1984
5. L.B. Freund and S. Suresh, Thin Film Materials Cambridge University Press,2003
6. G. E. Dieter, Mechanical Metallurgy, McGraw Hill, 1988
7. D.C. Suffer and L.T. Dame, Inelastic Deformation of Metals, Wiley 1996
8. F.R.N. Nabarro, H.L. DeVilliers, The Physics of Creep, Taylor and Francis, 1995
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 25 25 -
Understand 35 25 -
Apply 40 50 60
Analyze - - 40
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Explain with sketch “GOODMAN” method for combination of stresses is useful in design.
2. With the help of a neat sketch explain the process of crack initiation
3. With the help of a neat sketch explain the stages of crack initiation
4. Explain the phenomenon of crack propagation
Understand
1. Discuss Griffith theory for brittle fracture. Derive the formula for average applied stress at which crack
spreads.
2. What are the various factors to be considered while designing machine parts to avoid fatigue failure.
3. Is it possible to protect the surface from cracks? If yes describe the various methods for crack
protection.
Apply
1. Explain from the application point of view low cycle fatigue with suitable examples.
2. Differentiate between Stress Intensity Factor and Plane stress fracture toughness
Analyze
1. Explain in detail the effect of thickness on fracture toughness and also give examples as to
how this value would be useful in industry scenario
2. Explain the different conditions that can cause the failure of a structural component.
Evaluate
1. A Machine component is subjected to a flexural stress which fluctuates between +300MN/m2 and –
150 MN/m2. Determine the value of minimum ultimate strength (i) Goodman Relation (ii) Soderberg
Relation.
2. A cylindrical 1045 steel bar is subjected to repeated compression-tension stress cycling along its axis.
If the load applied is 2200 N compute the minimum allowable bar diameter to ensure that fatigue
failure will not occur. Assume a factor of safety 2.0 (Assume any Missing data)
52
134
16CE007 DISASTER MANAGEMENT (OPEN ELECTIVE)

4003
Course Outcomes
1. Demonstrate the interdisciplinary nature of disaster management
2. Apply the knowledge to formulate different risk management frameworks and pre-preparedness tools
for natural and manmade disasters
3. Summarize the risk and vulnerability associated with disasters
4. Apply different technologies in the management of disasters
5. Outline the importance of education and preparedness in the management of disasters
6. Infer the role of different organizations in disaster management
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO2
1 2
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 1
6 1
Unit I
Introduction to Disaster Management and Management of Natural Disasters
Introduction: Interdisciplinary nature of the subject, Disaster Risk Reduction–Global Policies and Practices,
Basic Strategies and Practices of Disaster Reduction, Linking Disaster Risk Reduction with Global
Framework, Integrated Disaster Risk Management and Post-Disaster Response-Management of Natural
Disasters: Floods, Droughts, Earthquakes, Global Warming, Cyclones, Landslides, Tsunamis and Post
Tsunami hazards along the Indian Coast
Significant Aspects of Disasters-Global Earthquake Safety Initiative-Prediction of Tsunamis-Typology of flood
risks-Framework for Preparedness and Mitigation
12+3 Hours
Unit II
Management of Manmade Disasters and Risk & Vulnerability
Management of Manmade Disasters: Temporal Transport Hazard Dynamics, Solid Waste Management: Post–
disaster, A Threat of Bio-terrorism in Mega Cities, Rail and Air craft‟s accidents, emerges infectious diseases,
AIDS and Climate Change Risk Reduction-Risk & Vulnerability: Building Codes and Land Use Planning,
Social Vulnerability, Environmental Vulnerability and Disaster Risk Reduction, Macroeconomic Management
and Sustainable Development, Financial Management of Disaster related Economic Losses
Temporal Analysis of Transport-Capacity Building and Institutional Strengthening-Climate Risk Management -
Decision Framework
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Role of Technology in Disaster Management
Role of Technology in Disaster Management: Implementation Technology for Disaster Reduction, Disaster
Management for Infrastructure, Geospatial Information in agriculture Drought Assessment and Monitoring,
Multimedia Technology in Disaster Risk Management Training-Education and Community: Education in
Disaster Risk Reduction , Essentials of School Disaster Education, Community Capacity and Disaster
Resilience, Community-based Disaster Recovery, Community-based Disaster Management and Social Capital,
Designing Resilience
Disaster Management Program-Building Community Capacity-Remote Sensing and GIS
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Multi Sectional and Crosscutting Issues
Multi Sectional Issues: Impact of Disasters on Poverty and Deprivation, Climate Change Adaptation and
Human Health, Health Hazards and Environmental Risk-Crosscutting Issues: Forest Management and Disaster
Risk Reduction, Institutional Capacity in Disaster Management, Corporate Sector and Disaster Risk Reduction,
Essentials of Pre-disaster Recovery Planning
135
Poverty Vulnerability Indices-Protective Functions of Forest Resources-Corporate Organizations and Disaster

Potential-Community Focused Approach
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. R. Shaw and R. R. Krishna Murthy, Disaster Management: Global Challenges and Local Solutions,
Universities Press (India) Private Limited, Hyderabad, 1 st Edition ,2009
2. J. Singh, Disaster Management: Future Challenges and Opportunities, I.K. International Publishing
House Private Limited, New Delhi, 2nd Edition, 2007
Reference (s)
1. D. P. Coppola, Introduction to International Disaster Management, Elsevier Publications, 3rd Edition,
2011
2. U. Ranke, Natural Disaster Risk Management, Springer International Publishing, 2016
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 20 10 -
Understand 30 40 -
Apply 50 50 100
Analyze - - -
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define Hazard.
2. Define Disaster.
3. What are the different phases of disaster management cycle?
4. Define Tsunami.
5. Define landslide.
Understand
1. Explain when hazard become disaster
2. “Prevention is better than cure is opted proverb in the context of disaster management” Explain.
3. Explain the causes of global warming.
4. Explain the difference between environmental and social vulnerabilities.
5. “All the developmental projects will lead to disaster risk”, Justify.
Apply
1. Role of Geospatial technology in disaster management
2. Role of multimedia technology in disaster management
53
136
16EE004 RENEWABLE ENERGY SOURCES (OPEN ELECTIVE)

3003
Course Outcomes
1. Summarize the principles of solar energy systems
2. Demonstrate the applications of solar energy system
3. Illustrate the working principles of wind and biomass energy systems
4. Interpret working principles of geothermal energy system
5. Summarize operation and classification of ocean, tidal, fuel cells, small hydro and magneto hydro
energy system
6. Extend renewable energy sources to distributed generation & micro grids
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO7
1 3 2
2 2 3
3 2 3
4 2 3
5 2 3
6 3 2
Unit I
Introduction Renewable energy
Introduction to renewable energy, advantages of generating power through renewable energy sources –
technical & economical.
Solar Energy
Physics of sun, the solar constant, extra-terrestrial and terrestrial solar radiation, instruments for measuring
solar radiation and sun shine. Flat Plate and Concentrating Collectors, classification of concentrating
collectors, thermal analysis of flat plate collectors, Photo voltaic energy conversion, PV cell model and
characteristics, Maximum power point tracking for photovoltaic power systems. Types of Maximum power
point tracking methods (Perturb and Observe (hill climbing), Incremental Conductance, Fractional short circuit
current, Fractional open circuit voltage)
Solar applications-solar heating /cooling technique
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Wind & Bio-Mass Energy
Sources and potentials, horizontal and vertical axis windmills, performance characteristics, Betz criteria,
maximum power point tracking for wind, types of Maximum power point tracking methods
Principles of Bio-Conversion, Anaerobic/aerobic digestion, Types of Bio-Gas Digesters, gas yield,
Combustion characteristics of bio-gas
Utilization for cooking, IC Engine operation
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Energy Conversion systems - Geothermal & Ocean Energy
Types of Resources (hydrothermal, geo-pressured, hot dry rock), types of wells, and methods of harnessing the
energy (vapour dominated, liquid dominated). Ocean thermal energy conversion, principles, Open loop
&closed loop OTEC Cycles. Tidal energy- potential, conversion techniques-single basin, two basin systems.
Wave energy: conversion techniques.
Fuel cells-Principle of working of various types of fuel cells and their working, Magneto-hydrodynamics
(MHD)-Principle of working of MHD Power plant, Hydrogen generation, battery energy storage system.
Wave, tidal power conversion systems & Small hydro power generation
11+3Hours
Unit IV
Distributed generation & Micro grid
Define grid, distributed generation(DG) & micro grid, importance of DG & micro grid, typical structure and
configuration of a micro grid, AC and DC micro grids, modes of operation and control of micro grid: grid
connected and islanded mode, anti-islanding schemes: passive, active and communication-based techniques.
137
HVDC micro grid system

10+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. G.D. Rai, Non-Conventional Energy Sources, Khanna Publishers, 1 st Edition, 2000.
2. B H Khan, Non-conventional energy resources, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited, 2 nd
Edition, 2001.
3. Alexis Kwasinski, Wayne Weaver, Robert S. Balog, Micro grids and other local area power and energy
systems, Cambridge University Press, 1st Edition, 2016
Reference (s)
1. Tiwari and Ghosal, Renewable energy resources, Narosa Publishing house, 2 nd Edition, 2001.
2. Ranjan Rakesh, Kothari D. P. & Singal K. C., Renewable Energy Sources And Emerging Technologies,
PHI, 2nd Edition, 2013.
3. Nikos Hatziargyriou, Micro grids: Architectures and Control, Wiley, 1st Edition.
4. Electricity Act 2003, Renewable Energy Act 2015.
5. Indian Constitution-Articles 51A, 47, 48A.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 40 40 -
Understand 60 60 80
Apply - - 20
Analyze - - -
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define renewable energy.
2. List out the advantages HAWT.
3. List out the disadvantages non-concentration collector.
4. Define solar radiation.
5. Define solar constant.
6. Define micro-grid.
Understand
1. Explain need of micro-grid.
2. Interpret faraday‟s laws.
3. Explain closed loop OTEC Cycles system.
4. Explain Principle of working of MHD Power plant.
5. Compare HAWT and VAWT.
6. Classify concentrating collectors.
Apply
1. Compute the power coefficient of wind turbine.
2. Demonstrate storage of energy from battery.
3. Assess magnetic flux density due to circular ring.
4. Compute solar cell working.
5. Assess the nature of micro grid.
54
138
16ME009 PRINCIPLES OF ENTREPRENEURSHIP (OPEN ELECTIVE)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain the role of entrepreneur in economic development
2. Demonstrate methods of generating ideas
3. Develop the business plan to start their own enterprise
4. Manage various production aspects such as manufacturing costs control, marketing management and
waste reduction
5. Make financial plan for enterprise
6. Find the institutional support entrepreneurship
COs – POs Mapping
1 3 - 3 2
2 3 - 1 -
3 3 - 1 3
4 3 3 2 2
5 3 3 3 3
6 3 - 1 3
Unit I
Introduction to Entrepreneurship
Definition of Entrepreneur, Entrepreneurial Traits, Entrepreneur Vs. Manager, Entrepreneur Vs Entrepreneur.
The Entrepreneurial decision process- Role of Entrepreneurship in Economic Developments, Ethics and Social
responsibility of entrepreneurs, Woman as entrepreneur.
Opportunities for entrepreneurs in India and abroad
10+3Hours
Unit II
Creating and starting the venture
Sources of new Ideas, Methods of generating ideas, creating problems solving- Product planning and
development process
The business plans
Writing Business plan, Evaluating Business plans, Using and implementing business plans, marketing plan,
financial plan and the organizational plan launching formalities
Nature and scope of business plan
15+5Hours
Unit III
Financing and managing the new venture
Source of Capital, record keeping, recruitment, motivating and leading teams, financial controls, Marketing
and sales controls. E- Commerce and Entrepreneurship
New venture expansion strategies and issues
Features evaluation of joint ventures, acquisitions, merges, franchising, Public issues, rights issues, bonus
issues
Internet advertising
9+3 Hours
Unit IV
Institutional support Entrepreneurship
Role of Dire crate of Industries, District Industries, Centers (DICS), Industrial development Corporation
(IDC), state Financial corporation (SFCs), Small Scale Industries Development Corporations (SSIDCs), Khadi
and village Industries Commission (KVIC), Technical Consultancy Organization (TCO), small Industries
Service Institute (SISI), National Small Industries Corporation (NSIC), Small Industries Development Bank of
India (SIDBI), salient provision under Indian Factories Act, Employees State Insurance Act, Workmen‟s
Compensation Act and payment of Bonus Act.
Labor legislation
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15Hours
139
Textbook (s)
1. Robert Hisrich & Michael Peters, Entrepreneurship, TMH, 5th Edition, 2009.
2. Dollinger, Entrepreneurship, Pearson Education, 4 th Edition, 2004.
Reference (s)
1. Vasant Desal, The Dynamics of Entrepreneurial Development and Management Himalaya publishing
House, 5th Edition, 2017.
2. William A. Sahlman, James Stancill, Arthur Rock, Harvard Business Review on Entrepreneurship,
Harvard Business School Press, 10th Edition, 1999.
3. Robert J. Calvin, Entrepreneurial Management, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2004.
4. Gurmeet Naroola, The Entrepreneurial Connection: East Meets West in the Silicon Valley, Special
edition, TiE, 2001.
5. Bill Bolton & John Thompson, Entrepreneurs Talent, Temperament, Technique, Routledge, 2nd Edition,
2004.
6. Agrawal, A.N. & Agarwal, M.K., Indian Economy: Problems of Development and Planning, New Age
International, 42nd Edition, 2017.
7. Gaurav Datt & Ashwani Mahajan, Dutt & Sundaram‟s Indian Economy, S. Chand, 72 nd Edition, 2016.
8. Srivastava, Industrial Relations Labour Laws, Vikas Publishing House, 6 th Edition, 2005.
9. Aruna Kaulgud, Entrepreneurship Management by Vikas publishing house, 2003.
10. Thomas W. Zimmerer & Norman M. Scalbrorough, Essential of Entrepreneurship and small business
management, PHI, 4th Edition, 2005.
11. Mary Coulter, Entrepreneurship in Action, PHI 2 nd Edition, 2005.
12. Kaplan, Patterns of Entrepreneurship, Willey, 4 th Edition, 2005.
13. ND Kapoor, Industrial Law, Sultan Chand & Sons, 14 th Revised Edition, 2013.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 30 40 -
Understand 70 60 -
Apply - - 35
Analyze - - 45
Evaluate - - 20
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. List the different methods of generating ideas and explain any four methods.
2. List the difference between entrepreneur vs manager.
3. What are the objectives of market research?
4. What are the market research activities? List them.
5. List the important functions of IDBI.
Understand
1. Illustrate the difference between entrepreneur vs manager.
2. Illustrate the characteristics or traits of an entrepreneur.
3. Illustrate the sources of new ideas for entrepreneur.
4. Explain the various steps involved in writing a business plan.
5. What are the various sources of capital required for business venture?
6. Describe the role of E-commerce in entrepreneurship with its applications.
7. Write about marketing plan and financial plans required for an entrepreneur.
8. Illustrate the factories act 1948.
9. Illustrate the reasons for the need of labor legislation becomes important.
55
140
16EC004 FUNDAMENTALS OF GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (OPEN ELECTIVE)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Summarize the history of GPS, NAVSTAR GPS
2. State the working principle of GPS, GNSSs
3. Outline GALILEO, GLONASS signal constellation details
4. Conclude about GPS segments, signal components, IRNSS specifications
5. Demonstrate GPS coordinate systems
6. Classify various datums and map projections
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO6
1 1 2 2
2 1 2 2
3 2 3 3
4 2 3 3
5 3 2 2
6 2 2 2
3–Strongly linked | 2–Moderately linked| 1–Weakly linked
Unit I
Introduction to Global Navigation Satellite Systems
The History of GPS, The Evolution of GPS, Development of NAVSTAR GPS, Block I, Block II, Block IIA,
Block IIR, Block IIR-M, Block IIF and Block III satellites, GPS working principle, Trilateration,
Determination of satellite position, Determining the receiver position: 2D or X-Y Plane, 3D or X-Y-Z Plane,
Ionospheric effects of GPS signals
GIS Integration
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Types of Global Navigation Satellite Systems
GALILEO: Advantages of GALILEO, signal components, PRN codes, Modulation schemes of Galileo signals:
BOC, Alt-BOC, Galileo and GPS Signal interoperability, Improved performance from the combination of
GALILEO and GNSSs, GLONASS: GLONASS constellation details, signal structure: PRN code, P-code, C/A
code, navigation data, signal modulation
GAGAN Navigation system
12+3 Hours
Unit III
GPS Satellite constellation and Signals
GPS system segments: Space segment, Control segment, User segment, GPS Signals: Pseudorandom noise
(PRN) code, C/A code, P code, Navigation data, GPS signal generation: generation of codes, Comparison of
GNSSs in terms of constellation and services, IRNSS: Segments, 1A to 1G specifications, applications
Simulation of GPS signals
10+4 Hours
Unit IV
Coordinate Systems
Geoid, Ellipsoid, Coordinate Systems: Geodetic and Geo centric, CTRS, CIRS, ECEF, Datums: world geodetic
1984, Indian geodetic datum, Conversion between Cartesian and geodetic coordinate frame, Map projections:
Advantages, metric properties, construction, types of map projections
Extract GPS Coordinates for a Google Maps Location
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. G.S. Rao, Global Navigation Satellite Systems, McGraw-Hill Publications, New Delhi, 2010
2. Ahmed El-Rabbany, Introduction to GPS: The Global Positioning System, Artech House, 2002
Reference (s)
1. Scott Gleason and Demoz Gebre- Egziabher, GNSS Applications and Methods, Artech House,685
141
2. Canton Street, Norwood, MA 02062,2009

3. James Ba-Yen Tsui, Fundamentals of GPS receivers-A software approach, John Wiley &Sons,2001
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 20 - -
Understand 45 35 -
Apply - 35 45
Analyze 35 30 55
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define trilateration.
2. List two applications of GPS.
3. List two important specifications of GLONASS
4. Retrieve the need of PRS.
5. Define ranging codes and data.
Understand
1. Illustrate the working principle of GPS.
2. Identify the GPS and GLONASS interoperability issues.
3. Formulate the signal structure of GPS.
4. Abstract geodetic and geocentric coordinate systems.
5. Illustrate the modulation techniques of GALILEO system.
Apply
1. Compute the receiver position using 3D plane.
2. Find the pseudo range on satellite with travelling time of 70ms?
3. Find the free space loss factor on a GPS satellite L1 C/A code signal at a distance of 2x10 7.
1 X
4. Show that the longitude of a point in ECEF is   ta n .
Y
x (t )  A , t   / 2
5. Compute the Fourier transform of a pulse signal defined as
 0, t   / 2
Analyze
1. Compare the features of C/A code and P-code.
2. Outline the unknowns to be solved in acquisition of GPS signal.
3. Contrast BOC and AltBOC modulation techniques.
4. Compare GPS and IRNSS features
5. Contrast ephemeris and almanac codes
56
142
16CS006 COMPUTATIONAL INTELLIGENCE (OPEN ELECTIVE)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Identify and describe Soft Computing Techniques and their roles in building Intelligent Machines
2. Apply Supervised Learning Networks in Machine Learning Problems
3. Illustrate the working of Associative memory networks
4. Apply Unsupervised Learning Networks in Machine Learning Problems
5. Apply Fuzzy Logic and Reasoning to handle Uncertainty and Solve Engineering Problem
6. Apply Genetic Algorithms to solve Optimized Problems
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO3 PO5 PO6
1 3 2 1
2 3 2 1
3 2 3 1
4 3 2 1
5 3 2 2
6 2 3 2
Unit I
Basic Elements of Soft Computing
Basic elements of Soft Computing: Difference between Hard Computing & Soft Computing - Introduction to
Neural Networks - Fuzzy Logic - Genetic Algorithms - Hybrid Systems. Artificial Neural Networks:
Introduction to Artificial Neural Networks - Evolution of Neural Networks - Basic Models of Neural Networks
- McCulloch-Pitts Neuron - Hebb Network.
Basics of Artificial Intelligence and Computational Intelligence
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Supervised Learning Network
Supervised Learning Network: Artificial Neural Networks: Introduction - Perceptron Networks - Back
Propagation Network. Radial basis function Network.
Associative Memory Networks: Auto-associative Memory Network - Hetero auto-associative Memory
Network - Bidirectional Associative Memory (BAM) - Hopfield Networks.
Functional Link Neural Network
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Unsupervised Learning Network
Introduction - Fixed Weight Competitive Nets -Kohonen Self-Organizing Feature Maps - Learning Vector
Quantization - Counter Propagation Networks - Adaptive Resonance Theory Networks (ART-1 & ART-2).
Support Vector Machines and their applications for Classification.
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Fuzzy logic and Genetic Algorithm
Introduction to Fuzzy Sets: Difference between Classical Sets & Fuzzy Sets – Properties.
Classical Relations and Fuzzy Relations: Cartesian product of Relations - Classical Relations - Fuzzy Relations
Membership Functions: Features of Membership Functions -Fuzzification - and Defuzzification
Genetic Algorithm: Basic Concepts – Operators.
Concepts on Fuzzy Controller and its applications -a Simple Application of Genetic Algorithm for function
Optimization.
11+4 Hours
Total: 44+16 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. S. N. Sivanandam, S N Deepa, Principles of Soft Computing, 2 nd Edition, Wiley India, 2007
2. V. Kecman, Learning and soft computing, Pearson Education, India, 2006
3. Russell Eberhart and Yuhui Shi - Computational Intelligence: Concepts to Implementations, 2007
143
Reference(s)
1. G. J. Klir and Bo Yuan, Fuzzy sets and Fuzzy Logic, Prentice Hall, USA, 1995
2. N. J. Nelsson, Artificial Intelligence, A New Synthesis, Harcourt Asia Ltd., 1998
3. D. E. Goldberg, Genetic Algorithms: Search, Optimization and Machine Learning, Addison Wesley,
N.Y,1989
4. S. Haykins, Neural networks: a comprehensive foundation Pearson Education, India, 2002
5. A. P. Engelbrecht, Computational Intelligence: An Introduction, John Wiley & Sons, 2007
6. X. Yu and M. Gen, Introduction to Evolutionary Algorithms, Springer Verlag, 2010
7. Fakhreddine Karray and Clarence de Silva - Soft Computing and Intelligent Systems Design, 2004
8. Andries Engelbrecht - Computational Intelligence: an Introduction, 2007
9. Amit Konar - Computational Intelligence: Principles, Techniques, and Applications, 2005
10. Vojislav Kecman - Learning and Soft Computing: Support Vector Machines, Neural Networks, and
Fuzzy Logic Models, 2001
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 25 15 -
Understand 35 15 -
Apply 20 20 40
Analyze 20 30 40
Evaluate - 20 20
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define Chromosome
2. List two methods in which the information flows in a nervous system
3. List five unsupervised learning algorithms
4. List the difference between classical logic and fuzzy logic
5. List the computational units of ART.
Understand
1. Explain the components of Soft Computing.
2. Explain the role of activation function in exhibiting the output from a neuron.
3. Construct the 5-node pattern {0,1,1,0,1} by Hopfield network and explain the procedure for recalling
and storing.
4. Explain Adaptive Resonance Theory and its type.
5. Explain CPN and illustrate the steps involved in training algorithm of full CPN.
Apply
1. Construct a ANN circuit which makes the flow of data using multilayered and multilevel networks
2. Apply clusters of various datasets maintained by learning approach considering live example
3. Draw the neat architecture of hamming network and trace the inhibitory and excitatory neurons by
considering an inconsistent vector
4. Find the Max-min and Max Product composition of the fuzzy relation matrices R={0.6,0.3,0.2,0.9}
(2x2) S={1,0.5,0.3,0.8,0.4,0.7}(2x3)
5. Find the cardinality for the matrices R={1,4,6,7} (2x2) S={5,2,3,7}(2x2)
Analyze
1. Differentiate between learning and training algorithms considering multilayer perceptron network and
trace the different types of networks obtained.
2. Differentiate between Counter Propagation Network and Adaptive Resonance Theory.
Evaluate
1. Evaluate using Back Propagation algorithm for the below map considering weights, inputs and outputs
57
144
2. Evaluate the instance, that the 2 dimensional input vector X is presented to the three-neuron
ohonennetwork, x=[ 0.52 0.12]. The initial weight vectors, W j are given by
W1=[0.27 , 0.81]
W2=[0.42 , 0.70]
W3=[0.43 , 0.21]
in a form of 2 X 1 matrix. Find the winning neuron using the Euclidean distance and apply kernel self-
organization map. State the differences between register machines and stack machine.
145
16CS007 IOT FOR ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS (OPEN ELECTIVE)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Understand the basic concepts of IoT
2. Summarize the structural knowledge of IoT
3. Explain M2M in the context of Internet of Things
4. Describe the IoT Reference Architecture
5. Design the Internet of things systems for the given problem
6. Apply IoT for various engineering applications
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO5
1 3 3
2 3 3
3 3 3
4 3 3
5 3 3
6 3 3
Unit I
Introduction and Fundamental IoT Mechanisms
What is the Internet of Things? : History of IoT, About IoT, Overview and Motivations, Examples of
Applications, Internet of Things Definitions and Frameworks : IoT Definitions, IoT Architecture, Identification
of IoT Objects and Services, Structural Aspects of the IoT, Environment Characteristics, Traffic
Characteristics, Scalability, Interoperability, Security and Privacy.
IOT paradigm-smart objects-Bits an atoms-goal orientation-RTLS+ GPS-agents+ Multi agent system
12+3 Hours
Unit II
M2M to IoT
A Market Perspective– Introduction, Some Definitions, M2M Value Chains, IoT Value Chains, An emerging
industrial structure for IoT, The international driven global value chain and global information
monopolies. M2M to IoT-An Architectural Overview– Building an architecture, Main design principles and
needed capabilities, An IoT architecture outline, standards considerations.
Introduction to Atmega 8 /16 microcontroller- Architecture of the AVR Microcontroller-Pin description of the
microcontroller-I/O of the microcontroller-IR Sensors.
11+4 Hours
Unit III
IoT Reference Architecture
Introduction, Functional View, Information View, Deployment and Operational View, Other Relevant
architectural views. Real-World Design Constraints- Introduction, Technical Design constraints-hardware is
popular again, Interaction and remote control. Industrial realizing the enterprise integrated Web of Things,
IMC-AESOP: from the Web of Things to the Cloud of Things, Commercial Building Automation-
Introduction, Case study: phase one-commercial building automation today, Case study.
Specification-Domain Model Specification-Information Model Specification-Service Specifications-IoT Level
Specification-Functional View.
11+4 Hours
Unit VI
IoT for Business Applications
Internet of Things Application: IoT for Smart Grid, City Automation, Automotive Applications, Home
Automation, Smart Cards, Process Monitoring / Automation, Sensor Technology, Raspberry- pi Interface,
Smart Healthcare, Smart Transportation, M2M Communication, Smart Metering, Systems and Services
Integration, Hands-on training, Smart Waste Management System.
Sharing Sensor Data on Social Networks-Twitter-Facebook Connection App-Updation of Sensor Data on
Website / Blog.
11+4 Hours
146
Textbook (s)
1. Jan Holler, Vlasios Tsiatsis, Catherine Mulligan, Stefan Avesand, Stamatis Karnouskos, David
Boyle,From Machine-to-Machine to the Internet of Things: Introduction to a New Age of
Intelligence,Academic Press, 1stEdition, 2014.
2. Daniel Minoli, Building the Internet of Things with IPv6 and MIPv6: The Evolving World of M2M
Communications, ISBN: 978-1-118-47347-4, Willy Publications, 2014
3. Bernd Scholz-Reiter, Florian Michahelles, Architecting the Internet of Things, ISBN 978-3- 642-19156-
5 e-ISBN 978-3-642-19157-2, Springer, 2016
Reference Book (s)
1. Parikshit N. Mahalle & Poonam N. Railkar, Identity Management for Internet of Things, River
Publishers, ISBN: 978-87-93102-90-3 (Hard Copy), 978-87-93102-91-0 (ebook), 2015
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 40 40 -
Understand 50 40 20
Apply 10 10 40
Analyze - 10 30
Evaluate - - 10
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Write the major significance of Internet of Things.
2. State the crucial requirement f IoT in terms of application and its supporting natures.
3. List the dominant technologies behind IoT development.
4. Identify two major differences between Internet of Everything and Industrial IoT.
5. Write about the data-center based cloud tools that use to run the machine learning algorithm internally.
6. Recognizes an alternative approach that results in better adaptivity in case of network fluctuations and
increased latency.
7. Identify the on-demand processing and storage capabilities that is used to analyze the data generated by
IoT objects in batch or stream format.
Understand
1. Identify the evolutionary terms of Internet of Things (IoT) that use to interact and live with the physical
objects.
2. Illustrate the reference architecture of IoT that unifies the smart objects and human beings to provide
the ubiquitous communication.
3. Illustrate the service-oriented architecture of IoT that ensures the interoperability among the
heterogeneous devices.
4. Illustrate the API-Oriented Architecture of IoT that use SOAP and Remote Method Invocation (RMI)
as a means for describing, discovering, and calling services.
5. Discuss the resource capacity, selecting and provisioning the resources that greatly impact Quality of
Service (QoS) of the IoT applications.
6. Classify the taxonomy of resource management activities of IoT.
7. Report the standard requirement of real time analytics to fulfill the demand of real-time stream
processing engine.
Apply
1. Interpret a study analysis on open-source prototyping platform for the industrial IoT.
2. Implement a suitable OPENIoT Architecture for IoT/Cloud Convergence that provides an abstract
presentation of the functional elements of architecture.
3. Sketch W3C SSN-XG ontology and how to semantically enable real time sensor feeds.
4. Execute the two-tier data dissemination model for large-scale wireless sensor network
58
Assignment test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills pertaining to this course.
147
5. Demonstrate SPARQL query caching in order to improve the performance of semantic web
applications.
6. Illustrations a technique to cluster semantically similar QA pairs for retrieving an answer for a newly
given query without asking the QA engine on the cloud side.
Analyse
1. Comparative analysis on real-time analytics in Cloud-IoT and fog computing.
2. Compare the communication efficiencies for the following protocols such as AMPQ, CoAP, DDS,
MQTT, UPnP and XMPP in terms of Transport Layer Protocols.
3. Differentiate the major significances of nesC, keil C and Dynamic C.
4. Relate a set of minimal features to be fulfilled by the programming frameworks for IoT.
5. Comparative analysis on IoT programming approaches.
Evaluate
1. Select an example that utilizes the device-collaboration framework for the proactive suggestion
application.
2. Appraise a semantic QA cache that implement the device/cloud collaboration framework to compute
the probability of the on-device semantic QA cache to answer a given query correctly.
3. Select a suitable example that use automatically tagging recognized images to display the additional
information such as social sentiment in order to achieve similar performance improvement for speech-
recognition application with DL through device/cloud collaboration framework.
4. Critique on fog-computing assisted distributed analytics system that uses a set of fall-detection
algorithms, including algorithms based on acceleration measurements and time-series analysis
methods, as well as filtering techniques to facilitate the fall-detection process.
148
16CH007 INDUSTRIAL SAFETY AND HAZARD MANAGEMENT (OPEN ELECTIVE)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Demonstrate the safety and ethical issues that may arise from industrial processes
2. Explain industrial hygiene practices and its procedures
3. Illustrate the toxic pathways and elimination of toxicity on bio organisms
4. Understand hazards arising from runaway reactions, explosions and fires, and how to deal with them
5. Choose a suitable method for prevention of fires and explosions
6. Evaluate the process and able to do Hazards Identification and risks Risk Assessment
COs – POs Mapping
1 2 2 1 3 3
2 1 2 1 3 3
3 3 2 3 1 1
4 3 1
5 3 3 3 2
6 3 3 3 3 2
1.

Unit I
Introduction to Safety & Industrial Hygiene
Safety programs, Engineering ethics, Accident and Loss Statistics, Acceptable Risk, Public Perceptions, The
nature of the Accident Process, Inherent Safety, Government of India and OSHA regulations, Industrial
Hygiene, Identification, Evaluation & Control
Lethal dosage–Material Safety Data Sheets
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Toxicology, Fires and Explosions
How toxicants enter biological organisms, how toxicants are eliminated from biological organisms, effects of
toxicants on biological organisms The fire triangle, Distinction between fire and explosions, Definitions,
Flammability characteristics of liquids and vapors, MOC and inerting, ignition energy, Auto ignition, Auto
oxidation, Adiabatic compression, Explosions
Firefighting equipment–Personal protecting equipment–Building fire safety codes.
11+3 Hours
Unit III
Designs to Prevent Fires and Explosions
Inerting, static electricity, controlling static electricity, explosion proof equipment and instruments, ventilation,
sprinkler systems, miscellaneous designs for preventing fires and explosions
Work permit–Earthling–Color codes for identification of process.
10+4 Hours
Unit IV
Hazards Identification and Risk Assessment
Process hazards checklists, hazards surveys, hazards and operability studies, safety reviews, other methods.
Review of probability theory, event trees, fault trees, QRA and LOPA
Health and safety foundation–5S Practice–Emergency procedures.
12+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Text book (s)
1. D. A. Crowl, J. F. Louvar, Chemical Process Safety: Fundamentals with Applications, Prentice Hall, 3 rd
Edition, 2011
2. Reese, Charles D. Industrial Safety and Health for People-oriented Services. CRC Press, 2008
Reference (s)
1. H.H. Fawcett and W.S. Wood, Safety and Accident Prevention in Chemical Operations, John Wiley and
sons, New York, 2nd Edition, 1982
2. Hammer, Willie, and Dennis Price. Occupational safety management and engineering. Pearson College
Division, 2001
149
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Assignment Test59(%)
Remember 20 20 -
Understand 30 20 -
Apply 30 20 35
Analyze 20 30 35
Evaluate - 20 30
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define terms hazard and accidents.
2. List three-step of accidents process.
3. Define terms LD and ED.
4. List any four reversible effects that caused by toxic exposure.
5. Define terms risk, loss prevention.
Understand
1. Identify the initiation, propagation, and termination steps for motor accident.
2. Explain about how toxicants enter biological organisms.
3. Explain the key responsibilities of professional engineers.
4. Explain the inherent safety techniques that are used in the chemical industry.
5. Explain how toxicants are eliminated from biological organisms.
6. List the ingredients of safety program for outstanding safety program.
Apply
1. An employee works in a plant with a FAR of 4. If this employee works a 4-hr shift, 200 days per year,
what are the expected deaths per person per year?
2. Air contains 5 ppm of diethylamide (TLV-TWA of 5 ppm), 20 ppm of cyclohexanol (TLV-TWA of 50
ppm), and 10 ppm of propylene oxide (TLV-TWA of 2 ppm). What is the mixture TLV-TWA and has
this level been exceeded?
3. The following accident report has been filed. Failure of a threaded 1½″ drain connection on a rich oil
line at the base of an absorber tower in a large (1.35 MCF/D) gas producing plant allowed the release
of rich oil and gas at 850 psi and –40°F. The resulting vapor cloud probably ignited from the ignition
system of engine driven re compressors. The 75′ high × 10′ diameter absorber tower eventually
collapsed across the pipe rack and on two exchanger trains. Breaking pipelines added more fuel to the
fire. Severe flame impingement on an 11,000-horsepower gas turbine–driven compressor, waste heat
recovery, and super-heater train resulted in its near total destruction. Identify the initiation,
propagation, and termination steps for this accident.
4. A process has a reported FAR of 2. If an employee works a standard 8-hr shift 300 days per year,
compute the deaths per person per year.
Analyze
1. Can gate valves be placed between a vessel relief and its vessel?
2. Liquid levels in storage tanks are frequently determined by measuring the pressure at the bottom of the
tank. In one such tank the material stored in the tank was changed and an overflow resulted. Why?
Evaluate
1. How to convert your kitchen in to XP area
2. Does LOPA really replace 90% of the QRA?
59
150
16IT005 FUNDAMENTALS OF CLOUD COMPUTING (OPEN ELECTIVE)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Interpret the main concepts, key technologies, strengths, and limitations of cloud computing and the
possible applications for state-of-the-art cloud computing
2. Illustrate various problems and evaluate related cloud computing solutions
3. Apply the architecture and infrastructure of cloud computing, including SaaS, PaaS, IaaS, public cloud,
private cloud and hybrid cloud to different problems
4. Analyze cloud provider for a defined environment and to a specific platform in a cost-effective way
5. Analyze case studies to derive the best practice model to apply when developing and deploying cloud-
based applications
6. Build a virtual machine with a machine image
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO5 PO6
1 3 2 1
2 3 2 1
3 3 2 1
4 2 2 2
5 3 2 1
6 2 2 1
Unit I
Understanding Cloud Computing
Cloud computing: Introduction, Cloud application architectures, Value of cloud computing, Cloud
Infrastructure models, Cloud Services, History of Cloud Computing, Advantages of Cloud Computing,
Disadvantages of Cloud Computing, Companies in the Cloud Today, Amazon Web Services, Windows Azure,
Google services, IBM Cloud
Before the move into the cloud- Know Your Software Licenses, The Shift to a Cloud Cost Model, Service
Levels for Cloud Applications Ready for the cloud: Web Application Design, Machine Image Design, Privacy
Design, Design, Database Management.
Tata Cloud- Salesforce.com
13+3 Hours
Unit II
Virtual Machines and Virtualization of Clusters and Data Centers
Implementation Levels of Virtualization, Virtualization Structures/Tools and Mechanisms, Virtualization of
CPU, Memory, and I/O Devices, Virtual Clusters and Resource Management, Virtualization for Data-Center
Automation Case Studies: Cloud centers in detail, Comparing approaches, Xen, Eucalyptus, Cloud Stack, and
Open Stack
VMware- KVM.
10+5 Hours
Unit III
Scaling of Cloud Infrastructure & Security
Capacity, Planning, Cloud Scale. Cloud Security-Data Security, Network Security, Host Security, Compromise
Response
Disaster Recovery-Disaster Recovery Planning, Disasters in cloud, Cloud Disaster Management.
Requirements for modern data centers- high availability and Service Orientated Infrastructures (SOI)- Modern
data centre use case studies.
10+3 Hours
Unit IV
Cloud Computing Software Security Fundamentals
Cloud information Security Objectives, Cloud Security Services, Relevant Cloud Security Design Principles,
Secure Cloud Software Requirements, Approaches to Cloud Software Requirements Engineering, Cloud
Security Policy Implementation. Cloud Computing Risk Issues: The CIA Triad, Privacy and Compliance
Risks, Threats to Infrastructure Data and Access Control, Cloud Access Control Issues, Cloud Service Provider
Risks.
151
Security concepts-Confidentiality-privacy-integrity-authentication-non-repudiation-availabilit- access control-

defence in depth- least privilege
12+4 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. George Reese, Cloud Application Architectures, O‟Reilly Media, 1 st Edition, 2009
2. Ronald L. Krutz and Russell Dean Vines, Cloud Security, Wiley Publishing, 1 st Edition, 2010
Reference (s)
1. Michael Miller, Cloud Computing-Web Based Applications that change the way you work and
collaborate online, Pearson Education, Publishing, 1 st Edition, 2011
2. Kai Hwang, Geoffrey C Fox and Jack J. Dongarra, Distributed & Cloud Computing from Parallel
Processing to the Internet of Things, MK Publishing, 1 st Edition, 2010
3. David S Linthicum, Cloud Computing and SOA Convergence in Your Enterprise: A Step-by-Step
Guide, Addison-Wesley, 1st Edition 2009
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 40 45 -
Understand 40 45 -
Apply 20 10 80
Analyse - - 20
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define Cloud Computing
2. List types of virtualization
3. Define proactive scaling
4. What is CIA Triad?
Understand
1. Explain different cloud Infrastructure models
2. Explain different levels of virtualization
3. Explain about cloud Network security in detail?
4. Explain about Recovery Point Objective.
Apply
1. Explain any IaaS service provided by Amazon
2. What is cloud Stack?
3. How disaster recovery planning can be done
4. How Web Application Design is used in designing cloud applications
Analyze
1. Compare cloud center and service infrastructure.
2. Analyze different cloud services provided by Amazon
3. With neat diagram explain the functioning of Xen Architecture.
4. List and explain various cloud service providers risks.
60
Assignment test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills Pertaining to this course
152
16PE007 SMART GRID TECHNOLOGY (OPEN ELECTIVE)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Compare the basic difference between existing grid and smart grid
2. Explain perfect power system network (Including distributed and fully integrated systems)
3. Explain the importance of renewable energy systems and distributed energy resources in smart grids
4. Summarize the wide area monitoring system and advanced measuring technologies
5. Recall the technologies like Zigbee, HAN and NAN in smart grids
6. Explain SCADA technology in modern power systems and to analyze the micro grid systems
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO3 PO5
1 2 2
2 3 3
3 3 3
4 3 2
5 3 2
6 3 3
3–Strongly linked | 2–Moderately linked| 1–Weakly linked
Unit I
Introduction to the Smart Grids
Introduction to smart grid- Electricity Network-Local energy networks- General considerations for a smart
grid, characteristics of smart grids, elements in smart grids.
Electric transportation- Low carbon central generation-Attributes of the smart grid- Alternate views of a smart
grid.
Smart grid to evolve a perfect power system
Introduction- Overview of the perfect power system configurations- Device level power system- Building
integrated power systems- Distributed power systems- Fully integrated power system-Nodes of innovation.
Present status of smart grids in India
14+4 Hours
Unit II
Smart Electric Grid & Measurement Technologies
Smart Electric grid
Generation Distributed energy resources: Renewable energy, energy storage, solar energy, wind energy,
biomass, hydro power, geothermal and fuel cell, effect of electric vehicles(EV‟s), transmission, distribution,
and end-user; Basic concepts of power, load models, load flow analysis
Measurement Technologies
Wide area monitoring system (WAMS), advanced metering infrastructure (AMI), phasor measurement units.
Functioning of PMU
12+3 Hours
Unit III
Communication & Networking Technology
Architectures, standards and adaptation of power line communication (PLC), zigbee, GSM, GPS, GIS,
machine to-machine communication models for the smart grid; Home area networks (HAN) and neighborhood
area networks (NAN)
Machine to human communication system
11+3 Hours
Unit IV
Energy Management in Smart grids
Aspects of energy management in the smart grid; SCADA; micro grids; demonstration projects; case studies.
Policy and economic drives of the smart grid; environmental implications; sustainability issues of smart grid
systems.
Environmental issues related to smart grid systems
10+3 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
153
Text Book(s)
1. Clark W Gellings, The Smart Grid, Enabling Energy Efficiency and Demand Side Response, CRC
Press, 2012
2. Janaka Ekanayake, Kithsiri Liyanage,Jianzhong.Wu, Akihiko Yokoyama, Nick Jenkins, Smart Grid:
Technology and Applications, Wiley, 2012
Reference(s)
1. A. Keyhani, Smart Power Grid Renewable Energy Systems, Wiley, 2011
2. James Momoh, Smart Grid: Fundamentals of Design and Analysis, Wiley, IEEE Press, 2012
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 10 10 -
Understand 50 50 -
Apply 40 40 55
Analyze - - 45
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define smart grid system
2. Write about self-healing capability
3. List out four basic characteristics of smart grid system
4. Write about resiliency to disturbances
5. Write down the basic elements of smart grid system
6. Write about smart meters
7. Write down the generation options which are possible in smart grid system
8. Write about the functions of smart grids
9. Write down the attributes of smart grid system
10. Write about smart home energy management system
Understand
1. Illustrate the advanced power system network
2. Draw the block diagram of smart grid system
3. Explain the self-healing property of smart grid system
4. Explain about self-healing capability technology in smart grid systems
5. Explain the self-healing property of smart grid system
6. Explain about the smart homes
7. Explain the energy storage system in smart grids
8. Explain about outage management system
Apply
1. Construction of modern power system network with the help of basic characteristics
2. Choose the best renewable energy source based on the environmental conditions
3. Execute the smart home with the smart grid elements
4. Develop a smart hybrid electric vehicle with efficient battery system
5. Compute micro grid system with dc loads
6. Find the net power injected in the bus i for a two-bus system
Analyze
1. Differentiate between traditional and modern grid
2. Identify the reasons for failure of existing grid
3. Justify the need of AMI in smart grids
4. Compare the operation of micro grid and smart grid systems
5. Identify WAMS in smart grids
61
154
16MA001 COMPUTATIONAL MATHEMATICS (OPEN ELECTIVE)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Apply the knowledge of finding roots of nonlinear equations and different errors in series
approximations
2. Understand the consistency and inconsistency of linear system of equations
3. Evaluate the solution of Initial and Boundary value problems
4. Perform numerical differentiation and integration
5. Analyze the solution of PDEs under given conditions
6. Apply Knowledge of numerical techniques to Engineering problems
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2
1 3 2
2 3 2
3 2 3
4 2 2
5 3 3
6 3 3
Unit I
Errors in numerical calculations and Solutions of algebraic and transcendental equations
Absolute, relative and percentage errors, a general error formula, errors in a series approximation Locating
Roots of Equations with one variable: Secant method, Muller‟s method. Solution of nonlinear equations -
Introduction, Iteration method, Newton-Raphson method.
Develop MATLAB code for Bisection method, Newton-Raphson method and for the above methods
12 + 3 Hours
Unit II
Solution of Linear Systems and Interpolation
Direct methods -LU Decomposition, Iterative methods –Jacobi method, Gauss-Seidel method Interpolating
polynomials using finite differences- Bessel interpolation, Piecewise and spline interpolation - Piecewise
Linear interpolation, Quadratic spline interpolation
Develop MATLAB code for the above methods
11 + 4 Hours
Unit III
Numerical Integration and BVP(ODE)
Newton-Cotes methods (Weddle‟s rule) Solution of BVP - Finite difference method, shooting method, the
cubic spline method
Develop MATLAB code for Trapezoidal, Simpson’s 1/3 & 3/8 rules and for the above methods
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Numerical solutions of PDEs
Introduction, Finite difference approximations to derivatives, Solutions of Laplace & Poisson equations using
Jacobi‟s, Gauss-Seidel & SOR methods. Solution of parabolic equation using -Bender-Schmidt & Crank-
Nicolson methods. Solution of hyperbolic equation
Develop MATLAB code for the above methods
11 + 4 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. M. K. Jain, S.R.K. Iyengar, R.K. Jain, Numerical methods for Scientific and Engineering Computation,
New Age International publishers, 4th Edition, New Delhi
2. S. S. Sastry, Introductory methods of numerical analysis, 4 th Edition, PHI
3. B. S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 42 nd Edition, Khanna publishers, New Delhi
Reference(s)
1. S. C. Chapra & R. P. Canale, Numerical Methods for Engineers, 6th Edition, McGraw Hill (2012)
2. Cleve Moler, Numerical Computing with MATLAB, SIAM.
155
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 30 30 -
Understand 45 40 -
Apply 20 25 40
Analyse 5 5 30
Evaluate - - -
Create - - 30
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. List out different Errors in Numerical calculations
2. List the three numerical methods to solve Algebraic and Transcendental equations
3. Define initial and boundary value problem for Ordinary differential equations
4. List the numerical methods in solving Laplace‟s, partial differential equations i.e. Parabolic and
hyperbolic
Understand
1. Summarize the Absolute, relative and percentage Errors
2. Illustrate the procedure for Newton-Raphson method for finding root of an algebraic equation
3. Explain the mechanism involved in LU decomposition method in solving linear systems
4. Explain spline interpolation formula
Apply
1. Given ( ) , construct the Taylor series approximations of orders 0 to 7 at and state their
absolute errors.
2. Apply Newton-Raphson method to find a root of the equation .
3. Given the set of data points (1,-8), (2,-1) and (3, 18) satisfying the function ( ), find the linear
splines satisfying the given data. Determine the approximate values of y(2.5) and ̇ ( )
4. Apply Gauss-Seidel‟s method to solve Laplace equation for the region given in the figure
5.
Analyse
1. Compare the roots obtained from Secant method, Muller‟s methods and explain which method is
preferable
2. Analyse the physical significance of spline‟s interpolation formula
3. Differentiate shooting and cubic splines methods for numerical integration.
4. Analyse the platform for the application of Laplace Equation.
62
Comprehensive test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills pertaining to this course
156
16CY001 NANO SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY (OPEN ELECTIVE)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Apply various chemical and physical methods for the synthesis of nanomaterials
2. Understand the properties of nano-materials and their applications in relation to bulk materials
3. Describe the nano size effect on optical, electrical, magnetic and thermal properties
4. Characterize nano materials by powder XRD and microscopy techniques.
5. Understand structure, properties and applications of Fullerenes and Carbon nanotubes.
6. Review the applications of nanomaterials, specially semiconducting metal oxides for sensing and
catalysis
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO12
1 3 2
2 3 2
3 3 2
4 3 2
5 3 2
6 3 2
Unit I
Introduction to Nanomaterials
Introduction to nanomaterials and nanotechnology, Nano-sizes and their unique properties: comparison with
the bulk materials, Different shapes sizes and morphology of nanomaterials; Defects in Nano crystalline
materials, Effect of grain size on physical properties – magnetic, electrical, optical and thermal properties.
11 + 3 Hours
Unit II
Fabrication of Nanomaterials
Top Down Approaches: Grinding, Planetary milling and comparison of particles; Bottom Up Approach: Wet
Chemical Synthesis - Micro emulsion Approach, Colloidal Nanoparticles Production, Sol Gel Methods,
Sonochemical Approach, Microwave and Atomization; Gas phase Production Methods - Chemical Vapor
Depositions; Carbon Nano structures: carbon molecules, carbon clusters, carbon Nano tubes- synthesis,
formation.
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Characterization of Nanomaterials
Fractionation principles of particle size measurements, Particle size and its distribution, powder X-ray
Diffraction, Zeta potential, Electronic band structure Electron statistics Application: Optical transitions in
solids, photonic crystals, Microscopies: Scanning Electron Microscopy, Transmission Electron Microscopy,
Atomic Forced Microscopy, Scanning and Tunneling Microscopy.
11 + 4 Hours
Unit IV
Applications of Nanomaterials
Self-assembly and molecular manufacturing, Surfactant based system Colloidal system applications,
Functional materials Applications: Single walled and multi walled CNTs, quantum dots, GaN wires, TiO 2 and
ZnO Nano crystalline materials, Nano sensors based on optical properties.
11 + 4 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. B. S. Murthy, P. Shankar, Baldev Raj, B.B. Rath, Ames Murday, Text book of Nanoscience and
Nanotechnology, published by Springer & Universities Press (India) Pvt. Ltd.
2. Sulabha K. Kulkarni, Nanotechnology: Principles & Practices, Springer
3. Nils O. Petersen, Foundations for Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, CRC Press, 2017.
Reference(s)
1. Stuart M. Lindsay, Introduction to Nanoscience, Oxford University Press, 2009.
157
2. Robert Kelsall, Ian Hamley, Mark Geoghegan, Nanoscale Science and Technology, John Wiley & Sons,
2005.
3. Gabor L. Hornyak , H.F. Tibbals , Joydeep Dutta , John J. Moore Introduction to Nanoscience and
Nanotechnology CRC Press
4. Davies, J.H. „The Physics of Low Dimensional Semiconductors: An Introduction‟, Cambridge
University Press, 1998
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 30 30 -
Understand 40 40 -
Apply 30 30 80
Analyse - - 20
Evaluate -- - -
Create -- - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define a nanomaterial. List any four naturally occurring/synthetically prepared Nano materials used in
daily life.
2. Differentiate between nano materials & bulk materials in terms of physical properties.
3. List two methods of preparing nanomaterials in bottom up approach & top down approach.
Understand
1. Explain the sol-gel method of preparing nano materials. What kind of materials can be prepared by this
method in nano form?
2. How will the electrical, magnetic & optical properties vary for nano materials compared to bulk?
Explain with an example for each.
3. What are the various carbon nano materials available? Describe one method of producing Carbon nano
tubes.
Apply
1. How is SEM used for characterization of nano materials? Describe the principle and working of
instrument.
2. Based on the optical properties of Nano TiO2 and ZnO, describe the design & construction of nano
sensors.
3. Describe the functions and applications of Carbon Nano tubes and gaN Nano wires.
Analyze
1. How is the size of nanomaterials characterized? Assess the advantage of using SEM & TEM instead of
powder XRD for size of particle, grain size characterization.
2. For a semiconductor, as the materials is sized down to nano, the electronic band structure is found to
vary from bulk material. Explain the changes in electronic band structure for a direct band gap
material.
3. Calculate the changes in surface to volume ratio (S/V ratio) for a particle of 1 micrometer cube divided
into 10 nanometer cubes by top down approaches. Comment on its impact in catalysis
63
158
16ME607 HEAT TRANSFER LAB

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Find thermal conductivity of common metallic materials
2. Determine the amount of heat transfer between fluid and solid boundaries
3. Estimate the amount of heat exchanged between fluids in heat exchangers
4. Determine the emissivity and Stefan Boltzmann constant of radiative heat transfer
5. Evaluate heat transfer coefficient in natural and forced convection
6. Fabricate and analyze simple heat transfer systems
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO7 PO10 PSO2
1 3 2 2 - 1 1
2 3 2 2 - 1 1
3 3 3 2 - 1 1
4 3 3 2 3 1 1
5 - 3 3 3 1 1
6 3 3 3 3 3 3
List of Experiments
1. Composite Slab Apparatus – Overall heat transfer co-efficient.
2. Heat transfer through lagged pipe.
3. Heat Transfer through a Concentric Sphere.
4. Thermal Conductivity of given metal rod.
5. Heat transfer in pin-fin.
6. Experiment on Transient Heat Conduction.
7. Heat transfer in forced convection apparatus.
8. Heat transfer in natural convection.
9. Parallel and counter flow heat exchanger.
10. Emissivity apparatus.
11. Stefan Boltzmann Apparatus.
12. Heat transfer in drop and film wise condensation.
13. Critical Heat flux apparatus.
14. Study of heat pipe and its demonstration.
1. Experimental investigation on Heat Exchanger with Nano fluids.
2. Thermal Conductivity of liquids.
3. Demonstration model for Conduction.
4. Demonstration model for Convection.
5. Demonstration model for Radiation.
6. Heat Transfer in a Shell-Tube heat exchanger.
7. Natural Convection in Rectangular fin.
8. Forced Convection in Rectangular fin.
9. Optimum fin-Spacing.
10. Applications of Heat exchanger in real life-Poster Presentation.
11. CFD analysis of fluid flow in a pipe.
12. CFD analysis of turbulent flow in a pipe.
13. Analysis of temperature distribution in an insulated wall.
14. Forced convection using liquids.
15. Natural convection using liquids.
1. Heat transfer manual, GMR institute of technology, Rajam
2. R. C. Sachdeva, Fundamentals of Engineering Heat and Mass Transfer,4th Edition, 2010
64
159
3. J. P. Holman, Heat Transfer, McGraw Hill, New York, 9 th Edition, 2002

4. S. Subramanyan, C.P. Kothandaraman, Heat and Mass Transfer Data Book, 8th Edition, 2014
160
16ESX2B EMPLOYABILITY SKILLS IV

0201
Soft Skills: Introduction to Campus Placements: Stages of Campus Placement, Skills assessed in Campus
Placements; The Changing scenario and its Challenges & How to get ready? ; Building Vocabulary: Through
reading Articles, Exploring New Words, Meanings and the usage with examples; Business Terminology:
Vision, Mission, Objectives, Goals, Targets and Financial Terms such as Debt, Equity, Share, Working
Capital, Turnover, Net Worth etc. ; Resume (Recap): Resume? Templates? Mistakes to be avoided in a
Resume and Steps to be followed in preparing it; Group Discussions (Recap) & Practice: GD? Stages of a GD,
Skills assessed in a GD, Blunders to be avoided, how to excel in a GD? Practice sessions and sharing
Feedback. (Screening sample Videos); Interview Skills: Interview? Types of Interview, Dos & Don‟ts, Skills
assessed in an Interview, Mistakes to be avoided, how to equip oneself to excel? How to handle the Typical
Interview Questions? (with Examples); Mock Interviews: Practice sessions with Feedback; Exercises related to
Communication: JAMs, Case Studies, Video Synthesis, Email Writing, Story Writing, TAT etc.
161
16ME701 FINITE ELEMENT METHOD

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Apply the concepts of minimum potential energy principles to solve structural mechanics problems
2. Find eigen values and eigenvectors of simple dynamic systems
3. Find weak form from strong form and total potential, and recognize similarities between such
solutions, and those obtained by variational principles and principle of virtual work.
4. Find finite element solution and compare with exact solution of simple one-dimensional problem
5. Apply the finite element procedure for stress analysis and design of load carrying structures
6. Apply the FE method for heat transfer problems
COs–POs Mapping
1 3 2 2
2 3 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 3 3 2
5 3 2 2 2
6 3 3 2
Unit I
General Concept-One Dimensional Problems
Introduction Finite Element Method- historical back ground - Finding Circumference of a circle by Finite
Element Method - Finding area of a circle by Finite Element Method - Applications -brief description on
Boundary value problems - Rayleigh Ritz method of finite element formulations -simple problems using
Rayleigh Ritz method. Finite Element Modeling - Co-ordinates and shape functions - Potential Energy
approach - Assembly of stiffness matrix and load vector - Finite Element equations - treatment of boundary
conditions
Simple Problems covering structural and Thermal loads.
12+5 Hours
Unit II
Analysis of Trusses-Analysis of Beams and frames
Finite Element modeling - Coordinates and shape functions - assembly of global stiffness matrix and load
vector - Finite Element equations - treatment of boundary conditions - stress, strain and support reaction
calculations. Hermit shape functions - Element stiffness matrix - Load vector
Simple problems on beams and frames.
10+3 Hours
Unit III
Constant Strain Triangular Elements-Isoperimetric Elements
Finite Element modeling of two-dimensional stress analysis with Constant strain triangles - treatment of
boundary conditions simple problems. Two - dimensional four node isoparametric elements
Numerical integration.
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Application to conduction heat transfer problems-Dynamic Analysis
One dimensional transient and steady state heat conduction - finned geometry and other simple problems.
Formulation of finite element model- element consistent mass matrices - Evaluation of Eigen values - Eigen
vector - free vibration analysis
Problems on free vibration analysis.
12+3 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. T.R Chandrupatla, and A.D Belegundu, Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering, Pearson
education, 4th Edition, 2012
2. Junuthula Narasimha Reddy, An Introduction to the Finite Element Method, McGraw-Hill, 3rd Edition,
2006
162
Reference (s)
1. S.S Rao, The Finite Element Method in Engineering, Butterworth-Heinemann, 4th Edition, 2005
2. Cook Robert Devis, Concepts and Application of finite Element Analysis, Wiley, 2nd Edition, 1981
3. O. C. Zienkiewicz and R.L.Taylor, The Finite Element Methods, Vol.1, The basic formulation and
linear problems, Vol.1, Butterworth Heineman, 5 th Edition, 2000
4. Segerlind L.J., Applied Finite Element Analysis, Wiley Publication, 2nd Edition, 1984
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 25 25 -
Understand 45 45 -
Apply 30 30 30
Analyze - - 70
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
7. List out the fundamental steps in FEM to solve a problem
8. Define interpolation function
9. Define shape functions
10. Define plane stress
11. List out the different 2-D elements
Understand
1. Explain the fundamental steps involved in FEM to solve a problem
2. Describe mathematical principle involved in Trapezoidal rule and Simpson‟s 1/3 Rule
3. Explain the importance of quadratic shape functions in 1-D analysis
4. Compare elimination approach and penalty approach
Apply
1. Consider the bar shown in fig. An axial load P = 200x103 N is applied as shown. Using the penalty (or)
elimination approach for handling boundary conditions, do the following a) Determine the nodal
displacements b) Determine the stress in each material. Take A1 = 2400 mm2, A2 = 600 mm2 E1 =
70x109 N/m2, E2=200x109 N/m2
2. The (x, y) coordinates of the nodes i,j and k of a triangular element are (1,1), (4,2) and (3,5)
respectively. The shape functions of a point „P‟ located inside the element are given by N 1=0.15 and N2
= 0.25. Determine the x and y coordinates of the point “P”
3. Estimate the stiffness matrix and the deflection at the centre of the simply supported beam of length 3
m with 50 kN of load is acting at the centre of the beam.
4. One side of brick wall of width 5m, height 4 m and thickness 0.5 m are exposed to a temperature of -
250C while the other surface is maintained at 320C. If the thermal conductivity is maintained at 32 0C. If
the thermal conductivity is 0.75w/mk and the heat transfer coefficient is 50 w/m 2k. Determine the
temperature distribution in the wall and heat loss from the wall by two element methods.
Evaluate
1. Compare elimination approach and penalty approach in finite element analysis.
2. Compare potential energy method and Galerkin method.
3. Determine the temperature distribution in the wall, which has heat generation in a large plate (k= 0.8
W/m 0 C) at the rate of 4000 W/m3. The plate is 25 cm thick. The outside surfaces of the plate are
exposed to ambient air at 300C with a convective heat-transfer coefficient of 20 W/m2.
65
163
4. Determine the shape functions at the point of P(22,45) of a CST with the coordinates I(1,10),J(45,15)
and K(30,60).
164
16ME010 DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURING

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain modern manufacturing operations, their capabilities and limitations
2. Analyze the process of design a criterion for material selection
3. Illustrate the process of analyzing products to improve their manufacturability with lower costs
4. Analyze the relationship between customer desires, functional requirements in product design and
manufacturing
5. Explain design guidelines for manufacturing of products using extrusion process
6. Explain design guidelines for manufacturing of Plastics
COs – POs Mapping
1 3 2 1 1 2
2 3 1 1 1 2
3 3 1 - 2 2
4 3 1 2 2 2
5 3 1 - 2 2
6 3 1 - 2 2
Unit I
Design Process- Creative steps in design and materials selection
Design philosophy, steps in design process, general design rules for manufacturability basic principles of
designing for economical production, creativity in design.
Materials
Selection of materials for design, developments in material technology, criteria for material selection, material
selection interrelationship with process selection, process selection charts.
Design process of any automobile component with its material selection
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Machining processes- According to Design for manufacturing
Overview of various machining processes, general design rules for machining dimensional clearance and
surface roughness, Design for machining ease, redesigning of components for machining ease with suitable
examples. General design recommendations for machined parts. Metal casting: Appraisal of various casting
processes, selection of casting process, general design considerations for casting, Gating design, casting
tolerance-use of solidification, simulation in casting design, product design rules for sand casting.
Design recommendations for special casting processes; centrifugal and investment casting processes
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Metal joining- According to Design for joints, Design for forging
Appraisal of various welding processes, factors in design of weldments, general design guidelines, pre and post
treatment of welds, Under water welding, welding of dissimilar metals, Robotic welding, effects of thermal
stresses in weld joints, design of brazed joints.
Forging
Design factors for forging, closed die forging design, parting lines of dies, drop forging die design, general
design recommendations.
Design recommendations for special joining and forging processes
11+3 Hours
Unit IV
Extrusion & Sheet metal work- According to Design for extrusion and plastics
Design guide lines extruded sections, design principles for punching, blanking, bending, deep drawing, Keeler
Goodman forging line diagram, component design for blanking.
Plastics
Visco elastic and creep behavior in plastics, design guidelines for plastic components, design considerations
for injection molding: design guidelines for machining and joining of plastics.
Design guidelines for indirect extrusion processes
11+4 Hours
165
Total:45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. G. Boothroyd, Peter Dewhurst, Product design for manufacture and assembly, Taylor & Francis, 2nd
Edition, 2011.
2. G Dieter, Engineering Design - a materials and processing approach, McGraw Hill, NY, 2000.
3. M F Ashby, Material Selection in Mechanical Design, Butterworth-Heinemann, 1999.
Reference (s)
1. John Cobert, Design for manufacture, Adisson Wesley, 1st Edition, 1995.
2. M F Ashby and K Johnson, Materials and Design - the art and science of material selection in product
design, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2003.
3. T H Courtney, Mechanical Behavior of Materials, McGraw Hill, NY, 2000.
4. K G Swift and J D Booker, Process selection: from design to manufacture, London: Arnold, 1997.
5. S S Rao, Engineering Optimization: theory and practice, John Wiley, NY, 1996.
6. J G Bralla, Handbook for Product Design for Manufacture, McGraw Hill, NY, 1998.
7. Houldcroft, Which Process – an introduction to welding and related processes and guide to their
selection, Cambridge, Abington Pub., 1990.
8. ASTM Design handbook.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
66
Remember 35 30 -
Understand 45 40 -
Apply 20 30 20
Analyze - - 50
Evaluate - - 30
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define about design for machining.
2. Recall the factors in design of weldments.
3. List any three guidelines for manufacturability.
Understand
1. Explain various materials used for forging dies with their advantages.
2. Classify between design for manufacturing and detailed design explaining the various terms involved.
3. Summarize the importance of solidification simulation in casting design.
Apply
1. Construct the design of closed die forging design and drop forging die design with a neat sketch.
2. Choose a suitable example and apply the steps in improving the design of a component from the point
of view of machining.
Analyze
1. Analyze the factors which will be considered in the analysis of reduce part count and part types.
2. Examine how adjustments can be eliminated in the assembly design process?
3. Distinguish the factors which will be considered in handling part from the bulk no of parts.
Evaluate
1. Explain the important Design Recommendations for casting.
2. Conclude about the guidelines for Minimizing Distortion.
Create
1. Create a suitable material index for the selection of material for Oars used for rowing.
2. Choose a suitable material for a typical bridge crane and discuss the design parameters with shape
factor.
66
166
16ME011 INDUSTRIAL TRIBOLOGY

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain fundamentals of the tribology and its applications
2. Identify the materials used for bearings and types of bearing oil pads
3. Apply hydrostatic and hydrodynamic theory of lubrication in tribology
4. Analyze the friction and power losses in journal bearings
5. Explain the air lubricated bearings
6. Explain the concepts of boundary friction and dry friction
COs – POs Mapping
1 3 1 1 1
2 3 2 1 2
3 3 3 2 2
4 3 3 2 2
5 3 1 1 1
6 3 1 1 1
Unit I
Introduction
Study of various parameters: Viscosity, flow of fluids, viscosity and its variation -absolute and kinematic
viscosity, temperature variation, viscosity index determination of viscosity, different viscometers used Bearing
materials: General requirements of bearing materials, types of bearing materials Types of bearing oil pads:
Hydrostatic bearing wick oiled bearings, oil rings, pressure feed bearing, partial bearings
Externally pressurized bearings
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Hydrostatic and Hydrodynamic theory of lubrication
Hydrostatic lubrication: Hydrostatic step bearing, application to pivoted pad thrust bearing and other
applications, hydrostatic lifts, hydrostatic squeeze films and its application to journal bearing. Hydrodynamic
theory of lubrication: Various theories of lubrication, Petroffs equation, Reynold‟s equation in two dimensions
Effects of side leakage - Reynolds equation in three dimensions, Friction in sliding bearing, hydro dynamic
theory applied to journal bearing, oil whip and whirl, Anti -friction bearings
Minimum oil film thickness
13+4 Hours
Unit III
Friction and power losses in journal bearings
Calibration of friction loss friction in concentric bearings, bearing modulus, Sommerfield number, heat balance
Practical consideration of journal bearing design considerations
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Air Lubricated bearings
Applications of Hydrodynamic journal bearings, hydrodynamic thrust bearings. Hydrostatic thrust bearings.
Hydrostatic bearing Analysis including compressibility effect. Study of current concepts of boundary friction
and dry friction
Advantages and disadvantages of hydrodynamic journal bearing
10+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Basu, SenGupta and Ahuja, Fundamentals of Tribology, PHI,1 st Edition, 2011
2. Sushil Kumar Srivatsava, Tribology in Industry, S. Chand & Co, 1 st Edition, 2011
Reference (s)
1. B.C. Majumdar, Introduction to Tribology of Bearings, S Chand and Company, 2 nd Edition, 2008
2. Prasanta Sahoo, Engineering Tribology, PHI India,1 st Edition, 2005
167
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

67
Remember 35 25 -
Understand 45 45 -
Apply 20 30 50
Analyze - - 50
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define tribology
2. State adhesion theory
3. Define viscosity
4. State stick-slip theory
5. Define flash point
6. List the factors that affect viscosity
Understand
1. Explain Petroff‟s equation
2. Explain flow through a capillary tube
3. Derive the equation for flow of viscous liquid through a wide rectangular slot
4. Classify the different types of viscometers
Apply
1. Following data is given for a hydrostatic, flat, foot-step bearing
Shaft diameter = 60 mm
Step diameter = 40 mm
Thrust load = 5000 N
Minimum oil-film thickness = 150 microns
Viscosity of oil = 20 MPa
Shaft speed = 1500 r.p.m
Calculate
Quantity of oil supplied to the bearing
Total power lost in the bearing
2. Following data is given for a hydrostatic thrust bearing:

Recess diameter = 250 mm
Thrust load = 900 kN
Viscosity of lubricant = 30 cP
Calculate
(i) The optimum film thickness for minimum energy losses
(ii) The total power loss
(iii) Temperature rise
3. A step bearing supports the vertical shaft of a turbo-generator. The recess diameter to shaft diameter
ratio is 0.6 and supply pressure is 5 MPa. The thrust load is 400 kN. The shaft rotates at 800 r.p.m. If
the viscosity of oil is 30 cP. Calculate optimum oil-film thickness to be maintained so that the total
power loss in the bearing is minimum.
4. The following data refers to a hydrostatic thrust bearing:

Recess diameter = 300 mm
67
168
Supply pressure = 6 N/mm2

Film thickness = 0.18 mm
Viscosity of lubricant = 28 cP
Specific gravity of lubricant = 0.86
Sp. Heat of lubricant = 1.76 kJ/kg. deg.C
Calculate:
(i) Load carrying capacity of the bearing
(ii) Flow requirement in l/min
(iii) Viscous power loss
Analyze
1. A circular hydrostatic bearing with an outside diameter of 140 mm, recess diameter of 50 mm and
rotating at 600 rpm supports a load of 50 kN. The bearing is lubricated by a mineral oil of density 700
kg/m3 delivered to the bearing by a constant flow rate delivery pump operating at 30x10 -9 m3/s. The
operating temperature of the bearing is 30 deg.C. Calculate and analyse the recess pressure. Select an
SAE oil such that the film thickness will never be less than 10 micro meters.
2. Show that the generalized Reynolds equation is
  h p    h p      u a  u b h     w  w h    h 
3 3
    
a b

       
 x  12   x   z  12   z   x  2  z  2  t
3. Compare between hydrostatic and hydrodynamic mode of lubrication and its application areas
4. Justify the statement with proper reasoning “whirl instability influences the performance of air
lubricated bearings”.
Evaluate
1. Comment on load carrying capacity and coefficient of friction for a plane slider bearing with fixed shoe
under the following conditions:
Width of bearing, B=60 mm, Length to width ratio, L/B=1.2, Sliding velocity=5 m/s, Minimum film
thickness=0.02 mm, Absolute viscosity of lubricant=0.02 Pa s, Attitude=2.0
2. Evaluate the load carrying capacity, attitude angle and power loss due to viscous friction for a full
journal bearing with following specifications:
Journal diameter=75 mm, Radial clearance=0.02 mm, Journal speed = 800 rpm, Mean viscosity =
0.025 Pa s, Eccentricity ratio=0.8, Side leakage = neglected, Boundary conditions = half Somerfield
boundary conditions
Create
1. Establish the capillary dimensions necessary to maintain minimum film thickness of 40µm for a
hydrostatic circular pad bearing which supports a vertical load of 35 kN at a shaft speed of 1000 rpm.
The lubricant‟s viscosity at the operating temperature is 7.8 centi poise, the recess oil pressure is 2
MPa, the external pressure outside the bearing is P 0=0. The pump supply pressure is 2.3 MPa and
assume that D/D0=3
2. Establish the capillary dimensions necessary to maintain minimum film thickness of 50µm for a
hydrostatic circular pad bearing which supports a vertical load of 40 kN at a shaft speed of 1200 rpm.
The lubricant‟s viscosity at the operating temperature is 8.0 centi poise, the recess oil pressure is 2
MPa, the external pressure outside the bearing is P 0=0. The pump supply pressure is 2.3 MPa and
assume that D/D0=3
169
16ME012 REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Apply the concept of refrigeration to various systems.
2. Explain the methods to improve performance of vapor compression systems.
3. Analyze steam jet, vapor absorption, thermoelectric and vortex tube systems.
4. Analyze air conditioning processes using principles of psychometry.
5. Find cooling and heating loads in an air conditioning system.
6. Identify eco-friendly refrigerants and use P-H charts to evaluate the performance of refrigeration
systems.
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO7
1 3 3 1 1
2 3 2 1 1
3 3 3 2 1
4 3 3 2 1
5 3 3 1 1
6 3 2 2 3
Unit I
Introduction to Refrigeration-Air Refrigeration- Vapor compression refrigeration
Necessity and applications – Unit of refrigeration and C.O.P. Types of Ideal cycles of refrigeration-Reversed
Carnot cycle and Bell Coleman cycle. Open and dense air systems – Actual air refrigeration system problems –
Refrigeration needs of Air crafts. Working principle and essential components of the plant – simple vapor
compression refrigeration cycle – COP – Representation of cycle on T-S and p-h charts – effect of sub cooling
and super heating – cycle analysis – Actual cycle Influence of various parameters on system performance –
numerical Problems.
Use of p-h charts
11+4 Hours
Unit II
System Components-Refrigerants
Compressors: General classification, comparison, advantages and disadvantages. Classification and working
principles of condensers, Evaporators and Expansion devices. Desirable properties – classification refrigerants
used – Nomenclature – Ozone Depletion – Global Warming. Vapor Absorption System – Calculation of max
COP – description and working of NH3 – water system and Li Br –water (Two shell) System.
Principle of operation of three Fluid absorption system, salient features.
11+3 Hours
Unit III
Steam Jet Refrigeration System-Introduction to Air Conditioning
Working principle and basic components. Principle and operation of (i) Thermoelectric refrigerator (ii) Vortex
tube or Hilsch tube. Psychometric Properties & Processes – Characterization of Sensible and latent heat loads -
Problems
Load concepts of RSHF and ADP
12+4 Hours
Unit IV
Human comfort conditions- Air conditioning load calculations
Requirements of human comfort and concept of effective temperature- Comfort chart –Comfort Air
conditioning – Requirements of Industrial air conditioning. Air conditioning Load Calculations – Application
to real time problems like class room, office room etc. Air Conditioning Systems-Classification of equipment,
cooling, heating, humidification and dehumidification, filters, fans and blowers.
Filters, fans and blowers.
11+4 Hours
Total 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
170
1. C. P. Arora, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited, 3rd
Edition, 2008
2. SC Arora & Domkundwar, A Course in Refrigeration and Air conditioning, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, 4th
Edition, 1997
Reference (s)
1. Manohar Prasad, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, New Age International, 2nd Edition, 2003 reprint
2006.
2. Roy J. Dossat, Principles of Refrigeration, Pearson Education, 4th Edition, 2002
3. P. L. Bellaney, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, Khanna Publishers, 15th Edition, 2013
4. Ananthanarayanan, Basic Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning, TMH, 4th Edition, 2013
5. R.S. Khurmi & J. K Gupta, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, S Chand, 5th Edition, 2015
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
68
Remember 35 25 -
Understand 25 35 -
Apply 40 40 40
Analyze - - 60
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define Specific humidity.
2. State the principle of Steam jet refrigeration system. Explain the working of Steam jet refrigeration
system.
3. State the factors that determine human comfort.
4. List the names of coolants that can be used in refrigeration system.
Understand
1. Explain the term “ton of refrigeration”.
2. Explain the working of simple air cooling system used for aircrafts.
3. Derive the expression for performance factor for refrigerator working on reversed Carnot cycle.
4. Classify air conditioning systems. Explain Central air conditioning system with a neat sketch.
Apply
1. A Carnot cycle machine operates between the temperature limits of 47 oC and -30oC. Determine the
C.O.P when it operates as 1. a refrigerating machine; and 2. a heat pump.
2. A refrigerating plant is required to produce 2.5 tons of ice per day at -4oC from water at 20oC. If
temperature range in compressor is between 25oC and -6oC, calculate power required to drive the
compressor. Latent heat of ice = 335kJ/kg and specific heat of ice = 2.1 kJ/kg K.
3. In an aircraft cooling system, air enters the compressor at 1 bar and 4 o C. It is compressed to 3 bar with
an isentropic efficiency of 72%. After being cooled to 55 oC at constant pressure in a heat exchanger,
the air expands in a turbine to 1 bar with an isentropic efficiency of 78%. The low temperature air
absorbs a cooling load of 3 tons of refrigeration at a constant pressure before reentering compressor
which is driven by turbine. Assuming air to be an ideal gas, determine the C.O.P of refrigerator, the
driving power required and air mass flow rate.
4. The atmospheric conditions of air are 25oC dry bulb temperature and specific humidity of air 0.01kg
per kg of dry air. Find: 1. Partial pressure; 2. Relative Humidity.
Analyze
1. Analyze usage of ducts in air conditioning system.
2. Show that C.O.P of a heat pump is greater than one.
3. Compare the various cooling systems used for aircraft.
4. Justify the statement “C.O.P of heat pump is greater than C.O.P of refrigerator”.
68
171
Evaluate
1. An air refrigerator working on Bell-Coleman cycle takes in air at 1 bar and at a temperature of 100C.
The air is compressed to 5 bar abs. The same is cooled to 250 C in the cooler before expanding in the
expansion cylinder to cold chamber pressure of 1 bar. The compression and expansion laws followed
are pv1.35 = C and pv1.3 = C respectively. Determine C.O.P of the plant and net refrigeration effect
per kg of air. Take Cp = 1.009 kJ/kg K and R = 0.287 kJ/kg K for air.
2. How do you assess the performance of Bell-Coleman cycle?
3. How do you assess the performance of reversed Carnot cycle?
Create
1. Generate a valid relation the COP of refrigerator and heat pump.
2. An inventor claims to have developed a refrigerator that takes in 1.5 kW per ton of refrigeration and
maintains at a temperature of -40oC. Comment on the validity of this claim.
3. From time to time people suggest using the difference in the temperature of water at the surface of the
ocean and that near the bottom of the ocean for operating a heat engine. Using 20 0C as the high
temperature and 40C as the low temperature. What is the efficiency of such a device?
172
16ME013 SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain the strategies and models of Supply Chain Management
2. Apply the forecasting techniques to assess the demand requirements
3. Choose the criteria for Supply Chain Management decisions
4. Explain the transportation techniques and network modeling
5. Explain the production planning and scheduling techniques
6. Apply the appropriate Information Technology in Supply Chain Management requirements and
decisions
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO5 PO10 PO11 PO12
1 3 - - 1 2 -
2 3 3 - 1 2 -
3 3 3 - 2 2 -
4 3 3 - 1 2 1
5 3 3 - 1 2 1
6 3 - 3 2 2 1
Unit I
Introduction to Supply Chain Management
Supply Chain Management Introduction – Basics of Supply Chain Management –Supply Chain Decisions –
Views of SCM, Supply Chain Management Metrics, Factors influencing the distribution networks. The role of
material management in SCM, SCM Models, Strategies of SCM, Drivers of SCM, Procurement,
Transportation and Inventory Strategies for Optimal Criteria, Inbound Logistics, Operations, Outbound
Logistics
Introduction to Supply Chain Management
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Basics of Demand Planning and Forecasting
Introduction to Forecasting, Elements of production control - Types of production - Organization of production
planning and control department - Internal organization of department. Importance of forecasting -Types of
forecasting, their uses - General principles of forecasting - Forecasting techniques, Managing Uncertainty in a
Supply Chain, Demand and Supply decisions.
Qualitative methods and quantitative methods.
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Production Planning and Scheduling
Routing - Definition - Routing procedure -Route sheets - Bill of material – Factors affecting routing procedure.
Schedule -definition - Difference with loading. Scheduling Policies - Techniques, Standard Scheduling
methods, MRP I and MRP II, Capacity Planning, Line Balancing, Aggregate planning, Spread sheet method of
aggregate planning
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Information Technology in SCM
The role of Information Technology in SCM and Manufacturing, B2B and B2C, Enterprise Application
Integration, Enterprise Resource Planning, Product Life Cycle Management, Introduction to ERP software
packages and tools
Information Technology in Supply Chain Management
11+3 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Sunil Chopra & Peter Meindl: Supply Chain Management: Strategy, Planning and Operation, Pearson
Education, 3rd Edition 2007.
173
2. Chopra Sunil, Meindl Peter and Kalara D.V., Supply Chain Management, Strategy, Planning and
Operation”, Pearson Education Inc, 6th Edition, 2016.
Reference (s)
1. Donal J. Bowersox, David J. Closs, M. Bixby Cooper, Supply Chain Logistics Management, Tata
McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition. 2007.
2. Ronald H. Ballou, Business Logistics and Supply Chain Management, Pearson Education, 5 th Edition,
2004.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
69
Remember 30 20 -
Understand 40 50 -
Apply 30 30 20
Analyze - - 40
Evaluate - - 40
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. What are the differences between Pull and Push type of models?
2. Define Supply Chain Management.
3. List any two forecasting techniques.
4. List any four software packages for SCM.
Understand
1. Explain the views of SCM.
2. Explain the steps involved in SCM process.
Apply
1. Apply the information technology tools and packages for SCM process.
Analyze
1. Analyze the issues in traditional SCM process.
Evaluate
1. Evaluate the optimal criteria for Supply Chain Management decisions.
69
174
16ME014 ALTERNATIVE SOURCES OF ENERGY

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Demonstrate the concept of different forms of alternative sources of renewable energy
2. Find the calculations on energy storage and thermal analysis
3. Develop the design parameters of wind energy and solar energy
4. Explain the environmental issues and economics
5. Interpret the direct energy conversion methods
6. Summarize the different aspects of fuel cells
Cos – POs Mapping
Cos PO1 PO2 PO3 PO7
1 3 1 1 1
2 3 3 2 1
3 3 3 2 3
4 2 2 1 3
5 2 1 - 3
6 2 1 1 3
Unit I
Introduction
Role and potential of new and renewable source, the solar energy option, Environmental impact of solar
power.
Principles of Solar Radiation
Physics of the sun, the solar constant, extraterrestrial and terrestrial solar radiation, Solar radiation on titled
surface, Instruments for measuring solar radiation and sun shine, solar radiation data.
Solar Energy Collection
Flat plate and concentrating collectors, classification of concentrating collectors, orientation and thermal
analysis, advances collectors.
Solar Energy Storage
Different methods, sensible, latent heat and stratified storage, solar ponds.
Solar application, solar heating/cooling techniques, solar distillation and drying, photovoltaic energy
conversion
classification of concentrating collectors
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Wind energy
Sources and potentials, horizontal and vertical axis windmills, performance characteristics.
Bio-mass
Principles of Bio conversion, Anaerobic/aerobic digestion, types of Bio gas digesters, gas yield, combustion
characteristics of bio gas utilization for cooking
Biogas disasters
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Geothermal energy
Resources, types of wells, methods of harnessing the energy, potential in India.
OTEC
Principles, utilization, setting of OTEC plants, thermodynamics cycles.
Tidal and wave energy
Turbines available for converting tidal wave energy.
Geothermal methods
11+3 Hours
Unit IV
Direct energy conversion
Need for DEC, Carnot cycle, limitations, principles of DEC. Thermo electric generators, Seebeck, Peltier and
Joule Thompson effects, figure of merit, materials, applications, MHD generators, principles, dissociation and
175
ionization, hall effect, magnetic flux, MHD accelerator, MHD engine, power generation systems, electron gas
dynamic conversion, economic aspects.
Fuel cells
Principle. Faraday‟s laws, thermodynamics aspects, selection of fuels and operating conditions.
MHD engine
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15Hours
Textbook (s)
3. G.D. Rai, Non- conventional Energy Sources, Khanna Publications, 2nd Edition, 2004
4. Ashok V Desai, Non-Conventional Energy, Wiley Eastern Limited, 3rd Edition, 2014
5. Km Mittal, Non-conventional energy Systems, Wheeler Publishing Co. Limited, 2nd Edition, 2000
6. Ramesh & Kumar, Renewable Energy Technologies, Narosa Publishing Company, 4th Edition, 2003
Reference (s)
1. John Twidell & Tony Weir, Renewable Energy Sources, Taylor & Francis publishers, 2nd Edition, 2003.
2. Sukhame & JK Nayak, “Solar Energy”, TMH, 3rd Edition, 2007
3. B.S. Magal Franck Kreith& J.F Kreith , Solar Power Engineering, 8th Edition, 2013
4. John A. Duffie William A. Beckman, Solar Engineering of Thermal Processes, Wiley publishers.4th
Edition, 2011
Video Reference(s)
1. http://www.altenergy.org/
7. http://www.alternative-energy-tutorials.com/
8. http://klemow.wilkes.edu/FYF-101J.html
9. An Introduction to Alternative Energy Sources - https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lmyRLIXei20
10. http://klemow.wilkes.edu/BIO-EES-105.html
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 35 40 -
Understand 35 30 -
Apply 30 30 20
Analyze - - 40
Evaluate - - 40
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Name the largest component of biogas.
2. List the advantages and disadvantages of a tidal barrage scheme as a source of electrical power.
3. Give the list of materials used for bio-gas generation.
4. Write a note on availability of wind energy.
Understand
1. Why is solar sometimes termed the primary renewable energy?
2. Why is solar energy really a form of nuclear energy?
3. What is the difference between renewable energy and renewable energy technology?
4. What are photovoltaics‟?
5. What are the different types of fuel cells?
Apply
1. Discuss on spectral energy distribution of solar radiation with the help of a suitable diagram. Discuss
on depletion of solar radiation. How is electrical power produced by distributed collector solar thermal
electrical power plant? Discuss how solar energy is transferred into electrical energy in solar PV cell?
What do you mean by CR of collector? Discuss on fixed mirror solar collector.
70
176
2. Briefly describe a silicon solar cell along with Its constructional features.
3. Explain the types of generators used with wind turbines for producing electricity.
4. Discuss the solar collecting system.
5. With necessary assumptions, derive and explain the hydro-power equation.
Analyze
1. Compare monocrystalline, poly crystalline and amorphous silicon as materials for solar cell.
2. Briefly discuss the importance of biomass.
3. Explain the different types of hydro-turbines and generators.
4. Explain the types and applications of fuel cells.
Evaluate
1. How many types of renewable energy are solar in origin?
2. How is geothermal energy generated inside the earth crust? In India where is geothermal energy
available?
3. How can you get the maximum power output from a solar cell?
4. How will you quantify solar radiation?
Create
1. Discuss the solar collecting system.
2. Discuss any three photovoltaic solar systems
3. Discuss the resources, techniques of estimation and conversion systems of geothermal power.
177
16ME015 ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain the pollution and its effects on living systems.
2. Outline meteorological aspects of air pollution
3. Explain the air pollution and its control
4. Interpret the water pollution, laws, sampling and analysis
5. Summarize the wastes and different energy generation processes
6. Explain the energy conservation in various systems of an industry
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO6 PO7 PO8
1 1 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 1
3 1 3 3 -
4 1 3 2 3
5 1 3 3 -
6 2 3 3 3
Unit I
Introduction to Pollution-Effects and Analysis
Pollution of air, water, and soil; Effect of pollution on living system. Sources and classification of air
pollutants, Effect of air pollution, Pollution from industries, Chemical reactions in a contaminated atmosphere,
urban air pollution, Greenhouse effect, Ozone layer depletion, Acid rain, Photo chemical smog, Meteorological
aspects of air pollution. Collection of gaseous and particulate pollutants, Analysis of air pollutants – Sulphur
dioxide, Nitrogen oxides, Carbon monoxide, Oxidants and Ozone
Analysis of air pollutants-Hydro carbons and Particulate matter
12+3 Hours
Unit II
Air and Water Pollution Control
Cleaning of gaseous effluents, Particulate emission control, Control of specific gaseous pollutants SO2, NOx,
Hydrocarbons, CO, Carbon capture and carbon trading, Types of water pollutants and their effects, Thermal
pollution and effects, Water pollution laws and standards, Waste water sampling and analysis
Treatment of waste water (primary, secondary and tertiary treatment processes)
13+2 Hours
Unit III
Energy Conversion from Waste
Sources and classification of wastes, Energy generation from wastes - Biochemical vs. Thermo-chemical
Conversion and their environment benefits, Introduction to Biochemical conversion (anaerobic digestion);
Thermo-chemical conversion processes - direct combustion, incineration, pyrolysis, gasification and
liquefaction; Economics of thermo-chemical conversion, Industrial applications of incinerators and gasifiers;
Briquetting
Utilization and advantages of briquetting
10+5 Hours
Unit IV
Energy Conservation in Industry
Energy Conservation and its Importance; Energy Strategy for the Future; The Energy Conservation Act, 2001
and its Features, Energy conservation in Boilers, Steam Turbines and Cooling Towers; Waste Heat Recovery:
Introduction; Classification and Application; Benefits of Waste Heat Recovery.
Development of a Waste Heat Recovery System.
10+5 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. C. S. Rao, Environmental pollution control engineering, New age International Pvt. Ltd, 2nd Edition,
Reprint 2015
2. M. N. Rao and M. V. N. Rao, Air pollution, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2nd Edition, 2014
178
3. S.P. Mahajan, Pollution control in process industries, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 3rd Edition, 2004
Reference (s)
1. Parker, Colin, & Roberts, Energy from Waste - An Evaluation of Conversion Technologies, Elsevier
Applied Science, London, 1st Edition, 1985
2. Reay, D.A, Industrial Energy Conservation, Pergamon Press, 1st Edition, 1977.
3. George Tchobanoglous, Theisen, H., Vigil, S.A., Integrated Solid Waste Management: Engineering
Principles and Management Issues, McGraw-Hill Higher Education, 2nd Edition, 1993
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
71
Remember 35 30 -
Understand 45 40 -
Apply 20 30 30
Analyze - - 70
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. List out the characteristic features of food webs.
2. Define ecological pyramid.
3. Define DO and give the environmental standard od DO for drinking water.
4. Define biological oxygen demand and chemical oxygen demand. Write its importance in environmental
studies.
5. Define solid waste management.
6. List the sources, effects and control measures of noise pollution.
Understand
1. Explain the effects of nuclear and radiation pollution.
2. Explain sources and effects of marine pollution.
3. Explain the causes of soil pollution.
4. Discuss the types characteristic features, structure and function of forest ecosystem
5. Explain any one of the models of energy flow in an ecosystem.
6. Distinguish between sewage and effluent.
Apply
1. Identify any four air pollutants and their sources and effects.
2. Write briefly how human activities can introduce thermal pollution into streams.
3. Examine the role and responsibility of an individual in their prevention of pollution.
4. Examine the characteristics of hazardous and non-hazardous waste and explain the ill effects of
hazardous waste how do you manage them?
5. How can you prevent pollution of our oceans?
6. Identify the effects of nuclear and radiation pollution.
Analyze
1. List out the characteristic features of food webs.
2. Compare between sewage and effluent.
3. Functions of the effects of oil pollution in oceans.
4. Examine the characteristics of hazardous and non-hazardous waste and explain the ill effects of
hazardous waste how do you manage them?
5. Explain the causes of soil pollution.
6. Explain sources and effects of marine pollution.
Evaluate
1. Define habitat. Give two examples. Explain threatened and endangered species
2. Define biodiversity.
3. Explain the major factors that are responsible for the loss of biodiversity.
71
179
4. Explain any one of the models of energy flow in an ecosystem.

5. Define ecosystem.
6. Explain the structural and functional components of an ecosystem.
Create
1. Write any four major water pollutants.
2. Write a note on CFC.
3. State how does acid rain is formed and what are the adverse effects on environment.
4. Give a comparative account of urban and industrial waste in terms of their sources, characteristics and
management and disposal methods.
5. State the environmental effects of extracting and using mineral resources.
6. Write general requirements of domestic water storage tanks.
180
16ME016 JET PROPULSION AND ROCKET ENGINEERING

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Illustrate the thermodynamic aspects of gas turbines
2. Analyze the performance of jet engines
3. Compare different aspects of thermal jet engines
4. Summarize the working of rocket engines
5. Apply thrust mechanics to determine forces in rockets
6. Contrast the aspects of electrical, nuclear and plasma arc propulsions
COs – POs Mapping
Cos PO1 PO2 PO3 PO7
1 3 3 2 -
2 - 3 2 2
3 2 2 - 3
4 3 2 1 2
5 - 3 2 -
6 3 1 1 1
Unit I
Introduction to Jet Propulsion
Elements of Gas Turbine theory – Thermodynamic cycles, open closed and semi-closed – Parameters of
performance – Refinements simple cycle.
Jet Propulsion
Historical sketch – Reaction Principle – Essential features of propulsion devices – Thermal Jet Engines,
Classification of – Energy flow, thrust, thrust power and propulsion efficiency – Need for Thermal jet engines
and applications
Jet propulsion applications
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Turbo Propulsion and Turbojets
Thermodynamic cycles, Plant layout, essential components, principles of operation – performance evaluation –
thrust Augmentation and Thrust reversal – Contrasting with Piston Engine Propeller Plant. Ramjet –
Thermodynamic Cycle, Plant layout, essential components – Principle of operation – Performance evaluation-
Comparison among atmospheric thermal jet engines – Square jet and Pulse jet, Elementary treatment of jet,
Applications of Turbojets
Plant Layout of ramjet
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Rocket Engines
Need - applications – Basic principle of operation and parameters of performance – Classification, solid and
liquid propellant rocket engines, advantages, domains of application – Propellants – Comparison of propulsion
systems.
Rocket propellants
11+3 Hours
Unit IV
Rocket Technology
Flight mechanics, application Thrust Profiles, Acceleration – stating of Rockets, need for Feed systems,
injectors and expansion nozzles – Rocket heat transfer and ablative cooling- Testing & Instrumentation –
Advances Propulsion Systems, Elementary treatment of Electrical, Nuclear and Plasma Arc Propulsion.
Cryogenics
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
181
1. Gill Smith and Zierys, Fundamentals of I.C Engines, Revised Edition, Oxford & Ibh Publishing Co.
Calcutta, 3rd Edition, 2007
2. Sutton, Rocket Propulsion, John Wiley & Sons, 8th Edition, 2010
3. Cohen, Rogers and Saravana Muto Gas Turbines, Prentice Hall, 6 th Edition, 2008
4. V Ganesan, Gas Turbines, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 3rd Education, 2010
Reference (s)
1. Hill and Paterson, Thermodynamics of Propulsion, Prentice Hall, 2nd Edition, 1991
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 25 25 -
Understand 35 35 -
Apply 40 40 20
Analyze - - 40
Evaluate - - 40
Create - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Give the schematic of semi closed cycle plant in gas turbines.
2. State Kelvin-Planck and Classius second laws of thermodynamics.
3. Give two important difference between Ram jet and pulse jet engine?
4. State the intensive and extensive properties. Divide the following properties P, ρ, T into extensive or
intensive properties.
5. What is the working principle of plasma arc rocket engine?
6. List any three assumptions of ideal gas equation.
Understand
1. Explain the principle of jet propulsion and how you determine the thrust.
2. Explain clearly the various efficiencies associated with propulsion devices.
3. Derive the equation for calculation of effective jet velocity in rocket?
4. Describe the working of a ramjet engine?
Apply
1. A gas turbine operates on a pressure ratio 6, the inlet air temperature to the compressor is 300 K and
the air entering the turbine is at a temperature of 5770C. If the volume rate of air entering the
compressor is 240 m3/sec. Calculate the net power output of the cyle in MW. Also compute its
efficiency,
assume that the cycle operates under ideal conditions.
2. A turbojet air craft is flying at 800 km/hr at an altitude where the pressure is 0.25 bar and temperature
is -40 C. The pressure ratio in the compressor is 10:1 and the maximum cycle temperature is 8000C.
Calculate the thrust developed and specific fuel consumption. Assume the following data : isentropic
efficiency of compressor = 90% Total head pressure loss in the combustion chamber = 0.15 bar,
calorific value of fuel = 40200 KJ/hr combustion efficiency = 98%, isentropic efficiency of Turbine =
92% and Jet Nozzle = 94%, nozzle outlet area = 800 cm2. The nozzle in the turbojet is convergent.
3. A gas turbine is supplied with 60 kg/sec of gas at 5 bar and 8000C and expands isentropically to 1 bar.
Take the mean specific heats of the gas at constant pressure and constant volume to be 1 kJ/kgK and
0.717 kJ/kg K respectively. Calculate the exhaust gas temperature and power developed in MW.
Analyze
1. Discuss the possibility of rocket-powered vehicle having a flight velocity greater than the exhaust
velocity of the rocket motor.
2. Sketch the layout of liquid propellant rocket engine and explain its working. Give its applications.
Evaluate
72
182
1. The exit velocity from a jet unit is 650ms from an air flow of 40kgs through the unit. The air craft is
flying at 250 km/hr. Calculate the thrust developed, the thrust power and the propulsion efficiency.
Neglect the effect of fuel.
2. How an air craft having a ram jet engine takes off?
Create
1. Draw the neat diagram of liquid propellant rocket engine? Compare with the principle of operation
with solid propellant rocket engine?
2. Draw a simple sketch of multi stage rocket vehicle depicting clearly the booster stage, propellant tanks
and exhaust nozzle, instruments and navigational equipment.
3. With the help of neat diagram, write about nuclear rocket engine
183
16ME017 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Demonstrate the demining philosophy as a frame work for TQM
2. Identify customer needs to enhance the quality management
3. Appraise the employee‟s involvement critically for effective team work requirements
4. Describe several techniques of quality management tools
5. Apply benchmarking and FMEA processes for effective quality management.
6. Apply ISO standards for design and development of products and services.
COs–POs Mapping
1 2 3 3 1
2 1 3 3 2
3 2 1 1 3
4 3 2 2 1
5 2 1 1 3
6 3 1 1 2
Unit I
Introduction
Definition and principles of quality – Evolution of Quality – Quality Planning – Quality policies and objectives
– Dimensions of product and service quality – Contributions of Demeing, Juran and Crosby –Customer focus –
Customer stratification – Customers complaints – Customer retention.
Basic concepts of TQM, Barriers to TQM, customer feedback.
10+3 Hours
Unit II
TQM Principles
Employee‟s involvement – Motivation, Empowerment, Team & Team work, Recognition and Rewards,
Performance appraisal – Continuous Process Improvement – PDCA cycle, Kaizen – 5s, Reengineering –
Supplier relationship – Partnering, Supplier selection, Supplier rating.
Benefits of employee’s involvement, performance measure, balance score card
13+4 Hours
Unit III
TQM Techniques
New management tools, New and old 7 QC tools, an affinity diagram, tree diagram, matrix diagram – Six
sigma methodology, infrastructure, implementation – Bench marking, process – FMEA – Statistical Quality
Control techniques - Control charts for variables and attributes - ̅ chart, R chart, p chart, c chart - Inspection
acceptance sampling, Taguchi philosophy of quality control
TPM concepts, improvement needs.
14+4 Hours
Unit IV
Quality System
ISO 9000 – ISO 9000-2000 quality systems – Elements, Documentation, Quality audit, certification, QS 9000
– ISO 14000 – Concept requirement and befits – case studies of TQM implementation in manufacturing and
service sectors including IT industry.
Need for quality system, Principles, Revision standards.
11+6 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Dale H. Besterfiled, Total Quality Management, Pearson, 3rd Revised Edition, 2011.
2. Subbaraj Ramasamy, Total Quality Management, Tata McGraw Hills, New Delhi, 4th Edition, 2012.
184
Reference (s)
1. James R. Evans and William M. Lindsay, The Management and Control of Quality, 8 th Edition, Fist
Indian Edition, Cengage Learning, 2012.
2. K. C. Jain and A. K. Chitale, Quality Assurance and Total Quality Management, Khanna Publication,
3rd Edition, 2003.
3. Suganthi, L and Anand Samuel, Total Quality Management, Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd., 3rd Edition,
2006.
4. Douglas C. Montgomery, Design and Analysis of Experiments Minitab manual, John Wiley & Sons, 7th
Edition, 2010
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 25 35 -
Understand 35 25 -
Apply 40 40 30
Analyze - - 70
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Examine the definitions of quality by the quality gurus.
2. List out the basic concepts of TQM.
3. Define quality policies and its objectives.
4. Explain the five distinct dimensions of quality.
5. Explain the purpose of different quality statements.
Understand
1. Explain concepts of continuous improvement.
2. Briefly explain the eight pillars of TPM.
3. Contrast and compare Six Sigma with total quality management.
4. Explain mutually beneficial supplier relationships.
Apply
1. Discuss in detail about the various tasks of employee involvement.
2. Point out the needed criteria‟s to be considered while developing performance measures in an
organization?
3. Enumerate the seven magnificent quality tools which form a significant part of the six-sigma tool kit.
4. Discuss the eight quality principles of management on which ISO9000 is based.
Analyze
1. List out essential steps for the quality planning in an organization.
2. Enumerate the 4 absolutes of quality management given by Crosby and also mention 14 steps to quality
management.
3. Explain the three components of zero quality control.
4. In the manufacture of armatures for electric motors, inspection results pf 20 sample of each having 100
units of armatures in given in the following table. Calculate the average fraction defective and control
limit. Construct a “p-chart” and comment about the process.
Sample No. No of Defectives Sample No. No of Defectives
1 8 11 12
2 4 12 14
3 7 13 6
4 9 14 9
5 11 15 5
6 4 16 8
7 5 17 4
8 3 18 10
73
185
9 8 19 7
10 9 20 11
Evaluate
1. Compare the approach of Deming and Juran on quality.
2. “Quality is the loss imparted so society from the time product is shipped”. Discuss.
3. Discuss the crucial elements of Total Quality.
4. Do you agree Six Sigma correspond of not having more than 3.4 defect parts per million opportunities?
5. Vadhodara furniture is manufacturer of executive tables for corporate institutions. In order to control
the quality of its table its QC manager selects 15 tables at random and inspects the number of scratches
on each one of them. The following results are obtained:
Sample No. of
No. defects
1 13
2 9
3 19
4 7
5 8
6 10
7 12
8 0
9 2
10 5
11 7
12 11
13 9
14 13
15 1
Prepare the stable c chart based upon the above data.
186
16ME704 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING & MECHATRONICS LAB

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Create various mechanical components using 3D modelling software.
2. Select a suitable slicing tool for effective 3D printing
3. Build different mechanical components using a 3D printer.
4. Develop simple ladder logic programs to run basic components of pneumatic circuit
5. Learn operating various sensors and transducers using PLCs.
6. Write simple programs on microcontroller for operating different elements in an automatic system.
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO5 PO9 PO10 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
4 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
5 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
6 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
List of Experiments
(a) Additive manufacturing
1. Modelling of mechanical components and their 3D printing
2. Create and print a Screw Jack by 3D printer with ABS materials
3. Create and print a NUT & BOLT by 3D printer with PLA materials
4. Create and print a Piston by 3D printer with ABS materials
5. Create and print a Connecting rod by 3D printer with PLA materials
6. Other models of mechanical related
(b) Mechatronics
1. Basics of Ladder logic programming
2. PLC Programming with CX-Programming
3. AC Servo motor with drive and applications (Closed Loop)
4. Pneumatic trainer kit
5. Micro controller
6. Sensor and transducer kit
1. To study the .STL format of 3D printing
2. Design and develop the 3D model of a broad metal chain made of torus (ring doughnut) shaped links.
3. Analysis of various slicing techniques for effective 3D printing of a Honeycomb structure.
4. Determination of different materials of 3D printer
5. Write a PLC program to operate the absolute and incremental encoders alternatively to control a motor.
6. Write a PLC program to operate the available pneumatic circuit to simulate a stamping process in a
post office.
7. Write a program to operate signal lights at road junctions (5 in No.) on a Main road of a metropolitan
city with a goal of not to stop vehicles at any junction.
1. Additive Manufacturing & Mechatronics Lab manual, Department of Mechanical Engineering, GMRIT,
Rajam, 2015
2. D.T. Pham, S.S. Dimov, Rapid Manufacturing: The Technologies and Applications of Rapid
Prototyping and Rapid Tooling, Springer Science & Business Media, Technology & Engineering, 2012
3. Paul F. Jacobs, Rapid prototyping & Manufacturing: Fundamentals of Stereolithography, Society of
Manufacturing Engineers, computer and Automated systems, Association of SME, 1992
4. Ali K. Kamrani, Emand Abouel Nasr, Rapid Prototyping: Theory & Practice, Springer, 2006
5. HMT, Mechatronics, 1st Edition, 2000.
74
187
6. Mahalik, Mechatronics, TMH, 1st Edition, 2003.

7. David and Alcaire Michael B. Histand, Introduction Mechatronics, TMH, 4th Edition, 2006
188
16ME705 COMPUTER AIDED ANALYSIS AND SIMULATION LAB

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Determine the deflections and stresses in Trusses and Beams
2. Find the stresses through 2D Idealizations i.e., Plane stress, Plane strain and axis symmetry
3. Perform modal and harmonic analysis on variety of beams
4. Perform Heat transfer analysis involving conduction and convection
5. Perform thermal stress analysis
6. Simulate basic mechanical systems such as Air conditioning system, Cam and follower and Spring,
mass and damper systems.
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO5 PO10 PO12 PSO1
1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
6 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
List of Experiments
1. Analysis of Trusses: Determination of deflection and stresses in a
a) 2D Truss b) 3D Truss
2. Stress analysis of beams (Cantilever, simply supported, Fixed ends)
3. Analysis of Plane stress, Plane strain and Axisymmetric Problems: Determination of deflection,
Component, Principal and Vonmises stresses in
a) A Plane Stress Problem b) A Plane Strain Problem
4. Determination of stresses in 3D and Shell structures (One example in each case)
5. Modal Analysis of 2D Beams (Cantilever, simply supported, Fixed ends)
6. Harmonic analysis of a 2D cantilever beam.
7. Heat Transfer Analysis
a) Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D Plate b) Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D Plate
8. CFD analysis of a bend pipe.
9. Simulation of Air conditioning system with condenser temperature and evaporator temperatures as
input to get COP using MATLAB
10. Simulation of cam and follower mechanism using MATLAB
11. Simulation of a simple mass, spring and damper system using MATLAB
1. Determination of deflection and stresses in a 3D Truss made of different materials.
2. Stress analysis of a propped cantilever beam
3. Stress Analysis of a Continuous Beam with Overhanging subjected to Concentrated Load and Uniform
Load and Distributed Load
4. Stress analysis of rectangular L bracket
5. Determination of stresses in 3D and Shell structures (One example in each case)
6. Modal Analysis of 3D Beams (Cantilever, simply supported, Fixed ends)
7. Impact analysis of a 3D cantilever beam.
8. Coupled field analysis a thermocouple
9. Heat transfer analysis of a system involving both conduction and convective heat transfer
10. Heat transfer analysis of a system involving both conduction and radiation heat transfer
11. Optimization of a Simply Supported Beam
12. Simulation of Hydraulic and Pneumatic cylinders using MATLAB
13. Simulation of cam and follower mechanism under different motions using MATLAB
14. Simulation of free and forced vibration of a simple mass, spring and damper system using MATLAB
75
189
15. Simulation of spring, mass, damper systems in series and parallel connections using MATLAB
1. Computer aided Analysis and Simulation Lab manual, GMR institute of technology, Rajam
2. University of Alberta - ANSYS Tutorials, https://sites.ualberta.ca/~wmoussa/AnsysTutorial/
3. Cornell University ANSYS Learning Modules,
https://confluence.cornell.edu/display/SIMULATION/ANSYS+Learning+Modules
4. R. V Dukkipati, MATLAB for Mechanical Engineers, New Age Science, 1 st Edition, 2009
190
16ME801 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING & MANAGEMENT

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Design organization structure and implement management principles in real time business environment
2. Establish layouts for different types of industries, manufacturing, process and service sectors
3. Elaborate productivity and profitability by implementing work study and SQC
4. Select and maintain skilled and sufficient manpower for various business proposals
5. Find total production time and cost by using networking techniques
6. Enunciate a best method of making a product in the production process
COs – POs Mapping
1 3 1 2 2
2 3 2 2 1
3 3 1 1 2
4 3 1 2 2
5 2 2 1 1
6 3 1 1 2
Unit I
Evolution of Management Thought-Organizational Structures
Douglas McGregor‟s Theory X and Theory Y, Maslow‟s Hierarchy of Human Needs, Systems Approach to
Management. Designing. Basic concepts related to Organization, Depart mentation and Decentralization,
Types of mechanistic and organic structures of organization (Line organization, Line and staff organization,
functional organization, Committee organization, matrix organization, Virtual Organization) and their merits,
demerits and suitability.
Cellular Organization and team structure
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Facilities location- Work study
Plant location, definition, factors affecting the plant location, comparison of rural and urban sites methods for
selection of plant, Matrix approach, Plant Layout; definition, objectives, types of production, types of plant
layout, various data analyzing forms, travel chart. Definition, objectives, method study; definition, objectives,
steps involved, various types of associated charts. Work measurement- definition, time study, steps involved,
equipment, different methods of performance rating, allowances, standard time calculation. Work Sampling,
definition, steps involved.
Standard time calculations and differences with time study
12+3 Hours
Unit III
Materials Management-Quality Control
Objectives, Inventory, functions, types, associated costs, inventory classification techniques, EOQ, ABC and
VED analysis. Inspection and quality control, types of inspections, Statistical Quality Control; techniques,
variables and attributes, assignable and non-assignable causes, variable control charts, and R charts, attributes
control charts, p charts and c charts. sampling plans.
Introduction to TQM, Quality Circles, ISO 9000 series procedures
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Introduction to PERT / CPM-Introduction to Human Resource Management
Project management, network modeling: PERT/CPM Time and cost estimations. Functions of HRM, Job
Evaluation, different types of evaluation methods, Job description, Merit Rating, difference with job
evaluation.
Different methods of merit ratings, wage incentives.
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. O.P. Khanna, Industrial Engineering and Management, S Chand & Co Publications, 3 rd Edition, 2013.
191
2. Teslang Martand, Industrial Engineering and Production Management, S Chand & Co Publications, 1st
Edition, 2002.
3. Phillip E Hicks, Industrial Engineering and Management; a new perspective, TMH publications, 2 nd
Edition, 1994.
4. H.T. Amrine, J. A. Ritchey and O.S. Hulley, Manufacturing Organization and Management, ,
Prentice-Hall, 2nd Edition, 1966
5. P.C. Tripathi and P.N. Reddy, Principles of Management, TMH Publications, 4th Edition, 2012.
Reference (s)
1. H. Koontz & H. Weihrich, Essentials of Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 8th Edition, 2010
2. Paneer Selvam, Production and Operations Management, PHI, 3rd Edition, 2012.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 35 35 -
Understand 45 35 -
Apply 20 30 -
Analyze - - 50
Evaluate - - 30
Create - - 20
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. List the five objectives of work study.
2. List any four merits and demerits of committee organization.
3. Define Mc-Gregor‟s theory X and theory Y
4. List the three types of plant layout.
5. List any four functions of HRM.
6. List the three functions of material management?
Understand
1. Explain the factors effecting plant locations
2. Explain about purchase management.
3. Write about Statistical Quality Control-techniques
4. Compare the Mc-Gregor‟s Theory X and Theory Y.
Apply
1. Explain the attribute charts.
2. Compare the PERT and CPM.
3. Explain about stores management and stores records.
4. What are the different types of evaluation methods and explain them.
5. Identify duties of purchase manager.
Analyze
1. Compare the rural and urban sites methods for selection of plant.
2. Classify of various types of associated charts.
3. Explain about the suitability of line and staff organization.
Evaluate
1. Explain the jobs of a network along with their time estimates. Draw the project network, evaluate the
completion time of the project and identify the critical paths for any case study.
Create
1. Create a plant layout and establish optimum resources for an organization.
2. Create a new problem-solving technique for network analysis.
76
192
16ME802 OPERATIONS RESEARCH

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Formulate a real time situation into a mathematical model.
2. Assign a right job to a right person using job sequencing.
3. Make right decisions in operations management using game theory, queuing theory and replacement
analysis.
4. Solve nonlinear problems using nonlinear programming techniques.
5. Perform optimum problem solving using dynamic programming and simulation techniques.
6. Distinguish the process of waiting lines and its applications.
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO5
1 3 2 2 1
2 1 2 3 2
3 1 3 3 2
4 3 2 2 3
5 2 1 3 2
6 3 2 1 3
Unit I
Linear Programming – Characteristics and Methods
Development, definition, characteristics and phases, types of models, operation research models, applications.
Allocation
Linear programming problem formulation, graphical solution, simplex method, artificial variables techniques,
two phase methods, big m method, duality principle.
Nonlinear Programming
One Dimensional Minimization: Unimodal function, Elimination methods, Unrestricted search, Exhaustive
search, Dichotomous search, Fibonacci method, Golden section method, Interpolation methods, Quadratic
interpolation method.
Evaluation of a nonlinear problem using advanced search methods
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Transportation Problem- Solution methodology with examples
Formulation, optimal solution, unbalanced transportation problem, degeneracy, assignment problem
formulation, optimal solution, variants of assignment problem travelling salesman problem.
Solving a given transportation problem using soft computing techniques
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Sequencing- Solution methodology
Introduction, flow, shop sequencing, n jobs through two machines, n jobs through three machines, job shop
sequencing, two jobs through „m‟ machines.
Replacement
Introduction, replacement of items that deteriorate with time, when money value is not counted and counted,
replacement of items that fail completely, group replacement.
Development of a replacement policy of the components for an enterprise.
11+3 Hours
Unit IV
Theory of Games-Various types of games
Introduction, mini. Max(max. mini) criterion and optimal strategy, solution of games with saddle points,
rectangular games without saddle points, 2 x 2 games, dominance principle, m x 2 & 2 x n games, graphical
method.
Waiting Lines
Introduction, single channel, poison arrivals, exponential service times, with infinite population and finite
population models, multichannel, poison arrivals, exponential service times with infinite population single
channel poison arrivals.
Implementing the principles of waiting lines for a given case study.
193
11+4 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. S.D Sharma, Operations Research: Theory method and Applications, Kedarnath, Ram Nath & Co,
Meerut Publications, 16th Edition, 2012.
2. FredErick S Hiller & Gerald J Liberman, Introduction to Operations Research, TMH Publications, 7th
Edition, 2002.
Reference (s)
1. Handy A Taha, Operations Research: An Introduction, Prentice Hall of India Publications, 6 th Edition,
1997.
2. R. Pannerselvam, Operation Research, PHI Publications, 1 st Edition, 2002.
3. J. K Sharma, Operation Research: Problems and Solutions, McMillan, 1 st Edition, 2002.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
77
Remember 35 30 -
Understand 35 40 -
Apply 30 30 -
Analyze - - 60
Evaluate - - 20
Create - - 20
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define Operations research for engineers.
2. State the factors to be consider in Simplex procedure.
3. List any three assumptions in Game theory strategies.
Understand
1. Explain about the procedural steps involved in two phase methods?
2. Classify different types of queuing systems?
3. Explain the role of computers in Operations research?
Apply
1. Seven jobs are to be processed on two machines A and B in the order A→B. Each machine can process
only one job at a time. The processing times (in hours) are as follows. Find the optimum sequence.
Job 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Machine A 10 12 13 7 14 5 16
Machine B 15 11 8 9 6 7 16
2. Determine the initial basic feasible solution of the following transportation problem?
To  I II III Supply
A 50 30 200 1
From B 90 45 170 3
C 250 200 50 4
Demand 4 2 2
Analyze
1. ABC company is engaged in manufacturing 5 brands of packed snaks. It is having five manufacturing
setups, each capable of manufacturing any of its brands, one at a time. The cost to make a brand on
these setups vary according to the following table. Analyze the optimum assignment of products on
these setups resulting in the minimum cost?
Brands↓ &
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5
Setups→
B1 4 6 7 5 11
B2 7 3 6 9 5
77
194
B3 8 5 4 6 9
B4 9 12 7 11 10
B5 7 5 9 8 11
2. Analyze the game whose payoff matrix to the player A is given in the following table?
B
I II III
A I 1 8 4
II 6 4 5
III 0 1 2
Evaluate
1. Fleet cars have increased their costs as they continue in service due to increased direct operating cost
and increased maintenance. The initial cost is Rs. 3,500 and the trade in value drops as time passes
until it reaches a constant value of Rs.500. Given the cost of operating, maintaining and the trade in
value, evaluate the proper length of service before cars should be replaced?
Year of service 1 2 3 4 5
Year-end trade in value 1900 1050 600 500 500
Annual operating cost 1500 1800 2100 2400 2700
Annual maintaining cost 300 400 600 800 1000
2. Use Simplex method to evaluate the following problem:
Maximize Z= 3x1+5x2 +4X3
Subjected to2 x1+3x2≤8; 2x2+5X3≤10;3 x1+2x2+4X3≤15; x1, x2,X3≥0
3. A TV repairman finds that the time spent on his jobs has an exponential distribution with mean 30
minutes. If he repairs sets in the order in which they come in, and if the arrival of sets is approximately
Poisson with an average rate of 10 per 8 hour day, what is repairman‟s expected idle time each day?
Create
1. Create a suitable OR model by taking a medium scale industry.
2. Create an assignment model for a large-scale enterprise.
195
16ME018 COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS

3103
Course Outcome
1. To provide the students with sufficient background to understand the mathematical representation of
the governing equations of fluid flow and heat transfer
2. To enable the students to solve one and two-dimensional ordinary and partial differential equations
using traditional CFD tools
3. To teach students how to express derivatives and differential equations through discretization
techniques
4. To help the students to understand the general transformation equations for grid generation
5. To teach students how to apply explicit, implicit and semi-implicit methods of finite differencing
6. To help the students solve fluid flow field using some popular CFD techniques
COs – POs Mapping
1 3 1 2 2 2
2 3 2 2 2 1
3 3 1 1 2 2
4 2 3 3 1 1
5 1 3 1 2 2
6 1 2 2 3 3
Unit I
Governing equations for basic fluid flow
Introduction to CFD, Basic Philosophy of CFD, Governing equations of fluid dynamics, Incompressible
Inviscid flows - Vortex flow model.
Applications of CFD in R&D
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Implementation of finite difference techniques in fluid flow
Transformations and grids, MacCormack's method, finite difference- discretization, consistency, stability,
fundamentals of fluid flow modeling, elementary finite difference quotients, implementation aspects of finite
difference equations.
Error analysis of FDM
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Application of finite difference technique in heat transfer
Finite difference applications in heat conduction and convection- Heat conduction, steady heat conduction in a
rectangular geometry, transient heat conduction, finite difference application in convective heat transfer.
Application of FDM to transient heat conduction
11+3 Hours
Unit IV
Finite Volume Methods & Overview on Commercial Packages
Introduction of finite volume methods in computational fluid dynamics, Approximation of surface integrals,
volume integrals, interpolation and differentiation practices, Cell Centered formulation, LAX- Wendroff time
stepping. Aspects of CFD computations with commercial package Like Fluent.
Difference between FDM and FVM
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15Hours
Textbook (s)
1. S.V. Patankar, Numerical Heat Transfer and Fluid flow, CRC Press, Special Indian Edition, 2017.
2. John D. Anderson, Jr., Computational Fluid Dynamics – The Basics with Applications, McGraw Hill,
Inc., New York. 1995.
3. K. Muralidhar, T. Sundararajan, Computational Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer, Narosa Publication
House, New Delhi, 2nd Edition, 2014.
196
References:
1. Niyogi, Computational fluid flow and heat transfer, Cengage India Private Limited; 1st Edition, 2017.
2. John F. Wendt, John David Anderson, Computational Fluid Dynamics: An Introduction, Springer, 3rd
Edition Illustrated, 2008.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remembering 35 30 -
Understanding 35 25 -
Application 30 45 20
Analysis - - 25
Evaluate - - 30
Create - - 25
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define CFD
2. List practical applications of CFD
3. Reproduce governing equation for 2-d incompressible flow
4. Define conservation and non-conservation forms of governing equations
5. List the practical applications of Finite difference method
6. Reproduce conservation form of 1-d steady state heat conduction equation
7. Define substantial derivative
Understand
1. Derive basic governing equation for non-conservation form of Navier stokes equation
2. Exemplify mathematical behavior of PDEs (Hyperbolic and parabolic) used in CFD with relevant
examples
3. Brief the following terms in context to CFD, a. Quasi linear PDEs b. Finite difference method c.
Forward and central finite difference
4. Derive 2-d steady state heat conduction equation for a rectangular geometry
5. Discuss about LAX- Wendroff time stepping used in FVM
6. Discuss about grid generation in Finite Difference methods
Apply
1. Find 1-D unsteady temperature distribution till steady state for following case,
2. Determine the forward difference representation for the following PDE which is to be the
order of (Δx), given evenly spaced grid points
3. Given the function f(x) = sin (2πx), determine first derivative at x= 0.375 using central
4. difference representation of the order (Δx)2. Use the step size of 0.1
Analyze
1. “Computational fluid dynamics is widely used as a research tool”. Analyze the above statement and
draw appropriate conclusions on the said statement
2. Analysis of simple fluid flow geometry in commercial CFD software package such as Fluent
197
16ME019 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS IN ENGINEERING

Course Outcomes
1. Understand Human Values
2. Explain the use of Yoga and meditation for Professional excellence and stress management.
3. Discuss the Ethical issues related to Engineering
4. Infer the Engineering as the social experimentation
5. Realize the responsibilities and rights in the society
6. Outline the global issues and responsibilities of engineers in different roles
COs – POs Mapping
1 1 - 1 3
2 2 - 3 -
3 1 1 3 -
4 2 2 3 2
5 3 2 3 1
6 2 1 3 3
Unit I
Human Values
Morals, values and Ethics – Integrity – Work ethic – Service learning – Civic virtue – Respect for others –
Living peacefully – Caring – Sharing – Honesty – Courage – Valuing time – Cooperation – Commitment –
Empathy – Self-confidence – Character – Spirituality – Introduction to Yoga and meditation for professional
excellence and stress management.
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Engineering Ethics
Senses of „Engineering Ethics‟ – Variety of moral issues – Types of inquiry – Moral dilemmas – Moral
Autonomy – Kohlberg‟s theory – Gilligan‟s theory – Consensus and Controversy – Models of professional
roles - Theories about right action – Self-interest – Customs and Religion – Uses of Ethical Theories
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Engineering as Social Experimentation
Engineering as Experimentation – Engineers as responsible Experimenters – Codes of Ethics – A Balanced
Outlook on Law.
Professional Bodies
IEEE, IETE, IE, ASME, ASCE, ABET, NSPE, ISTE, IIChE, etc.,
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Safety, Responsibilities and Rights
Safety and Risk – Assessment of Safety and Risk – Risk Benefit Analysis and Reducing Risk - Respect for
Authority – Collective Bargaining – Confidentiality – Conflicts of Interest – Occupational Crime –
Professional Rights – Employee Rights – Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) – Discrimination
Global Issues
Multinational Corporations – Environmental Ethics – Computer Ethics – Weapons Development – Engineers
as Managers – Consulting Engineers – Engineers as Expert Witnesses and Advisors – Moral Leadership –Code
of Conduct – Corporate Social Responsibility
11+4 Hours
Total: 60 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Mike W. Martin and Roland Schinzinger, Ethics in Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2003.
2. Govindarajan M, Natarajan S, Senthil Kumar V. S, Engineering Ethics, Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi, 2004.
Reference (s)
1. Charles B. Fleddermann, Engineering Ethics, Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2004.
198
2. Charles E. Harris, Michael S. Pritchard and Michael J. Rabins, Engineering Ethics – Concepts and
Cases, Cengage Learning, 2009
3. John R Boatright, Ethics and the Conduct of Business, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2003
4. Edmund G Seebauer and Robert L Barry, Fundametals of Ethics for Scientists and Engineers, Oxford
University Press, Oxford, 2001
5. Laura P. Hartman and Joe Desjardins, Business Ethics: Decision Making for Personal Integrity and
Social Responsibility Mc Graw Hill education, India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi 2013.
6. World Community Service Centre, " Value Education", Vethathiri Publications, Erode, 2011
Web Sources
1. www.onlineethics.org
2. www.nspe.org
3. www.globalethics.org
4. www.ethics.org
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
78
Remember 50 40 -
Understand 50 60 30
Apply - - 70
Analyze - - -
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. What are human values?
2. What are the differences between values and ethics?
Understand
1. Explain use of yoga in professional excellence.
78
199
16ME020 POWER PLANT ENGINEERING

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain the construction, working principles of steam and hydroelectric power plants
2. Demonstrate working principles of diesel and gas turbine power plants
3. Explain the concepts of non-conventional energy sources
4. Distinguish different technologies adopted in nuclear power plants
5. Outline the pollution effects of different types of power plants
6. Analyze economics of power plants
COs – POs Mapping
1 3 1 1 - -
2 3 1 1 1 2
3 3 1 3 1 1
4 3 1 2 1 1
5 2 1 1 1 3
6 3 1 1 1 2
Unit I
Steam Power Plant
Plant Layout, Working of different Circuits, coal handling, choice of handling equipment, Ash handling
systems.
Combustion Process overfeed and underfeed fuel beds, traveling grate stokers, spreader stokers, retort stokers,
pulverized fuel burning system, cyclone furnace, FBC and Dust collectors.
Resources and development of power in India
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Diesel Power Plant
Introduction –Plant layout with auxiliaries – fuel supply system, air starting equipment – super charging.
Gas Turbine Plant
Introduction – classification - construction – Layout with auxiliaries – Principles of working of closed and
open cycle gas turbines. Combined Cycle Power Plants and comparison.
Design considerations of gas power plant
8+4 Hours
Unit III
Hydro Electric Power Plant
Water power – Hydrological cycle flow measurement – Hydrographs – storage and Pondage – surge tanks.
Classification of hydroelectric power plants – Typical layouts – plant auxiliaries – plant operation pumped
storage plants.
Power from Non-Conventional Sources
Utilization of Solar- Collectors- Principle of Working, Wind Energy – types – HAWT, VAWT -Tidal Energy.
Direct Energy Conversion
Fuel cells, MHD generation.
Drainage area characteristics
12+4 Hours
Unit IV
Nuclear Power plant
Nuclear fuel – fertile materials – Nuclear reactor – reactor operation. Types of reactors: Pressurized water
reactor, Boiling water reactor, fast Breeder Reactor, Gas cooled Reactor.
Power plant economics and pollution
Capital cost, investment of fixed charges, operating costs, Load curves, load duration curve. Definitions of
connected load, Maximum demand, demand factor, average load, load factor, diversity factor – related
exercises.
Pollution
Introduction- pollution from thermal power plants-pollution from nuclear power plants-pollution from
hydroelectric power plants.
200
Homogeneous reactor
12+4 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. R. K Rajput, Power Plant Engineering, Laxmi Publications,1st Edition, 2006.
2. P.C. Sharma, Power plant Engineering, S. K. Kataria & Sons, 1 st Edition, 2009.
Reference (s)
1. P.K. Nag, Power Plant Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2nd Edition, 2002.
2. K.K. Ramalingam, Power Plant Engineering, Scitech Publications, 1 st Edition, 2010.
3. Subhash C. Arora, S. Domkundwar, Power Plant Engineering, Dhanpat Rai, 8th Edition, 2016
4. M.M. EL-Wakil, Power Plant Technology, McGraw-Hill Science , 1st Edition, 2002.
5. G. D. Rai, An Introduction to Power Plant Technology, Khanna Publications,3 rd Edition, 1987.
6. C. Elanchezhian, B. Vijaya Ramnath & L. Saravana Kumar, Power Plant Engineering, I.K. International
Publications, 1st Edition, 2011.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
79
Remember 50 40 -
Understand 40 50 -
Apply 10 10 20
Analyze - - 50
Evaluate - - 30
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define load curve, average load, load factor.
2. State different cycles involved in steam power generation.
3. Define Rankin cycle.
4. State the construction and working of open and closed gas power plant.
5. Define solar constant.
6. List any three types of pollutants produced from power plants.
Understand
1. Explain the working principle of steam power plant.
2. Explain the working principle of gas power plant.
3. Derive load factor.
4. Classify different types of reactors and explain any one of them with neat sketch.
5. Explain the working of FBC with neat sketch.
Apply
1. In an open cycle regenerative gas turbine plant, the air enters the compressor at 1 bar abs 32°C and
leaves at 6.9 bar abs. The temperature at the end of combustion chamber is 816°C. The isentropic
efficiencies of compressor and turbine are resp 0.84 and 0.85. Combustion efficiency is 90% and the
regenerator effectiveness is 60 percent, determine:
(a) Thermal efficiency, (b) Air rate, (c) Work ratio.
2. A power station has to supply load as follows:
Time (Hr) 0-6 6-12 12-14 14-18 18-24
Load (MW) 30 90 60 100 50
The peak load on a power station is 30MW.the load having maximum demands of 5MW,10MW,5MW
and 7MW are connected to the power station. The capacity of the power station is 40MW and annual
load factor is 50%. Find: Average load on power station, Energy supplied per year, Demand factor.
79
201
16ME021 PRODUCTION PLANNING AND CONTROL

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain the features of the operations and production planning functions in an organization
2. Develop extrapolative forecasting models for demand
3. Explain productivity and quality and how it contributes to the competitiveness of firms
4. Compare different production aspects such as production control, quality control, manufacturing costs
control, marketing management and waste reduction
5. Develop an aggregate and disaggregate production plan schedule into assembly quantities for end items
6. Explain the strategies of dispatching
COs – POs Mapping
1 2 2 1 - 3 1
2 3 3 2 - 2 1
3 2 1 3 - 1 2
4 3 2 1 - 3 2
5 3 1 2 - 3 2
6 3 1 2 3 2 3
Unit I
Introduction-Forecasting
Definition - Objectives of production Planning and Control - Functions of production planning and control
Elements of production control - Types of production - Organization of production planning and control
department - Internal organization of department. Importance of forecasting -Types of forecasting, their uses -
General principles of forecasting - Forecasting techniques.
Qualitative and Quantitative methods
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Inventory management
Functions of inventories - relevant inventory costs - ABC analysis –VED analysis -EOQ model – Inventory
control systems - P-Systems and Q-Systems -Introduction MRPI, MRP II & ERP, LOB (Line of Balance)
JIT inventory, and Japanese concepts
11+3Hours
Unit III
Routing
Definition - Routing procedure -Route sheets - Bill of material – Factors affecting routing procedure.
Schedule
Definition - Difference with loading. Scheduling Policies - Techniques, Standard scheduling methods, Line
Balancing, Aggregate planning, Master production schedule, Chase planning, Information Technology in
Expediting, controlling aspects
12+4 Hours
Unit IV
Dispatching
Activities of dispatcher - Dispatching procedure – functions of dispatcher-follow-up - Reason for existence of
functions –Role of computers in dispatching
Role of Information technology tools in Dispatching
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. S Eilon, Elements of Production Planning and Control, Navaneet Prakasan Ltd, Revised Edition 2014
2. P Rama Murthy, Production and Operations management, New Age International, Revised Edition,
2005
Reference (s)
202
1. S.N. Chary, Operations Management, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 4th Edition, 2009
2. M K. Starr and David W. Miller, Inventory Control Theory and Practice, Prentice-Hall, 1962
3. J E. Biegel, Production Control A Quantitative Approach, Prentice-Hall, 1971
4. Joseph Monks, Operations Management, McGraw Hill Series, 1996
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 35 30 -
Understand 35 50 -
Apply 30 20 25
Analyze - - 50
Evaluate - - 25
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. State the objectives of production planning and control.
Understand
1. What is production planning and control?
2. What is the need for production planning and control?
3. What are the principles of forecasting?
Apply
1. Develop production scheduling method by using heuristic approach.
Analyze
1. Compare the scheduling techniques for time, material and cost.
Evaluate
1. Compare the scheduling techniques for the optimal criteria.
80
203
16ME022 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Recall the basics of project management
2. Explain the selection of projects and requirements
3. Explain the project planning and project scheduling
4. Apply the key tools and analytical frameworks of strategic management
5. Evaluate project for accurate cost estimates and plan future activities
6. Apply the Information Technology and Tools in Project Management.
COs – POs Mapping
1 - - 2 1 3 2
2 - - 2 1 3 2
3 2 - 3 1 3 2
4 1 - 2 1 3 1
5 - - 1 2 3 -
6 - 3 2 1 3 2
Unit I
Introduction to Project Management
Project Management Introduction – Project Life Cycle and its Phases –Project Selection Methods and Criteria
Technical Feasibility – Project Financing – Project Control and Scheduling through Networks Probabilistic
Models of Networks – Time-Cost Relationship (Crashing) – Human Aspects in Project Management: Form of
Project Organization. Role & Traits of Project Manager. Sources of Long-term and Short-term Project Finance
Sources of Long-term and Short-term Project Finance
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Introduction to Project Planning and Scheduling
Introduction to Project Planning: Project Representation- Consistency and Redundancy in Project Networks-
Project Scheduling: Basic Scheduling with A-O-A Networks, Basic Scheduling with A-O-N Networks and
Project Scheduling with Probabilistic Activity Times, Time and Cost Tradeoffs in projects, Resource
Considerations in Projects, Limited Resource Allocation
Network Modeling and Project Scheduling
11+3 Hours
Unit III
Introduction to Management- Strategic Management
Introduction to Management: Nature – Importance – Classical Theories of Management: F.W. Taylor‟s and
Henri Fayol‟s Theory – Functions and Levels of Management – Decision Making Process. Introduction to
Strategic Management: Vision, Mission, Goals, Objectives, Strategies, Policies, Programmes – Environmental
Scanning.
Maslow & Douglas Mc. Gregor theories of Management, SWOT Analysis
12+4 Hours
Unit IV
Introduction to Computer Integrated Project Management
Requirements of Software‟s, Software Tools and Packages, Enterprise Project Management, Spread Sheets.
Project Organization, Pre and Post Project Evaluation, Project Evaluation Parameters – Causes, Prediction of
Causes, Rehabilitation, Project Audit, Risk Analysis.
Computer Integrated Project Management
10+4 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Clifford F Gray, Erik W Larson, Project Management-The Managerial Process, Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Co Ltd, 4th Edition, 2010.
2. Russ J. Martinelli, James M. Waddell, Tim J. Rahschulte, Projects Without Boundaries: Successfully
Leading Teams and Managing Projects in a Virtual World, Wiley, 2017
204
Reference (s)
1. Joseph Phillips, Project Management Professional Study Guide, Tata McGraw Hill, 4 th Edition, 2013.
2. James P Lewis, Project Planning, Scheduling and Control, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co Ltd, 3rd
Edition, 2004
3. Baffa and Rakesh Sarin, Operation Managements, Modern Production, 1993
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
81
Remember 35 40 -
Understand 35 40 -
Apply 30 20 -
Analyze - - 40
Evaluate - - 30
Create - - 30
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. What is project?
2. List any three types of projects
3. What are the sources for project financing?
4. What are the basic forms of systems model?
Understand
1. Explain the stages and phases of project life cycle.
2. Explain the project requirements.
Apply
1. Choose the Project Management techniques for Construction projects and Software projects.
Analyze
1. Compare Manufacturing projects with Service projects.
81
205

B.Tech Mech Syllabus PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

B.Tech Mech Syllabus PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

GMRIT

Academic Regulations, Curriculum and Syllabi

Department of Mechanical Engineering

GMR Institute of Technology

1. Eligibility for Admission……………………………....................................................... iv

The Vision of GMRIT

 To be among the most preferred institutions for engineering and technological

The Mission of GMRIT

Academic Regulations for B. Tech. Programme*

1. Eligibility for Admission

b. Admission eligibility-Under Lateral Entry Scheme

2. Duration of the Programme

III. Computer Science and Engineering (CS)

a. Integrated Courses: Integrated courses are exclusively designed to provide a

4.1. Credit Distribution for Courses Offered

4.2. Structure of curriculum

a. Full Semester Internship (FSI) Model

A. Course Pattern for Four year Regular Programme (FSI)

VIII 4 (2 Compulsory + 2 Elective) 2 16

B. Course Pattern for Four Year Regular Programme (Non - FSI)

VIII 3 (2 Compulsory + 1 Elective) Project work 19

C. Course Pattern for Three Year Lateral Entry Programme (FSI)

VIII 4 (2 Compulsory + 2 Elective) 2 16

Total 24+4+1 Audit courses 10 + Term paper +Mini project+ 132

Internship report +CCEC +

VIII 3 (2 Compulsory + 1 Elective) Project work 19

4.3 Credit Break-up for Various Category of Courses

Total Theory Courses : 36 @ 3 credits each = 108

CCEC Activities : 2 @ 1 credits = 2

c. For three year lateral entry Programme (FSI)

Total Theory Courses : 24 @ 3 credits each = 72

d. For three year lateral entry Programme (Non FSI)

Total Theory Courses : 26 @ 3 credits each = 78

4.4 Division of Marks for Continuous and Semester End Assessment

Marks Marks for

Range of Percentage Letter Qualitative Grade

5.1 Continuous Assessment Pattern for all Courses

h. Full Semester Internship

On Site Assessment : 30 Marks

i. Co-Curricular and Extra Curricular (CCEC) Activities

j. Employability Skills (ES)

 Assessment for Aptitude skills

Assessment of Soft Skills

h. Industry Driven One Credit Courses

a) It is desirable for a candidate to put on 100% attendance in all the subjects.

Classification of degree will be as follows:

i. CGPA ≥ 7.5 : Degree with Distinction

e) Quick Supplementary Examination

9. Flexibility to Add or Drop Courses

10. Withdrawal from the Examination

a. s/he represents “she” and “he” both

11. Curriculum: The curriculum of all the UG Programmes is given below

Program Educational Objectives

Engineering graduate will be able to

PO 1: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals, and an

Department of Mechanical Engineering

List of Elective Courses

4 16ME026 Safety Management 1,2,3,6,7 3 1 - 3

and depends on the recent trends in the industries

1. Choice based credit system

16HSX01 English Communication Skills I

COs – POs Mapping

Internal Assessment Pattern